Home

Total Access® High Density Expansion (HDX) System Manual

1. Figure 1 20 61181918L1 1B HDX Bay Configuration Front 1344 Lines Fuse Alarm 4 Fuse Alarm 3 Baffle 6 Chassis 6 Splitter 6 Baffle 5 Chassis 5 Splitter 5 Baffle 4 Chassis 4 Splitter 4 1 33 Section 1 System Description Total Access HDX System Manual 5 Spacer Fuse Alarm 4 Fuse Alarm 3 O a Baffle 6 i i q ra Chassis 6 ATT Spiter o EN NG 8 Baffle 5 com gt 2 tj E Chassis 5 Wir spiter 5 mt a E E N z Eci Baffle 4 LL S l u i au i q Chassis 4 EIU Spiter 4 AAA EH o A S34 Hin _ ar o o RA iil il il mm il ji iil inn UI DW jl Lu JU rr n E Nj x el B SAY o el T i j i Ti i MT fil n Figure 1 21 HDX Bay Configuration Rear 1344 Lines 1 34 Fuse Alarm 2 Fuse Alarm 1 Baffle 3 Chassis 3 Splitter 43 Baffle 2 Chassis 2 Splitter
2. 61181918L1 1B Section 1 System Description an O6 EE e oJo e o o oe efefefefefe Y 223 a 0000000 i a Hi oy El Gooocoooooo00 H a Pofoooggoocopdacsooecoq00000 simo E Pm E E E Na a OA des 5 EP daa PE vas gt iF ves v vax ges oo ooon ooor goos oo HIS ooon door Soon doox poom ooon o ox 900 000 ooo Pers ooo doo dada wooo EH S99 S00 2237 222 Soo 99 899 Ses ooo o99 ose o 388 Ses Ses 990 Ses ooo 99 990 Ses a881 SS 999 S00 00 S22 880 99 S00 800 999 999 999 0 S 800 800 900 800 00 990 99 Ses ee 8399 33 eg 99 boo Ses So 883 99 goo Ses ooo beo 553 o G00 00 Ses 00 288 228 99 Soo 288 9999 2 5 Soa 090 Ses 099 Sse 208 Sos 099 999 Ses 099 909 9 S 800 800 800 800 4000 990 0990 099 800 990 9999 8 E 999 00 S00 552 989 goa 800 099 099 009 ses Ses 9 bo ses goe ses oeo 000 _ 900 990 860 S00 900 0000 e ooo ooo ooo ooo ooo ooo ooo ooo ooo ooo ooo ooo ooo ooo ooo ooo ooo ooo ooo Tt 000 ooo ooo ooo ooo 9999 999 999 990 See 990 999 soa o00 see 099 999 809 900 000 600 900 00 990 808 w 999 e 999 El oso daa B ooo 5 doo S999 332 99 80
3. Menu Items ADMIN READWRITE READONLY TEST CONFIG System Controller Submenu Submenu Submenu Submenu Submenu Common A View Change View Change View Change View Change View Change Common B View Change View Change View Change View Change View Change Access Modules View Change View Change View Change View Change View Change System Alarms Submenu Submenu Submenu Submenu Submenu Auxiliary Shelf Access View Change View Change View Change View Change View Change Logoff View Change View Change View Change View Change View Change System Controller Configuration Submenu Submenu Submenu Submenu Submenu Provisioning Submenu Submenu Submenu Submenu Submenu Status Submenu Submenu N A Submenu Submenu Test Submenu N A N A N A N A System Controller Configuration Unit Name View View View View View CLEI Code View View View View View Part Number View View View View View Serial Number View View View View View Product Revision View View View View View Software Revision View View View View View Boot Room Version View View View View View MAC Address View View View View View System Controller Provisioning General Submenu Submenu Submenu Submenu Submenu MUX Module Submenu Submenu Submenu Submenu Submenu Network Management Submenu Submenu Submenu Submenu Submenu SNMP Submenu Submenu Submenu Submenu Submenu TLI Submenu Submenu Submenu Submenu Submenu Security Administrati
4. Part Number Equipment H x Wx D Weight Ib Total Access 3000 23 Chassis 1181001L1 Total Access 3000 Main Chassis 5 97 x 21 38 x 11 12 14 35 1181003L1 Total Access 23 Inch Heat Baffle and Fiber Tray 3 97 x 21 38 x 10 25 6 69 1181006L1 Total Access 23 Inch Fan Assembly 3 47 x 21 21 x 3 24 2 44 Total Access 3050 1183001L1 Total Access 3050 Chassis 5 97 x 21 38 x 10 25 14 Total Access 3000 Common Modules 1181918L1 PCU 5 35 x 0 75 x 10 2 0 56 1181919L1 ECU 5 35 x 0 75 x 10 2 0 30 1181041L3 PSM 5 35 x 1 00 x 10 2 1 13 1181046L1 ESM 5 35 x 1 00 x 10 2 0 63 Total Access 3050 Common Modules 1183010L1 Metallic Test Controller MTC 5 35 x 0 5 x 7 75 0 50 Total Access 3000 Access Modules 1181405L1 Octal ADSL 5 35 x 0 66 x 10 2 0 75 Total Access 3050 Modules 1183002L2 xDSL Splitter Module with Test Access 5 35 x 0 5 x 7 75 0 63 Accessories 1181004L1 Dual BNC I O Module 1 40 x 2 87 x 1 00 0 17 1181012L1 8 Port Ethernet Hub 3 75 x 1 25 x 5 5 0 89 1183050L1 Total Access 3050 Filter Pack 3 44 x 0 25 x 19 63 0 19 61181918L1 1B 2 3 Section 2 Engineering Guidelines Total Access HDX System Manual 2 SYSTEM POWER REQUIREMENTS Table 2 2 illustrates the current draw of each module at 48 VDC Table 2 3 through Table 2 5 illustrate the current draw for the primary expan
5. 7 19 Installithe ECU aene edie ep acl nd PANA Be ek ed 7 21 Flush mounting the Shelves Heat Baffles and Fans 7 23 12 Introduction 24347223 ND ito take Sects n SUE RU EE RADICE ATE E 7 23 2 Prerequisite Procedures les 7 23 3 Tools Req lred uos cu ERE ead oe gee es A TA RAE UNA eas 7 23 4 Materials Required 000 0 ese 7 24 a oot eee RM e cetero apo ioi Nea cid fL 7 26 Mounting Bracket senec PERRA NEP a PIE 7 26 Install Shelves cpu eee A ade he A E aes ak 7 26 Install Heat Baffles oceano arta rt a ee NGA Ee E 7 26 InstallFans lt ad it da a eO aa da a 7 27 Mid mounting the Shelves Heat Baffles and Fans oooooocoooooo 7 29 Tz Introduction iso A TY 7 29 2 Prerequisite Procedures 0000 cece tenes 7 29 3 Tools Required ios oia a Aha aoc eek KET inet oe e wh eed ug Soe 7 29 4 Materials Required 00000 tees 7 30 5 Brocedureg s seek Ree ch hee aoe a pet beak ee eee ee 7 32 Mounting Bracket Orientation 0 0 000 eee eee 7 32 Install Shelves ene NGA bce eae aed eee a Rr 7 32 Install Heat Baffles ainia p04 44 e pb deve ded PNG RA GA DA PO Ee bade de 7 32 Install ans aa ee A aula hee aie eg AG 7 33 Primary Controller Unit PCU Replacement cece eee 7 35 do IINtFOGUGTION ccn and AG Ik atau ake EDNA A took Barns aate 7 35 2 Prerequisite Procedures ooo 7 35 3 Materials Required
6. Figure 7 34 Confirmation of Termination Logoff of User Session 7 196 61181918L1 1B Total Access HDX System Manual Detailed Level Procedures Section 7 Setting System Security Settings in the PCU DLP 797 Change Password for Currently Logged On Account 1 Logon to the HDX System For details refer to DLP 716 2 After logging on perform the following steps C a From the Total Access Main menu select System Controller and press ENTER b From the System Controller menu select Provisioning and press ENTER From the Provisioning menu select General and press ENTER From the General menu select Change Password of currently logged on account and press ENTER see Figure 7 35 From the Password menu enter the old password From the Password menu enter the new password NOTE The Password may be up to sixteen alphanumeric characters All user input for passwords will be displayed as asterisks for confidentiality The Password is case sensitive by default This and other options may be cho sen in the Security Options section of the Security Administration screen Logon names and passwords can be provisioned to be case sensitive for additional security Default accounts are ADMIN READONLY READ WRITE and TEST The default password for each of these accounts is PASSWORD A user logged in with ADMIN account privileges may change passwords account names and privileges NOTE
7. ses 7 63 4 Materials Required n 7 63 Si Procedure niin vod ease Ware queso utto edes qae ke UEM de d 7 65 6 Follow up Procedure sssslslll 7 66 DLP 701 Removing and Replacing the Rear Plastic Guard oo ooooommomoo 7 67 Me Introductionis it Re EL ELE RIVA 7 67 2 Prerequisite Procedures ccc eee eee eee 7 67 3 Tools and Materials Required 00000 eee eee eee 7 67 4 AAA et 7 69 5 Follow up Procedures 000 e cece eee tees 7 69 DLP 703 Connecting a Primary and Secondary T1 Clock sees 7 71 Te a AA le 7 71 2 Prerequisite Procedures cece eee e 7 71 3 Tools and Materials Required 0 0000 e eee eee 7 71 4 ProCedure tk Soh ha A eM AA ee Na 7 72 5 Follow up Proced tes i essen land Paes UNAG dex du Poe RO Reb RG eR Rhea 7 73 DLP 708 Installing the High Speed Connector Module 0 00 eee eee eee eee 7 75 1 Introduction ia Saale oat rs Ad 7 75 2 Prerequisite Procedures 00200 eee eee ss 7 75 3 Tools and Materials Required 00000 cece tees 7 75 4 o A oe cae LIE ERG RR DEEP EN Rael eh aaa EA 7 77 61181918L1 1B xiii Contents Total Access HDX System Manual 5 Follow up Procedures 0000 c cece eee eee 1 77 DLP 709 Connecting High Speed Cabling c cece eee eee 7 79 De Introd UC IO rar tro bos s Sac pang PANG Akan Ge
8. 0 0000 cece 7 35 A Proced re sexo Pee Ree eee Dea ee Ph ae Ret res 7 36 MNPStems sucesos ida DALAN KG eatin Sod Peels Wat AT e HG Bid Dt lada 7 38 5 Follow Up Procedure ssssllleleeee eee ee 7 40 DS3 Primary Switch Module Installation 0 cece eee 7 41 Ig VINIKOTUCUON A a EM Dec s eos aeu DAR aa 7 41 2 Prerequisite Procedures 00 cece eee eee 7 41 3 Materials Required 000 tees 7 41 As Proced re naa tan NALANG Da NAG deem NGA DURANO ada NG 7 42 First time DS3 Primary Switch Module Installation Procedure 7 42 PSM Replacement Procedure ce cece eee eee 7 42 Check Auto Provisioning Setting in PCU 0 0 ee eee 7 42 Common Slot A Primary PSM Installation Procedure 0a 7 43 Common Slot B Protect PSM Installation Procedure 0 Aa 7 44 Place the Units in Service 0 ee 7 45 5 Follow up Procedure o 7 45 61181918L1 1B Total Access HDX System Manual Contents DLP 525 Expansion Switch Module ESM Installation lt lt o oooooooomm o 7 47 1 Introduction iia ose A TRAE KLANG AR A ad Ba ict 7 47 2 Prerequisite Procedures 0 eee eee 7 47 3 Materials Required 0000 cece ee 7 47 4 Procedure 4 id Nana NGA a AN LEE ES DLE 7 48 Common Slot A Primary Expansion Switch Module Installation Procedure 7 48 Common Slot B Protect ESM Installation Procedure
9. 0000 eee eae 7 49 Place the Units in Service 000 000 7 50 5 Follow up Procedure 000 c cee eens 7 50 DLP 526 Expansion Controller Unit ECU Installation oo lt ooooommomoo 7 51 1 IntroductiOno c aed Wee To reete d p deu AG ds ante deut and 7 51 2 Prerequisite Procedures ele 7 51 3 Materials Required le 7 51 A Procedure s x er eke ee ga e ete EE ai MRE MS 7 53 5 Followup Procedure cuidas a ha eI aaa de P 7 53 DLP 527 Metallic Test Controller Installation 000 eee 7 55 1 Introductions toas acd en EM per BeX UE eR ELM S adie die A 7 55 2 Prerequisite Procedures 0 00 eee eee tee ae 7 55 3 Materials Required oet ANG LY GNG ALLAN e Wed abala eatin dled 7 55 4 y o sige ete eee a oe Ru ae pes AS pad Sasha TER 7 56 5 Followsup Procedur e 44 3 0 04 ada n Rei ERA PR RE ra PARAN 7 57 DLP 528 xDSL Splitter Module with Test Access 0c eee eee eee 7 59 1 Introduction 3 ae orm eH he RES em HS eee ee Be 7 59 2 Materials Required le 7 59 Bi Prop Ed UNG pad A Ded ANG PARADA LNG eA a a d rides 7 61 4 Follow up Procedure 2 2 xd dane RIA DAG Pada NG esha ee et x 7 61 DLP 561 Octal ADSL Access Module Installation 0 0 2 eee eee 7 63 1 Introduction 24 esed ss bn AA 7 63 Za Description cis cece eR Tec ee Rats EO duet eed gees CES e PANGA tot 7 63 3 Prerequisite Procedures
10. System Help Screen Account Name abcdABCD12345678 03 31 03 18 48 Unit Number 1 Figure 7 36 Confirm Password Menu 7 198 61181918L1 1B Total Access HDX System Manual Detailed Level Procedures Section 7 Setting System Security Settings in the PCU DLP 797 Adjust Security Options 1 Logon to the HDX System using an Admin level user account For details refer to DLP 716 2 After logging on using an Admin user account perform the following steps From the Total Access Main menu select System Controller and press ENTER o S From the System Controller menu select Provisioning and press ENTER From the Provisioning menu select System Administration and press ENTER c d From the System Administration menu select Security Administration and press ENTER O From the Security Administration menu select Security Options and press ENTER f From the Security Options menu toggle or enter the correct value for each option Refer to Table 7 1 on page 7 208 for a listing and description of the available options 5 FOLLOW UP PROCEDURES Once this procedure is complete return to the procedure which called out this DLP and continue with the tasks indicated there 61181918L1 1B 7 199 Section 7 Detailed Level Procedures DLP 797 Setting System Security Settings in the PCU Total Access HDX System Manual Table 8 PCU User Account Privileges
11. From the same computer used in the previous step Telnet to the PCU and verify that the Telnet session is properly opened and that a list of shelves is presented NOTE Refer to the documentation of the computer system if unsure how to per form a Telnet Most computers running a networked version of Microsoft Windows or UNIX allow a Telnet to be performed by simply typing Telnet IP Address at a command line prompt Telnet is a utility common on many local area networks that allows remote access to another computer or piece of equipment Performing a Telnet to a PCU will result in the user being presented with a list of shelves available for connection Choosing one of the shelves from the list will provide access to the same menu interface that is available through the craft port on the front of the shelf Some versions of Telnet will display these menus in the same window from which the Telnet command was issued while others will open a separate window to display the Telnet session 4 Perform an SNMP query on the PCU If the PCU is to be managed remotely using an SNMP Management Station then the network connection between the PCU and the Management Station should be tested Contact the administrator of the SNMP Management System and provide them with the IP Address and SNMP Community Name Strings for the PCU Have the administrator perform an SNMP query on the MIB II System Group to ensure that the Management System can acces
12. Ec 1181918L1 O PWR O ENET O HOST Q cu Ow O MN ACO E A N 7n2 20c 5 E Figure 1 5 PCU Front Panel 1 14 61181918L1 1B Total Access HDX System Manual System Description Section 1 Features The basic features of the PCU are as follows LI e Functions as a Management gateway for the HDX system Monitors status and controls alarm relays Provides alarm status via TL1 and SNMP Provides internal PAD for X 25 network Provides the SNMP V1 V2 and TL 1 interface for the system Front Panel ACO switch Accepts external alarm inputs Includes a craft serial interface port front panel and rear chassis for user access Software can be field upgraded without affecting service Operates in Host or INE Client mode for RS 485 chaining applications Supports TL1 over TCP IP X 25 or asynchronous RS 232 Supports menu access over TCP IP X 25 or asynchronous RS 232 Provides Auto provisioning Copy provisioning of access modules Includes Security Account Management Includes Terminal Server Port support Allows IP Forwarding and in band management Implements System Configuration Archive SCA Auto Upgrade allows for manual or automatic upgrade of the flash firmware for the PCU or installed access modules Maintains System Event Log Maintains Alarm History Log Includes MUX Network Provisioning Storage MNPS Preserves PCU provisioning on MUX when hot swapping the PCU Supports menu access to the T
13. NOTE A second PSM may be installed on the primary shelf and a second ESM module installed on each expansion shelf to provide 1 1 equipment pro tection on the network bound DS3 and cell switching fabric The Auto matic Protection Switching APS requires additional Modules and cabling as noted below Primary Shelf number 1 host Total Access 3000 Chassis Installed and Powered 28 Octal ADSL Access Modules P N 1181405L1 One Total Access 3000 PCU P N 1181918L1 One Total Access 3000 DS3 PSM P N 118104113 If APS is implemented One additional Total Access 3000 PSM P N 1181041L3 Total Access 3050 Splitter Shelf Chassis Installed and Powered Up to 28 Total Access 3050 XDSL Splitter Modules P N 1183002L2 One Total Access 3050 Metallic Test Controller P N 1183010L1 Total Access 3050 Cable assembly eight cables that connect 3000 to 3050 P N 1181926L1 Total Access 3000 Dual BNC Adaptor Module P N 1181004L1 Expansion Shelves quantities are for one expansion shelf pair Up to 5 additional shelf pairs can be added for a total of 6 Total Access 3000 Chassis Installed and Powered 28 Octal ADSL Access Modules P N 1181405L1 One Total Access 3000 ECU Module P N 1181919L1 One Total Access 3000 ESM P N 1181041L3 If APS is implemented One additional Total Access 3000 ESM P N 1181046L1 Total Access 3050 Splitter Shelf Chassis Installed and Powered Up to 28 Total Access 3
14. Section 7 Detailed Level Procedures Total Access HDX System Manual DLP 717 Logging on via the Security Challenge Key DLP 717 Perform the following steps in order 4 PROCEDURE To log in to the HDX System menu by using the Security Challenge System perform the following steps 1 After completing the prerequisite procedures above a terminal session through the craft port a Telnet session over a TCP IP connection or a terminal session over a modem link should be started Pressing any key will bring up the logon screen Upon entering the logon screen the cursor will blink at the Account Name field 2 At the Account Name field input CHALLENGE and press ENTER The system will generate a challenge code as shown in Figure 7 7 NOTE The Account Name CHALLENGE must be entered in all capital letters for this feature to function properly TID HDX Expanded PCU System 08 10 04 08 23 Unacknowledged Alarms INFO Unit Number 1 Expanded PCU System Account Name CHALLENGE Password Challenge Key 19DFB036 To receive a Login Account Response Key provide the Challenge Key Shown above to an authorized Adtran factory representative Entry of a valid Response Key will allow access when a valid User Password is unavailable System Help Screen Figure 7 7 Security Challenge Logon screen 7 104 61181918L1 1B Total Access HDX System Manual Detailed Level Procedures Section 7 Logging on
15. a o o g From the Total Access Main menu select System Controller and press ENTER From the System Controller main menu select Provisioning and press ENTER From the Provisioning menu select System Administration and press ENTER From the System Administration menu select Security Administration and press ENTER e From the Security Administration menu select Edit User Accounts and press ENTER mh 7 184 From the Edit User Accounts menu select the desired account to edit and press ENTER see Figure 7 20 TID Unacknowledged Alarms Num USER 1 ADMIN 2 READONLY 3 READWRITE 4 TEST 5 abcdABCD12345678 Selection N ext P revious Total Access System 03 31 03 13 27 STATUS ENABLED ENABLED ENABLED ENABLED ENABLED gt gt gt END OF ACCOUNT LIST System Help Screen Edit User Accounts NUM LOGINS ACCESS RIGHTS SOGO H 0 Unit Number 1 Page lof 1 ADMIN READ READ WRITE TEST TEST Figure 7 20 Edit User Accounts Menu 61181918L1 1B Total Access HDX System Manual Detailed Level Procedures Section 7 Setting System Security Settings in the PCU DLP 797 g From the Edit User Account menu select Change Password Access Privilege and press ENTER see Figure 7 21 TID Unacknowledged Alarms Unit Number 1 Total Access System 03 31 03 13 27 Edit User Account abcdABCD12345678 ENABLED 1 Chang
16. e Automatic Protection Switching APS capability on equipment failure or manual switch Provides linked provisioning capability from the on line to off line unit Accepts new software downloads via Y Modem or TFTP store software in Flash memory Supports System Configuration Archival SCA through the PCU Local ATM switching capability Provide an ATM network interface capable of supporting 1344 ports and 8192 PVCs Support UBR rtVBR nrtVBR and CBR service types Provide UNI 4 0 and 3 1 interface compatibility Support PNNI version 1 0 Provide SPVC termination Support ADSL SHDSL DS1 IMA and other line modules Support system management via the PCU Support inband management PVC Provide system timing reference from external BITS clock DS3 received timing access module received timing or a local oscillator Front Panel LED indicators are as follows e Power Status Test ATM Clock Lockout On Line Other front panel features are as follows Automatic Protection Switch APS push button Test Enable 61181918L1 1B 1 19 Section 1 System Description Total Access HDX System Manual Expansion Switch Module The Expansion Switch Module ESM P N 1181046L1 is a common module plug in unit designed to be used in conjunction with the DS3 Primary Switch Module PSM to expand one to five additional expan sion shelves Figure 1 8 shows the Expansion Switch Module ESM 1181046L1 POWER O LINKA O LINKB LAH
17. left and right brace left and right bracket colon semicolon apostrophe feet lt gt less than and greater than forward slash solidus comma period and quo tation inches Spaces and the following common characters are not allowed backslash reverse solidus amp ampersand acute and question mark j From the Password menu confirm the new password see Figure 7 23 7 186 TID Unacknowledged Alarms Total Access System 03 31 03 13 30 Unit Number Account Name abcdABCD12345678 New Password RK RR KKK Confirm Password System Help Screen 1 Figure 7 23 Edit Password Menu 61181918L1 1B Total Access HDX System Manual Detailed Level Procedures Section 7 Setting System Security Settings in the PCU DLP 797 k Select Account Properties Access Privilege and press ENTER see Figure 7 24 TID Total Access System 03 31 03 13 28 Unacknowledged Alarms Unit Number 1 Edit User Account User ID abcdABCD12345678 25 Password I0 Ok ck ck ck ke ke kk ke ek 3 Account Properties Access Privilege TEST Selection System Help Screen Figure 7 24 Change Password Access Privilege Menu l From the Account Properties Access Privilege menu select Access Rights and press ENTER see Figure 7 25 TID HDX PCU System 08 02 04 13 58 Unacknowledged Alarms CRITICAL MAJOR INFO Unit Number 1 Account Pro
18. 1 INTRODUCTION The Total Access 3000 and Total Access 3050 chassis come with mounting brackets that can be mounted with the flanges facing forward or backward in two different locations on the shelf sides Therefore the rack can be flush mounted or mid mounted This DLP covers the Flush mount orientation Refer to DLP 521 for Flush Mounting orientation installation procedures 2 PREREQUISITE PROCEDURES Before beginning the installation described in this DLP the installer should thoroughly review the document PREP 405 Preparing for Chassis Installation in Section 4 Site Preparation Based on PREP 405 the installer will know which steps of this NTP will be required for the intended use of the Total Access chassis To comply with UL1950 requirements the following steps must be adhered to Connect to a reliably grounded 48 VDC source which is electrically isolated from the AC source A readily accessible disconnect device that is suitably approved and rated shall be incorporated in the fixed wiring e The branch circuit overcurrent protection shall be a fuse or circuit breaker rated 48 VDC minimum 30A maximum This product is intended for installation in Restricted Access Locations Only This unit shall be installed in accordance with the requirements of NEC NFPA 70 Instructions stating the proper methods for grounding shall be included within the guidelines of the installation practice 3 TOOLS REQUIRED The to
19. 23 Connect the external modem DLP 713 24 Connect the Ethernet DLP 789 25 Install the PCU in the first or Primary Total Access 3000 chassis DLP 520 Step 26 26 Insert blank front panels DLP 520 Step 27 27 Check to see that the PCU completes its self test routine DLP 520 Step 28 28 Connect a terminal or PC to the craft port DLP 715 29 Logon to the system DLP 716 30 Configure the Target ID TID and shelf number DLP 787 31 Provision the remaining items on the PCU DLP 520 Step 33 32 Provision the IP network settings on the PCU DLP 789 33 Install an ECU in the each of the Expansion Total Access 3000 chassis DLP 520 Step 35 6 FOLLOW UP PROCEDURES Once this procedure is complete the Total Access 3000 shelves should be ready for acceptance testing Please proceed with Central Office Installation Acceptance Test Procedure 61181918L1 1B 6 7 Section 6 Non Trouble Clearing Procedures Total Access HDX System Manual NTP 020 HDX System Installation This page is intentionally blank 6 8 61181918L1 1B NTP 023 Primary Controller Unit PCU Replacement 1 INTRODUCTION This procedure provides step by step instructions for the replacement of a Primary Controller Unit PCU into a HDX System Replacement procedures include the removal of the product from its packaging and inspecting for damage seating the unit in the shelf provisioning and turnup 2 PREREQUISITE PROCEDURES Prior to replacing the P
20. CONTENTS NM5 501 Total Access EMS 0 02 0002 303 RA teeta eee eee eee A 5 3 VE QVeIVIQW an 35 A AA b aahh dad AA CEA e 5 3 FIGURES Figure 5 1 EMS Managed Object Configuration eee 5 4 Figure 5 2 EMS Geographical Layout n 5 5 61181918L1 1B 5 1 Section 5 Network Management Systems Total Access HDX System Manual This page is intentionally blank 5 2 61181918L1 1B NMS 501 Total Access EMS 1 OVERVIEW ADTRAN s Total Access Element Management System EMS encompasses the spectrum of ADTRAN access solutions with the tools and interfaces required to provide flow through provisioning performance management troubleshooting and security required of carrier class network management The incorpo ration of Total Access EMS within the network is key in ensuring Timely trouble isolation and resolution Detection of modifications and additions to the existing network Alarm indication management through fault correlation and root cause analysis Remote multi client access to optimize operational burdens Total Access EMS is a Java based system offering configuration performance network assurance and provisioning functions Based on the Telecommunications Management Network TMN architecture Total Access EMS features an open architecture and robust implementation to support high performance distributed network deployments As the number of network elements and users increase the Total Access EMS
21. From Total Access 3000 Amphenol Connector Pair 1 To Total Access 3050 Splitter Shelf Amphenol Connector Pair 1 MDF Amphenol Connector Pair 2 Amphenol Connector Pair 3 Amphenol Connector Pair 2 Amphenol Connector Pair 3 Amphenol Connector Pair 4 Amphenol Connector Pair 4 Amphenol Connector Pair 5 Amphenol Connector Pair 5 Amphenol Connector Pair 6 Amphenol Connector Pair 6 Amphenol Connector Pair 7 Amphenol Connector Pair 7 Amphenol Connector Pair 8 Amphenol Connector Pair 8 BNC Rx1 Network Receive Rx1 BNC Tx1 Network Transmit Tx1 BNC Rx2 0 Network Receive Rx2 BNC Tx2 Network Transmit Tx2 Recommended Parts For Connection to MDF For Connection to DSX 3 Cabling Total Access 3050 734 Coax Cable D E Female 50 Pos w BNC connectors on both ends TSI P N CA4 xxxx C11 000 1 TSI P N CA1 xxxx X44 734 1 or or S E Female 50 Pos 734 Coax Cable TSI P N CA4 xxxx C12 000 1 xxxx length in feet w BNC connector on one end only TSI P N CA1 xxxx X41 734 1 or 735 Coax Cable w BNC connectors on both ends TSI P N CA1 xxxx X34 735 1 or 735 Coax Cable w BNC connector on one end only TSI P N CA1 xxxx X31 735 1 xxxx length in feet Terminal Block Total Access 3050 Terminal Block connections will depend upon the office configuration The Total Access 3050 backplane connectors are 50 pin male amphenol conn
22. Recommended Wire Gauge 10 amps 14 AWG 9 15 amps 12 AWG 20 amps 10 AWG 0 Recommendations apply to wiring from Total Access 3000 chassis to fuse panel in same bay 2 Recommendation based upon the use of 14 AWG wire with a minimum bundled ampacity rating of 15 amps 3 Recommendation based upon the use of 14 AWG wire with a minimum free air ampacity rating of 30 amps 7 6 61181918L1 1B Total Access HDX System Manual Detailed Level Procedures Section 7 HDX System Installation DLP 520 Data cables terminated in 50 pin amphenol connectors that reach from the overhead cable tray or power board to the level of the Total Access 3050 chassis These cables should be of sufficient length to reach from the Total Access 3050 location in the CO to the MDF for customer loops or the cross connect for the PSTN One Cable kit P N 1181926L1 per Total Access 3000 and Total Access 3050 combination up to six for connecting the lines from the Total Access 3000 to the Total Access 3050 Four 12 24 screws for mounting each Total Access 3000 chassis to the CO or MTU rack or the RT cabinet Four 12 24 screws for mounting each Total Access 3000 Heat Baffle and Fiber Tray to the CO or MTU rack or the RT cabinet Four 12 24 screws for mounting each Total Access 3050 chassis to the CO or MTU rack or the RT cabinet Shielded 2 wire twisted pair cross connect wire with drain such as AT amp T P7 wire Insulated 10 12 gauge
23. ses 2 24 Section 3 Application Guidelines vrl REED RR RERO RR RUE AUR AAT RR a 3 1 APP 320 High Density Expansion ADSL 22 2 22 n n n n nnn 3 3 Te USE 2 Em 3 3 2 Components nde LAN AIN Rie sede M Capit ade BATANG cada Nan RAN E 3 5 3 Backplane Connections between the HDX System shelves 3 6 4 Connections ATM DS3 Network Feed 0 000 eee eee 3 7 5 Connections ADSL Loop iaat ree reer ee E a ETEA E DA aE 3 7 6 Provisioning for ADSL Applications saae 3 10 Section 4 Site Preparation XX PPP Mea Kan LA hand PANG et Mee oh oaa iha a aA 4 1 PREP 405 Preparing for Chassis Installation anaana ee eee eee 4 3 Vis Introd ctiori AA 4 3 2 Prerequisite Procedures ooo 4 3 3 Space Considerations osr aaa a i aa EG a eee 4 3 Fitting the Shelf into NEBS Lineups auaa 4 3 Vertical Space Requirements annaa 4 3 Use of Horizontal Spacers in a NEBS Lineup anaana 4 4 Fitting the Chassis into MTU and RT Applications liliis 4 4 4 Electrical Considerations ss 4 4 X 61181918L1 1B Total Access HDX System Manual Contents Power Wiring and Fusing 2 e eae 4 4 Frame Ground sasiore a Exi IU NG PD ey ee a 4 5 5 Timing Considerations si ek e Enea ERPE E eee DAS 4 5 TALCIOCK 1 terere tested ter te e eden DAGA 4 5 6 DSX Considerations isein ra es 4 6 BE CA ato od A roro m onn e uoc A BAS a et do afr 4 6 7 Main Di
24. Access 3000 chassis will vary slightly The important consideration is whether the external alarm equipment requires a Normally Open NO or Normally Closed NC circuit to pass an alarm After determining what the CO equipment requires connection can be made to the equipment from the Total Access 3000 chassis For details refer to DLP 710 21 Connect the fan alarm input The Total Access Fan Assembly uses a NO circuit to pass a fan alarm to the Total Access 3000 chassis if one or more of the three individual fans cease to operate or power is lost to the Fan Assembly itself Under these circumstances the circuit closes causing a 48 VDC signal to be passed to the Total Access 3000 external alarm input header The PCU notes the alarm and passes the information along as appropriate For details refer to DLP 711 NOTE The AUXI user definable alarm may be provisioned to provide a custom alarm description for fan alarms Connect Miscellaneous Alarm Inputs There are three additional external alarm inputs that can be reported to the PCU on the Total Access 3000 chassis These are marked ACO RMT and AUX2 if AUXI is not being used for the fan alarm it may also be used for other inputs Each functions in an identical manner to the fan alarm Terminal B supplies a 48 VDC source Terminal A expects 48 VDC if an alarm condition exists on the alarmed equipment 22 Connect an external alarm input to the shelf a Using a 1 philli
25. Auto Upgrade M da io us a Aaya tert a KG na Gea 7 127 Config File Refresh Interval nh 7 128 Auto Upgrade Retries 0 ce ete eens 7 128 Auto Upgrade Status Information cece eee 7 128 MNPS NOMS asentan sete eet nad PEG ALENG BAN AG Re Re DAMN Rape aal 7 130 4 Follow Up Procedures 2 eee ns 7 132 DLP 785 Connecting Metallic Test Access Equipment to the Total Access 3050 7 133 Ae Introduction ous oz PONG RAANG KAIN ee O Ba EG aoa ON ng SRE arios 7 133 2 Prerequisite Procedures 000 c cece eee 7 133 3 Tools and Materials Required 0200 e eee eee 7 133 4 Procedure i caras ata Gent oad Nap REUS A os Pid pa 7 134 5 Follow up Procedures 000 c cece eee eee 7 134 DLP 786 Connecting MDF to the Total Access 3050 Splitter Shelf 7 135 Te et osx eS Ra ie Bee ao et a eis Solely 7 135 2 Prerequisite Procedures oo 7 137 3 Tools Required sia rere enun ated gee Oa SOG haaha lia 7 137 A Proced re i oo NANG ee Pee a See Ped ee See ia 7 138 5 Follow up Procedures 020 c cece ete 7 138 DLP 787 Setting NMA TIRKS Parameters in the PCU 0 cee eee eee eee 7 139 4 l trod ctionz in Masel cade b aie ent he aan a ped As a ge dod sega sedi dens 7 139 2 Prerequisite Procedures 0c cece eee eee 7 139 3 PROCECUIE su Rode Exe ens NG leit oe RAE ae Ka UA RS 7 140 Configure the
26. DLP 709 Connecting High Speed Cabling This page is intentionally blank 7 82 61181918L1 1B DLP 710 Connecting the External Alarm Outputs 1 INTRODUCTION This DLP explains how to connect external alarm outputs to the HDX System NOTE Only the primary HDX system shelf supports alarm outputs These out puts reflect the current status of the entire HDX system 2 PREREQUISITE PROCEDURES Before making external alarm connections the Total Access 3000 chassis should be mounted in its permanent location in the CO 3 TOOLS AND MATERIALS REQUIRED Wire strippers Wire wrap gun 22 or 24 AWG 2 conductor twisted pair cross connect wire 61181918L1 1B Section 7 Detailed Level Procedures DLP 710 Connecting the External Alarm Outputs Total Access HDX System Manual 7 84 WARNING To prevent electrical shock do not install equipment in a wet location or during a lightning storm CAUTION Electronic modules can be damaged by static electrical discharge Before handling modules wear an antistatic discharge wrist strap to prevent dam age to electronic components Place modules in antistatic packing mate rial when transporting or storing When working on modules always place them on an approved antistatic mat that is electrically grounded 61181918L1 1B Total Access HDX System Manual Detailed Level Procedures Section 7 Connecting the External Alarm Outputs DLP 710 DLP 710 Pe
27. DS3 Primary Switch Module List 3 P N1181041L3 Menu Tree A 8 Figure A 4 Octal ADSL Access Module P N 1181405L1 Menu Tree A 12 61181918L1 1B A 1 cv al 1 181618119 991 NUS A UIEN SSIDIVY 2301 y sinbi Main Menu 1 System Controller 2 Common A 3 Common B 4 Access Modules 1 Remote Input 2 Auxiliary 1 Input 1 Environmental Alarms 3 Auxiliary 2 Input 1 Shelf Alarm Status 2 Alarm Logs Not Available with S 3 User Definable Alarms 4 Power Bus A Input 5 Power Bus B Input 5 System Alarms 6 Equipment ID 4 Alarm Chronology 1 MINOR 2 MAJOR 3 CRITICAL 6 Auxiliary Shelf Access 2 Access Module Removed Level Alarm 3 MUX Removed Level Alarm 7 Logoff Denotes default saaJ nusy y xipueddy seoipueddy enuey wa sAs x aH Ak L 181618119 ev 3941 NUSW L18L6L8LL N d nod HUN 4911043U0D Areurag Z y e4nBi4 1 Configuration 1 System Controller 2 Provisioning Unit Name CLEI Code Part Number Serial Number Product Revision Software Revision Boot ROM Revison MAC Address 1 Management Ports 1 General 2 Date 3 Time 4 Auto Logoff 5 Logoff Craft Port When DTR Lost 6 Restore Default Provisioning 7 Security Administration 8 Change ADMIN Password 1 Admin Port 2 Craft Port Baud Rate 3 Interbank Comm Mode 4 Net
28. Firmware file specified in the AUC File is not located on the TFTP Server config file not found Config file is not located on specified TFTP Server Incorrect Config filename Incorrect TFTP Server address Wrong subdirectory Sine card Part Number current firmware version TFTP file not found The file specified in the Auto Upgrade Configuration AUC file was not found on the specified TFTP server Upper lower case spelling of file on TFTP server might not match what is specified in the AUC file config file parse error at line 25 col 6 The supplied AUC file has an error and should be re parsed before attempting the next Auto Upgrade TFTP timeout TFTP transfer from the TFTP server to the Controller Unit was too slow Auto Upgrade Unknown Module Module is not listed in the specified AUC File Auto Upgrade Failed Auto Upgrade did not successfully complete for that module Auto Upgrade Invalid Config File Config file specified is either Invalid or has been modified after it was validated The following hotkeys and associated block illustrate the administrator s ability to display the Auto Upgrade status or progress of any slot in the shelf regardless of which module is currently being upgraded This allows the administrator to easily determine which modules require a firmware upgrade and which are already up to date 61181918L1 1B 7 129 Section 7 Detailed
29. HDX System maan 25 Primary Chassis 224 ADSL Splitter CAT 5e Cable s connect the Total Access 3000 Chassis 2 cables for APS 5 Mil 1 11 11 Total A Ml 3050 Total DEM ey xDSL 3000 itter M le bry isama Noa 28 Total Access 3050 Chassis First Set of Expansion Chassis 224 Additional ADSL Splitter Total Access 3000 and Total Access 3050 Second Set of Expansion Chassis 224 Additional ADSL Splitter ADSL POTS Total Access 3000 and Total Access 3050 Third Set of Expansion Chassis 224 Additional ADSL Splitter Total Access 3000 and Total Access 3050 Fouth Set of Expansion Chassis 224 Additional ADSL Splitter Total Access 3000 and Total Access 3050 Fifth Set of Expansion Chassis 6 total sets of shelves 224 Additional ADSL Splitter Figure 1 1 HDX Configuration Features and Benefits The HDX System will easily integrate future technologies Fully hardened for RT Deployment Full NEBS Level 3 and UL Certifications Operating temperature range of 40 C to 65 C System management via Total Access EMS over Ethernet or inband PVC System also fully manageable using local craft or remote Telnet over Ethernet or inband PVC 1 4 61181918L1 1B Total Access HDX System Manual System Description Section 1 2 SYSTEM CONNECTIVITY The multifunction single backplane Figure 1 2 is the key element in system versatility It contains all I O connectors control and signal rout
30. J jump to Status Performance History or Line Provisioning Screen Figure A 5 Octal ADSL Access Module P N 1181405L 1 Menu Tree 61181918L1 1B A 13 Appendices Total Access HDX System Manual Appendix A Menu Trees A 14 61181918L1 1B Appendix B Warranty WARRANTY AND CUSTOMER SERVICE ADTRAN will replace or repair this product within the warranty period if it does not meet its published specifications or fails while in service Warranty information can be found at www adtran com warranty U S and Canada customers can also receive a copy of the warranty via ADTRAN ss toll free faxback server at 877 457 5007 Request document 414 for the U S and Canada Carrier Networks Equipment Warranty Request document 901 for the U S and Canada Enterprise Networks Equipment Warranty Refer to the following subsections for sales support CAPS requests or further information ADTRAN Sales Pricing Availability 800 827 0807 ADTRAN Technical Support Pre Sales Applications Post Sales Technical Assistance 800 726 8663 Standard hours Monday Friday 7 a m 7 p m CST Emergency hours 7 days week 24 hours day ADTRAN Repair CAPS Return for Repair Upgrade 256 963 8722 Repair and Return Address Contact Customer and Product Service CAPS prior to returning equipment to ADTRAN ADTRAN Inc CAPS Department 901 Explorer Boulevard Huntsville Alabama 35806 2807 61181918L1 1B B 1 Appendices HDX System Ma
31. NEBs Limit for Standard NEBs Limit for Standard Layout with Fans Layout with Fans 1276W 1276W Ol 0 Q 0 op c Baffle w Fan 43 CF jJ 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 al E E al 3 M 4 Chassis 3 B M o 2 o 2 5 ADRS JI Total Access 3050 m 5 Dea WW Total Access 3050 G e 2 Splitter 3 M a 8 8 g 9 o f l F 10 Baffle w Fan 2 Q Q 0 0 0 0 0 of 0 al al M Chassis 2 e 9 3 S 3 B DEM MW Total Access 3050 E 5 ADA MM Total Access 3050 5 id L Splitter 2 5 z 9 o o o gt 17 Baffle w Fan 1 0 0 0 0 0 d 0 o 0 o 9 o 9 E 3 Chassis 1 ki a B M MANN E 00001 3 5 DEM MM Total Access 3050 e 5 ADUAR UI Total Access 3050 5 2 o Splitter 1 A i 9 S S E El 9 El 9 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 E N N Figure 2 1 Total Access 3000 DSLAM HDX 1344 ports in 2 bay configuration 2 12 61181918L1 1B Total Access HDX System Manual Engineering Guidelines Section 2 Some of the high power configurations listed have 5 inch spacers between racks Figure 2 1 depicts a spacer on both sides of a 7 foot telco rack Only one spacer is required per 7 foot rack Figure 2 1 shows two spacers assuming that this rack is one in a row full of HDX System racks each engineered for the worst case heat dissipation scenario If only one rack is being engineered for the worst case scenario the spacer should be used on the right side of the rack as viewed from the front The inclusion of the 5 inch spacer provides more area covered by the chassis and
32. Non Redundant Current Draw at 48 VDC Part Number Description Current Draw Quantity Total Draw 1181919L1 ECU 0 005 amps 1 0 005 amps 1181046L1 ESM 0 260 amps 1 0 260 amps 1181405L1 Octal ADSL 0 289 amps 28 8 092 amps Total 8 357 amps Table 2 5 Total Access 3050 Splitter Shelf Current Draw at 48 VDC Part Number Description Current Draw Quantity Total Draw 1183001L1 Chassis with Splitters and MTC 0 146 amps 1 0 146 amps Test Active Total 0 146 amps Table 2 6 HDX First Bay 3 Systems Current Draw at 48 VDC Description Current Draw Quantity Total Draw Primary Shelf 8 661 amps 1 8 661 amps Expansion Shelves 8 357 amps 2 16 714 amps Total Access 3050 Splitter Shelf Test Active 0 146 amps 3 0 438 amps Fan Assembly 0 200 amps 3 0 600 amps Total 26 413 amps 61181918L1 1B 2 5 Section 2 Engineering Guidelines Total Access HDX System Manual Table 2 7 HDX Second Bay 3 Systems Current Draw at 48 VDC Description Current Draw Quantity Total Draw Primary Shelf 8 661 amps 0 0 amps Expansion Shelves 8 357 amps 3 25 071 amps Total Access 3050 Splitter Shelf Test Active 0 146 amps 3 0 438 amps Fan Assembly 0 200 amps 3 0 600 amps Total 26 109 amps Table 2 8 Determining Wire Gauge and Fuse Size Power Wire Current Draw at 48 VDC Recommended Wire Gauge Recommend Fuse Size 2 6 to 5 8 a
33. Restore Provisions To Modules This option functions as a global override to disable or enable the ability to overwrite provisioning options to any access or cell switch module using the restore function If the Restore Provisions To Modules option is enabled the individual module options and the remaining options described below will dictate which module s options are overwritten and which are unaffected If the Restore Provisions To Modules option is disabled no provisioning changes will be made to any module during an SCA restore This option is useful for protecting the current module settings during an SCA restore operation that should only impact the PCU Restore In Service Module Provisions The value for this option dictates whether SCA restore opera tions will affect In Service access and cell switch modules Setting this field to disable will prevent all modules that are provisioned as In Service from being affected by an SCA restore Setting this field to enable will allow the SCA restore function to overwrite data on access and cell switch modules that are provisioned as In Service as long as the SCA restore is not prohibited by any other option described in this text Restore to Empty Slot Pre Provision This option dictates whether SCA restore operations will attempt to pre provision empty slots according to the provisioning in place when the SCA save function occurred If an empty slot is pre provisioned inserting a lin
34. Section 7 Detailed Level Procedures DLP 797 Setting System Security Settings in the PCU Total Access HDX System Manual Table 7 1 Security Options Security Option Type Description Enable Tech Support Account Yes No Enabling this option will enable the Tech Support Account which may be necessary if contacting ADTRAN Technical Support Enable SNMP Security Account Yes No Enabling this option will allow user accounts to be Access modified with SNMP Lock out User on Login Failure Yes No Enabling this option will lock out a user after the number of login failures has exceeded the number listed below for the duration defined below Case Sensitive Password User ID Yes No Enabling this option will make passwords and user ID s case sensitive Null Password Accepted Yes No Enabling this option will allow a Null password to be accepted Enable Lock Out alarm Yes No Enabling this option will cause an alarm to be generated when a user is locked out due to login failure Number of Login Failure Before Enumerated Enter the number of login failures that will cause a user Lock Out to be locked out when Lock Out User on Login Failure is set to yes Lock Out Duration in Seconds Enumerated Enter the duration in seconds that a user will be locked out when Lock Out User Login Failure is set to yes Enable Advisory Warning Message Yes No Enabling this option allows an advisory message to be displaye
35. Subnet Mask and Default Gateway are provisioned in the PCU For details refer to DLP 789 Verify that the HDX System s PCU is properly cabled into the local area network and that the 10Base T cable is properly seated in the RJ 45 jack on the rear of the shelf If the HDX System is connected to a hub or other network device that provides a carrier sense light for each port verify that the carrier sense light for the port to which the Total Access shelf is connected is lit If this light is not lit check that cabling between the hub and the shelf If none of these steps are successful contact the administrator of the local area network for assistance NOTE Refer to the documentation of the computer system if unsure how to per form a Ping command Most computers running a networked version of Microsoft Windows or UNIX allow a Ping to be performed by simply typing ping lt IP Address gt at a command line prompt Typically the Ping program will respond by indicating that the remote IP Address has either responded in a certain amount of time or that no response was received 61181918L1 1B 7 169 Section 7 Detailed Level Procedures Total Access HDX System Manual DLP 795 Verifying PCU Communications Over an IP LAN NOTE Some versions of Ping will continue running until a termination command is entered If the program does not terminate on its own try typing CTRL C to get the program to stop 3 Telnet to the PCU
36. The allowable characters for an account password created via menus include all alphanumeric characters as well as the following characters signs and symbols exclamation point commercial at number pound dollar Yo percent caret circumflex asterisk left and right parentheses underscore hyphen dash equals plus vertical line left and right brace left and right bracket colon semicolon apostrophe feet gt less than and greater than forward slash solidus comma period and quo tation inches Spaces and the following common characters are not allowed X backslash reverse solidus ampersand acute and question mark 61181918L1 1B 7 197 Section 7 Detailed Level Procedures DLP 797 Setting System Security Settings in the PCU Total Access HDX System Manual 3 Change abcdABCD12345678 Password Selection System Help Screen TID Total Access System 03 31 03 18 47 Unacknowledged Alarms Unit Number 1 General 1 Management Ports Date 03 31 03 Time 18 47 32 2 Auto Logoff ENABLE Logoff Craft Port When DTR Lost DISABLE Figure 7 35 PCU General Provisioning Menu g From the Password menu confirm the new password see Figure 7 36 TID Total Access System Unacknowledged Alarms Old Password go KOH OK eee New Password Dock dk kc ke ke Confirm Password x
37. The visible menu is used to change the physical endpoints change VPI VCI information and create the PVC Once the PVC specific information has been entered press the C key and press ENTER to create the PVC Enabled the PVC Press the E key and press ENTER Type the number of the PVC to be enabled and press ENTER to enable the PVC The current screen should show the newly created PVC as Enabled To return to the Total Access Main menu press ESC Provision the Secondary Offline Primary Switch Module 1 2 LI TI ON Mm KB From the Total Access Main menu select the online PSM From the PSM Main menu select Provisioning and press ENTER From the PSM Provisioning menu select Advanced Provisioning and press ENTER If Linked Provi sioning is disabled continue with step 4 If Linked Provisioning is enabled proceed to step 7 From the Advanced Provisioning menu select Linked Provisioning and press ENTER From the Linked Provisioning menu select Enable and press ENTER Repeat steps 1 5 for the offline PSM Return to the Total Access Main menu by pressing Esc 61181918L1 1B 7 215 Section 7 Detailed Level Procedures Total Access HDX System Manual DLP 800 Provisioning PVC Connections for a DS3 Primary Switch Module The secondary offline PSM should now be provisioned with the identical settings as the primary online PSM 6 FOLLOW UP PROCEDURE Once this procedure is complete return to the pro
38. r7 oe Figure 1 19 Total Access 3050 Streaker TAM 1 32 61181918L1 1B Total Access HDX System Manual System Description Section 1 4 BAY CONFIGURATIONS The Total Access HDX System is available in a dual 7 foot bay configuration The HDX provides 1344 ADSL POTS lines toward the customer See Figure 1 20 and Figure 1 21 for an example of an HDX installation 5 Spacer e 9 o MM O 7 Fuse Alarm 2 BERI ll H d pex e m E Fuse Alarm 1 A e mm e mm a 1 Baffle 3 s 0 0 0 0 o 9 0 9 ol JE 9 ol 9 i 4 Chassis 3 ls n a Lune BIL Mi WE 5 ADE MW Total Access 3050 B 5 ADA M Total Access 3050 B E 2 Splitter 3 E i 9 2 g c B Baffle 2 gt 0 0 0 0 0 E ass le e E ol 0 o 0 Z 2 Chassis 2 e 3 E la lalo le la la la lo la la la lo la la le la le la la la la la la la la 9 3 3 o la lo ABBAS SIMI Total Access 3050 o Hi ABER WWW Total Access 3050 gt o o o lo Splitter 2 e e e o Iu 0 El I 2 el o h 6 8 Baffle 1 6 0 6 D BE afs Sr 3 0 0 ol 3 ol e o e H 4 Chassis 1 H a 0 0 OW 0 E eT LU LIOS B ABA MM Total Access 3050 B 5 BEA E Total Access 3050 Splitter 1 e 0 0 o e B e 9 9 El 0 0 0 0 0 0 la El
39. return to the procedure which referred to this DLP and continue with the tasks indicated 61181918L1 1B 7 33 Section 7 Detailed Level Procedures Total Access HDX System Manual DLP 522 Mid mounting the Shelves Heat Baffles and Fans This page is intentionally blank 7 34 61181918L1 1B DLP 523 Primary Controller Unit PCU Replacement 1 INTRODUCTION This procedure provides step by step instructions for the replacement of a Primary Controller Unit PCU into a HDX System Replacement procedures include the removal of the product from its packaging and inspecting for damage seating the unit in the shelf provisioning and turnup 2 PREREQUISITE PROCEDURES Prior to replacing the PCU ensure that MNPS has been enabled and that the PSM is installed and functioning The MNPS is Enabled by default 3 MATERIALS REQUIRED Total Access 3000 Primary Controller Unit PCU WARNING To prevent electrical shock do not install equipment in a wet location or during a lightning storm CAUTION Electronic modules can be damaged by static electrical discharge Before handling modules wear an anti static discharge wrist strap to prevent damage to electronic components Place modules in anti static packing material when transporting or storing When working on modules always place them on an approved anti static mat that is electrically grounded 61181918L1 1B 7 35 Section 7 Detailed Level Procedures Total Access H
40. the PC or laptop to emulate a VT100 terminal Certain HDX System configuration items must be set on a PC or laptop to act as a VT100 terminal l Set the parameters of the communications software to the following 9600 baud rate or as configured on PCU 8 data bits No parity stop bit No flow control Set the PC for direct connect on the appropriate communications port as opposed to dial up connection 61181918L1 1B 7 97 Section 7 Detailed Level Procedures Total Access HDX System Manual DLP 715 Connecting the Craft Port to a Terminal or PC 3 If the rear Total Access 3000 backplane s ADMIN connector is to be used a null modem cable with a male DB 25 connector on the Total Access 3000 end is required 4 Ifthe front craft port is to be used a serial cable with a male DB 9 connector on the Total Access 3000 end is required 5 Plug the male end of the data cable into the HDX System Make connection to the PC or laptop as appropriate for the equipment 6 Logon to the system For details refer to DLP 716 5 FOLLOW UP PROCEDURES Once this procedure is complete return to the procedure which called out this DLP and continue with the tasks indicated there 7 98 61181918L1 1B DLP 716 Logging on to the System 1 INTRODUCTION Once connected to the Primary Controller Unit PCU via either a VT100 terminal or PC configured as a VT100 terminal it is necessary to logon to the system to gain acce
41. vv al 1 181618119 penunguoo aa11 nuay 118161811 N d nod HUN 4911043005 Aewid Z Y 9INBIY TID HSVLALHDX02 Hardware Primary MUX Inst Secondary MUX NONE Ethernet Link Up Inband Link Down 3 Status Alarm Relays Critical Major Minor Ext ACO Remote Input 1 Aux 1 Input 1 Aux 2 Input 1 Power Bus A 1 Power Bus B 1 N ext P revious 1 Test Alarm Relays 4 Test 2 Self Test and Restart 1 Master Alarm Log Report 5 Controller Report 2 System Event Log Report PCU System Status alled Visual Inactive Inactive Inactive Inactive Inactive Inactive Inactive Inactive Inactive 3 Configuration Provisioning Report 4 Status Report 5 All Reports 02 11 04 14 34 Unit Number 1 Shelf 1 of 6 Alarms Open Fuse ACO Audible Inactive Inactive Inactive N A MAJOR MAJOR MAJOR MAJOR MAJOR System Help Screen e Critical Audible Relay e Critical Visual Relay e Major Audible Relay e Major Visual Relay e Minor Audible Relay le Minor Visual Relay e Auxiliary 1 Rela le Auxiliary 2 Relay e All Alarm Relays saaJ nusy y xipueddy seoipueddy enueja wa sAs X aH a l 1 181618119 GV penunuoo 291 nuay 118161811 N d nod HUN 4911043U0D Keuig Z Y enBi4 1 Write Module Provisioning 2 MUX Module 2 MUX Auto Provisioning 3 Module Auto Provisioning 1 IP Network Provisioning 3 Network Management 2
42. 000 000 ooo ooo 000 ooo 22222 ST 20222 El 000 ooo 000 000 000 ooo 888 CE 90009 000 ooo 000 000 000 000 T 90000 000 000 000 000 000 000 99999 999 000 ooo 000 000 000 000 ax 82223 eco 000 ooo 000 000 ooo 0000 9099 s 909 000 000 000 000 000 000 Hi 22000 22000 000 000 000 000 000 000 Qn ooo ooo ooo ooo ooo ooo 9999 g HL 000 000 000 000 000 000 60000 90000 000 ooo 000 000 000 ooo 99999 e 99999 2000 32000 2000 32000 2000 2000 econo 20000 00000 00000 00000 00000 000001 00000 PAR E a o00000000doo Nil AB AB kad pad o 0 0 0 00 000000 Figure 3 3 DS3 Network Connection 418100413 5 CONNECTIONS ADSL LOOP The Total Access 3000 chassis Octal ADSL Access Modules provides the ADSL signals to the loop via the eight 64 pin amphenol connectors on the rear of the Total Access 3050 chassis Table 3 1 provides a connection chart to aid in making the proper connections between the Total Access 3000 backplane the Total Access 3050 chassis and the main distribution frame MDF The associated slot and port mapping is shown in Table 3 2 which also provides a detailed breakdown of the POTS and LINE connector pin usage for the Total Access 3050 Splitter Shelf connections 61181918L1 1B 3 7 Section 3 Application Guidelines APP 320 High Density Expansion ADSL Total Access HDX System Manual Table 3 1 Total Access 3000 To Total Access 3050 Splitter Shelf Connection Chart
43. 10 12 wire to reach from the terminals on the fuse and alarm panel to the power terminals on the Total Access 3000 chassis Be sure to include enough length to allow for tying the wire neatly to the frame as specified by CO SOP Wire color should differentiate between 48 VDC supply and return according to CO SOP For power wire gauge refer to Table 7 1 e Using the crimping tool connect an appropriate lug to each end of the wires f Using a screwdriver appropriate for the fuse and alarm panel terminals and a straight slot screw driver for the Total Access 3000 power terminal connect the ends of one wire between the A CO 48 VDC supply and the 48 VDC PRI terminal on the Total Access 3000 backplane g Connect three more power wires connecting the A CO 48 VDC return with TS1 48 VDC RET B CO 48 VDC supply with TS2 48 VDC SEC and B CO 48 VDC return with TS2 48 VDC RET 8 Connect power and return to each Total Access 3050 chassis After connecting and checking the ground to the Total Access 3050 chassis connect power to the shelves Check to make sure the power source is providing the correct power and polarity to the chassis To connect power and return to the shelf a Determine which fuse circuit breaker pairs are to supply power and return to the Total Access 3050 chassis 61181918L1 1B 7 11 Section 7 Detailed Level Procedures Total Access HDX System Manual DLP 520 HDX System Installa
44. 1181405118 slot 1 B 00 00 00 Idle 118104113 needs upgrade A00 25 A00 33 F irst Slot L ast Selection TID HDX SYSTEM 2 ext C lear TFTP Cache R eset Config File Cache A bort S tart Prev Shelf Next Figure 7 10 Auto Upgrade Status Screen The Auto Upgrade Status menu allows an administrator to control and monitor the Auto Upgrade system Entering this screen does not invoke any operations and it may be safely accessed by several adminis trative menu sessions at the same time TFTP File Cache Expire The TFTP File Cache Expire option specifies in minutes how many minutes a flash file may be retained on the PCU before it will again be retrieved from the TFTP server If a subsequent request for the same file is made within the Cache Expire time the local copy of the file will be reused thus reducing upgrade time and network traffic A value of zero 0 indicates TFTP flash file caching should be disabled The TFTP cache is used during all TFTP gets such as MUX Module and PCU firmware upgrades and SLA operations 7 126 61181918L1 1B Total Access HDX System Manual Detailed Level Procedures Section 7 Auto Upgrade for System Firmware Upgrade DLP 784 Firmware TFTP server The Firmware TFTP Server field is the setting for the firmware TFTP hostname IP where Auto Upgrade configuration and module firmware files will be retrieved Auto Upgrade Config Basepath The Auto Upgrade Config Basepat
45. 15 of FCC Rules which are designed to provide a reasonable protection against such interference when operated in a commercial environment This equipment does not exceed Class A limits for radio emission for digital apparatus set out in the Radio Interference Regulation of the Canadian Department of Communications ADTRAN offers training on our most popular products These courses include overviews on product features and functions while covering applications of ADTRAN s product lines ADTRAN provides a variety of training options including customized training and course taught at our facilities or at customer sites For more information about training please contact us Training Phone 800 615 1176 ext 7500 Training Fax 256 963 6700 Training Email training adtran com Total Access HDX System Manual About this Manual IXL 001 Contents Section 1 Section 2 Section 3 Section 4 Section 5 Section 6 Section 7 ADTRAN s HDX System is used to deliver a variety of digital services including ATM TI TI IMA SHDSL ADSL IDSL and E1 over copper loops This manual provides a complete description of the system and system software The purpose of this manual is to provide the technician system administrator and manager with general and specific information related to the planning installation operation and maintenance of the HDX System The manual is arranged so that needed information can be quickly and eas
46. 18 MDF vitara quise PAN vibvadis asta e Sa d gerat 2 19 HDX Shelf Connection els 2 20 PS Na pananda kp haan Ba a TD 2 21 Cable ROUMO cesa dra asa 2 22 6 Test Access Support eni c A AA RR MR ERA 2 24 Metallic Test Access Interface lisse n 2 24 FIGURES Figure 2 1 Total Access 3000 DSLAM HDX 1344 ports in 2 bay configuration 2 12 Figure 2 2 SNMP Telnet and TL1 over 10Base T sees 2 15 Figure 2 3 Clocking Functions e mm mn 2 17 Figure 2 4 Backplane and Amphenol Connectors for Total Access 3050 2 19 Figure 2 5 Pinout for a Single Connector 0 0 eh 2 19 Figure 2 6 Connection from Total Access 3000 Chassis to Total Access 3050 Chassis 2 20 61181918L1 1B 2 1 Section 2 Engineering Guidelines Total Access HDX System Manual Figure 2 7 Figure 2 8 Figure 2 9 Figure 2 10 Table 2 1 Table 2 2 Table 2 3 Table 2 4 Table 2 5 Table 2 6 Table 2 7 Table 2 8 Table 2 9 Table 2 10 Table 2 11 Table 2 12 Table 2 13 Table 2 14 Table 2 15 Table 2 16 Table 2 17 2 2 BNC Adaptor Module 2 eee 2 21 Heat Baffle with Cables Routed Out the Side 1 0 2 ee ee 2 22 Heat Baffle with Cables Routed Out the Back 0 000 sees 2 23 Wire wrap Pins for Metallic Test Access 002000 eects 2 24 TABLES HDX System Equipment Dimensions and Weights 20 0c eee eee 2 3 Current Draw o
47. 2 6 Current Draw Worksheet at 48 VDC 2 eee 2 7 Heat Dissipation at 48 VDC 200020 eee 2 8 HDX Primary Shelf Non Redundant Heat Dissipati0N oo o ooo oo o 2 9 HDX Expansion Shelf Non Redundant Heat Dissipation 2 9 HDX First Bay 3 Systems Heat Dissipation llli cece eee 2 9 HDX Second Bay 3 Systems Heat Dissipation aa 2 10 Heat Dissipation Worksheet at 48VDC 0 00020 eee 2 10 Heat Dissipation for Total Access 3000 System 0 0000 cece eee 2 11 Heat Dissipation for Total Access 3000 System 2 000 cece eee 2 11 Total Access 3000 To Total Access 3050 Splitter Shelf Connection Chart 3 8 Total Access 3050 Splitter Shelf Amphenol Connector Pinouts 3 9 TSI Amphenol Cable Model Number for DSX 1 Applications 4 6 Recommended Wire Gauge and Fuse Sizes 0 6 4 HDX System Module Quantities 0000s 6 16 Recommended Wire Gauge and Fuse Sizes 1 2 0 0 0 eee eee 7 6 Recommended Wire Gauge and Fuse Sizes cece eee eee 7 24 Recommended Wire Gauge and Fuse Sizes 2 00 ee 7 30 ADMIN Connector Pinout J31 J18 2 2 eae 7 93 Account Names and Passwords 0000 eee eee eee eae 7 100 Common Auto Upgrade Errors 0 0 eh 7 129 Total Access 3050 Splitter Shelf Amphenol Connector Pinouts 7 136 Total Access 3050 Splitte
48. 22 7 48 23 8 49 24 The 25th Pair on each LINE and POTS connector except the 217 224 connectors are straight through connections which do not utilize the 50 25 xDSL Splitter Module Note 8 TIs for IMA from Slot 27 amp 28 of the Total Access 3000 shelf The IMA TI 1 8 TX pairs will be on the LINE connector labeled 217 224 The IMA TI 1 8 RX pairs will be on the POTS connector labeled 217 224 No cut thru card is necessary in the Total Access 3050 chassis for these connections AGW 9ui 0 Buin JIBYS JAYIIAS OGOE sseooy ejo 1 AjueA L6Z d10 SoJnpaooJg 9 9 pa lelag Z uonag enuey wels s XAH sseooy eJo Total Access HDX System Manual Detailed Level Procedures Section 7 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 Verify Total Access 3050 Splitter Shelf Wiring to the MDF DLP 791 Check for green Pair 2 LED Visually verify that the LED on the TAG module labeled Pair 2 is lit green Connect Ring of Pair 2 to ground Disconnect Tip of Pair 2 from ground Connect Ring of Pair 2 to frame ground Check for red Pair 2 LED Visually verify that the LED on the TAG module labeled Pair 2 is lit red Connect Tip of Pair 3 to ground Move the test jack from the Pair 2 position to the Pair 3 position for the same slot Connect Tip of Pair 3 to frame ground Check for green Pair 3 LED Visually verify that the LED on the TAG module labeled Pair 3 is lit green Connect Ring of Pai
49. 61181918L1 1B Create User Account Menu 1 0 0 0 c n 7 178 Enter User ID Menusi ois cereri ce ee has 7 179 Password MENU xotg pack a ld KG pa haah E Ika ba 7 180 Account Properties Access Privileges Menu cece 7 181 User Account Access Rights Menu 000 e eee eee 7 182 Account Properties Access Privileges Menu auaa eee ee eee 7 183 Edit User Accounts Menu raaes enira e REER een eee 7 184 Edit User Account Menu 0 0 0 ce n 7 185 Change Password Access Privilege Menu a 7 185 Edit Password Menu 0 0 eee 7 186 Change Password Access Privilege Menu a 7 187 Account Properties Access Privileges Menu 0 00 an 7 187 Access Rights Menu 0 2 00 a AA e hr ees 7 188 Account Properties Access Privileges Menu c eee ee eee 7 189 Edit User Accounts Selection Menu 000 ee eee 7 190 Edit User Account Menu 00 000 n 7 191 Edit User Accounts Selection Menu 0000 ee eee 7 192 Edit User Account Menu 2 0 22 hn 7 193 Users Currently Logged On Menu 2 2 2220 es 7 194 Users Currently Logged On Menu 0 0 0 cet eh 7 195 Confirmation of Termination Logoff of User Session 7 196 PCU General Provisioning Menu 0 00 eee es 7 198 Confirm Password Menu 1 0 00 EES R ak a E VAES eae 7 198 Total Access 3050 to Total Access 3000 Connection 7 217 Total
50. 61181918L1 1B Total Access HDX System Manual Section 7 Detailed Level Procedures Mid mounting the Shelves Heat Baffles and Fans DLP 522 61181918L1 1B WARNING To prevent electrical shock do not install equipment in a wet location or during a lightning storm CAUTION Electronic modules can be damaged by static electrical discharge Before handling modules wear an antistatic discharge wrist strap to prevent dam age to electronic components Place modules in antistatic packing mate rial when transporting or storing When working on modules always place them on an approved antistatic mat that is electrically grounded 7 31 Section 7 Detailed Level Procedures Total Access HDX System Manual DLP 522 Mid mounting the Shelves Heat Baffles and Fans DLP 522 Perform the following steps in order 5 PROCEDURE Mounting Bracket Orientation Attaching the mounting brackets to the Total Access chassis requires four screws on each side and are supplied with the unit 1 For mid mounting use a 2 phillips head screwdriver and attach the mounting brackets with the flanges facing forward on the front mounting holes Install Shelves 2 After attaching the mounting brackets to the Total Access chassis sides use the appropriate screws for the CO rack type and mount the Total Access chassis in the rack For mid mount systems the Total Access chassis must be mounted from the front of the rack with th
51. 7 177 Section 7 Detailed Level Procedures Total Access HDX System Manual DLP 797 Setting System Security Settings in the PCU DLP 797 Perform the following steps in order 4 PROCEDURE Create New User Account 1 Logon to the HDX System using an Admin level user account For details refer to DLP 716 2 After logging on using an Admin user account perform the following steps From the Total Access Main menu select System Controller and press ENTER o S From the System Controller main menu select Provisioning and press ENTER From the Provisioning menu select System Administration and press ENTER c d From the System Administration menu select Security Administration and press ENTER O From the Security Administration menu select Create New User Account and press ENTER From the Create New User Account menu select User ID and press ENTER see Figure 7 14 g From the User ID menu enter the new user ID see Figure 7 15 on page 179 TID HDX PCU System 08 02 04 13 24 Unacknowledged Alarms CRITICAL MAJOR INFO Unit Number T Create User Account 1 User ID Password Account Properties Access Privilege Selection D HDX System Help Screen Figure 7 14 Create User Account Menu 7 178 61181918L1 1B Total Access HDX System Manual Detailed Level Procedures Section 7 Setting System Security Settings in the PCU DLP 797 TID HDX PCU System 08 02
52. 8 Replace the plastic guard over the Fan Assembly terminal block 5 FOLLOW UP PROCEDURES Once this procedure is complete return to the procedure which called out this DLP and continue with the tasks indicated there 7 90 61181918L1 1B DLP 713 Connecting a Shelf to an External Modem 1 INTRODUCTION The HDX System can be accessed and managed via modem however the Primary Controller Unit PCU does not support hardware flow control In order to connect to the HDX System via modem the modem must be a full featured modem such as the Paradyne COMSPHERE 3800 Plus series with the capability to ignore hardware flow control as required by the HDX System and described below The HDX System can be accessed and managed via modem allowing the same capabilities to the user as if connected to the local craft access port on the front of the PCU Access is provided by a female DB 25 connector J31 and labeled ADMIN located on the upper right corner of the backplane 2 PREREQUISITE PROCEDURES The Total Access 3000 chassis should be mounted in its permanent location in the CO before connecting to an external modem 3 TOOLS AND MATERIALS REQUIRED Modem Modem cable Small Straight Slot screwdriver 61181918L1 1B 7 91 Section 7 Detailed Level Procedures DLP 713 Connecting a Shelf to an External Modem Total Access HDX System Manual 7 92 WARNING To prevent electrical shock do not install equipment in a wet loc
53. Access 3050 Metallic Test Controller Module Installation and Maintenance Practice Total Access 3050 xDSL Splitter Module with Test Access Job Aid Total Access 23 Inch Heat Baffle and Fiber Tray Job Aid Total Access 23 Inch Fan Assembly Job Aid Total Access 23 Inch Heat Baffle and Fiber Tray Total Access 23 Inch Fan Assembly Installation and Maintenance Practice Total Access 3000 BNC I O Module Installation and Maintenance Practice Total Access 3050 to Total Access 3000 Cable Assembly Job Aid Total Access 3000 3010 8 Port Ethernet Hub Installation and Maintenance Practice Part Number 64150TAEMSL 1 1 64150TAEMSL 1 19 64150TAEMSL 1 30 61181018L1 35 61181001L1 22 61183001L1 22 61181001L1 5 61183001L1 5 61181918L1 22 61181919L1 22 61181041L3 22 61181046L 1 22 61181405L1 22 61181405L1 5 61183010L1 5 61183002L2 22 61181003L1 22 61181006L1 22 61181003L1 5 61181006L1 5 61181004L1 5 611819261 1 22 61181012L1 5 61181918L1 1B Total Access HDX System Manual Certification The HDX System is NRTL listed to the applicable UL standards Federal Communications Commission FCC Statement Training 61181918L1 1B This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual may cause interference to radio communications It has been tested and found to comply with limits for a Class A digital device pursuant to Subpart B of Part
54. Access HDX System Manual Detailed Level Procedures Section 7 Installing the High Speed Connector Module DLP 708 DLP 708 Perform the following steps in order 4 PROCEDURE 1 Carefully line up the two screw holes in the adapter module with the holes drilled and threaded in the backplane NOTE The 24 pins on the underside of the adapter module must line up with the 24 pin female connector on the backplane Do not force the adapter into place There are also two guide pins on the adapter at either end of the 24 pin connector that line up with holes on the backplane to facilitate align ment 2 Carefully press the adapter into place on the backplane socket 3 Using a 1 phillips head screwdriver secure the adapter to the backplane with the two screws provided 5 FOLLOW UP PROCEDURES Once this procedure is complete return to the procedure which called out this DLP and continue with the tasks indicated there 61181918L1 1B 7 77 Section 7 Detailed Level Procedures Total Access HDX System Manual DLP 708 Installing the High Speed Connector Module This page is intentionally blank 7 78 61181918L1 1B DLP 709 Connecting High Speed Cabling 1 INTRODUCTION After attaching the high speed metallic interface module to the backplane data cabling must be installed from the network to route the high speed signal to the HDX System This interface will normally be on coaxial cable 2 PREREQUISITE PROCED
55. Change Password Access Privilege 2 Enable Disable User Account Selection 1 User ID 3 Delete User 3 Create New User Accounts 2 Password 3 Account Properties Access Privilege 1 Enable Tech Support Account Yes 4 Security Options 2 Enable SNMP Security Account Access No 5 Restore Back to Default Accounts 3 Lock Out User on Login Failure No 6 Access Tech Support Account 4 Case Sensitive Password User ID Yes 5 Null Password Accepted No 6 Enable Lock Out Alarm Yes 7 Number of Login Failure Before Lock 0 1 2 5 5 8 Lock Out Duration in Seconds 3 60 60 9 Enable Advisory Warning Message No 10 Security Advisory Warning 11 Enable Multiple Login Accounts y xipueddy seal nuay seoipueddy enuey wa sAs XAH ev al 1 181618119 panuyuos a31 nualA 1718161811 N d nod HUN 4911043005 Alewig c y 9INBIY 3 System Configuration Archive SCA 1 SCA Autosave Provisioning 2 SCA SCU Restore Provisioning 3 SCA Module Restore Provisioning 4 SCA Operations 4 System Event Log TFTP File Cache Expire Firmware TFTP server 5 Auto Upgrade Status Auto Upgrade Config Basepath Auto Upgrade Config Filename Auto Upgrade Mode Config File Refresh Interval N fo o 5 o w Auto Upgrade Retries 1 Autosave System If Provisioning Changes Autosave Filename Prefix Autosave Filename Suffix sca Max Autosave File
56. Controller Unit PCU and is a DB 9 connector labeled CRAFT Access can also be made to the HDX System from the Total Access 3000 backplane through the port labeled ADMIN J31 The port is a DB 25 connector and is located on the upper right corner of the backplane NOTE Connecting to the HDX System from the front craft port on the PCU requires a straight serial data cable Connection to the HDX System via the rear connector on the backplane requires the use of a null modem cable because that port is configured for a modem and expects to see DCE equipment NOTE The craft and Admin connectors are active on the primary HDX system shelf only 2 PREREQUISITE PROCEDURES A PCU unit must be installed in the HDX System and the shelf must be powered for terminal communi cation to function 3 TOOLS AND MATERIALS REQUIRED VT100 compatible terminal or computer with terminal emulation software Appropriate cable to connect terminal to the HDX System 61181918L1 1B 7 95 Section 7 Detailed Level Procedures DLP 715 Connecting the Craft Port to a Terminal or PC Total Access HDX System Manual 7 96 WARNING To prevent electrical shock do not install equipment in a wet location or during a lightning storm CAUTION Electronic modules can be damaged by static electrical discharge Before handling modules wear an antistatic discharge wrist strap to prevent dam age to electronic components Place module
57. E ADRAN Orchestrates Total Access 3050 shelf test access functionality when used with test access capable splitters and cut through cards Compatible with test heads supporting standard GR 834 command set Supports Y Modem or TFTP software updates via the PCU Front panel indicators to reflect the general status of the MTC 61181918L1 1B Section 1 System Description Total Access HDX System Manual Total Access 3050 xDSL Splitter Module w MTA P N 1183002L2 The Total Access 3050 xDSL Splitter Module see Figure 1 11 is designed to be used in a Total Access 3050 Shelf to combine split POTS and ADSL services This module should be used when a Metallic Test Controller is deployed in the Total Access 3050 chassis Figure 1 11 xDSL Splitter Module w MTA NOTE Test access will not function until the Metallic Test Controller is properly installed and configured The Total Access 3050 Splitter Shelf must be powered for test access functionality to be operational For instructions on powering the shelf refer to the Installation and Maintenance Practice P N 61183001L1 5 1 24 61181918L1 1B Total Access HDX System Manual System Description Section 1 Prior to the introduction of the xDSL Splitter Module the splitter and ADSL cards occupied adjoining slots in the Total Access 3000 shelf By adding the Total Access 3050 Splitter Shelf equipped with xDSL Splitter Modules the Total Access 3000 DSLAM
58. Figure 1 8 Expansion Switch Module Features Expands the switching capabilities of the PSM over five additional shelves six total Provides separate status indicators for the upstream link LINK A and the downstream link LINK B Software can be upgraded while in the field using YModem or TFTP applications without affecting service if the unit is equipped for APS 1 20 61181918L1 1B Total Access HDX System Manual System Description Section 1 Access Modules The access modules supported by the HDX System are listed in Table 1 1 on page 9 Refer to individual Practices and Job Aids for detailed information on installation testing operation maintenance and troubleshooting Total Access 3000 Octal ADSL P N 118140511 The Total Access 3000 Octal ADSL see Figure 1 9 access module is an eight port high density Central Office transceiver unit that provides data rates up to 8 Mbps per port A single module supports eight separate interfaces over eight one pair copper loops Ey 1181405L1 PWR 1 29 39 4O 6 5e eO 18 8 A E J Figure 1 9 Octal ADSL 61181918L1 1B 1 21 Section 1 System Description Total Access HDX System Manual The interface rates on the Octal ADSL are configurable at the individual port level or rate adaptive to achieve the best possible rate on the loop Each interface can be independently configured for either G Lite or full rate ADSL Upst
59. Get Netowrk Prov From MUX Module Copy Provisioning Menu 1 Disable 2 Enable 1 IP Network Interfaces 2 IP Route Table 3 IP Services And Ports 1 Enable 2 Disable 1 Ethernet Interface 2 Inband Interface 3 Default Route Interface 4 IP Forwarding 1 Interface 1 Enable 2 IP Address 2 Disable 3 Subnet Mask 4 Gatewa 1 Link 5 ENET LED Mode 2 Link Activit Link MAC Address 1 Enable 2 Disable 1 Interface 2 IP Address 3 Subnet Mask 1 None 2 Ethernet 3 Inband 1 Disable 2 Enable y xipueddy seal nuay enuey wa sAs XAH seoipueddy 9Y al 1 181618119 penunuoo ses nuey 118161811 N d nod HUN 4911043005 feug Z Y 9INBIY Go 1 Terminal Server Provisioning 2 IP Telnet Service Ports 3 Domain Name System DNS 4 TFTP Host Provisioning 5 SNMP Provisioning 1 Terminal Server amp Admin Port Baud Rate 1 1200 2 2400 3 4800 4 9600 5 19200 6 38400 7 57600 8 115200 1 Enable 2 Ntwk Terminal Server Telnet Port 2003 E 2 Disable 3 Ntwk Terminal Server Securit 1 9600 4 Admin Port Baud Rate 2 19200 3 38400 5 Admin Terminal Server Telnet Port 2004 97600 5 115200 6 Admin Terminal Server Security LEX 2 Disable 1 TL1 Telnet Port 2000 2 TL1 Raw TCP Port 2001 3 Secondary Telnet Port 2002 4 Ntwk Terminal Server Telnet Port 2003 5 Admin Terminal Server Telnet Port 2004 a F 1 Ena
60. HDX Restore Submenu N A N A N A N A Provisioning SCA Module Restore View Change N A N A N A N A Provisioning SCA Operations Submenu N A N A N A N A System Controller Test Test Alarm Relays Submenu Submenu N A Submenu Submenu Self Test And Restart Submenu Submenu N A Submenu Submenu System Alarms Shelf Alarm Status View View View View View Alarm Logs View View View View View User Definable Alarms Submenu Submenu N A Submenu Submenu Alarm Chronology View Change View Change N A View Change View Change System Alarms User Definable Alarms Environmental Alarms Submenu Submenu N A Submenu Submenu Access Module Removed View Change View N A View Change View Change Level Alarm Chronology View Change View N A View Change View Change 7 206 61181918L1 1B Total Access HDX System Manual Detailed Level Procedures Section 7 Setting System Security Settings in the PCU DLP 797 Table 8 PCU User Account Privileges Continued Menu Items ADMIN READWRITE READONLY TEST CONFIG System Alarms User Definable Alarms Environmental Alarms Remote Input Submenu Submenu N A Submenu Submenu Auxiliary 1 Input Submenu Submenu N A Submenu Submenu Auxiliary 2 Input Submenu Submenu N A Submenu Submenu Power Bus A Input Submenu Submenu N A Submenu Submenu Power Bus B Input Submenu Submenu N A Submenu Submenu Equipment ID View Change View N A View View Change 61181918L1 1B 7 207
61. INTRODUCTION This procedure provides step by step instructions for the replacement of a Expansion Controller Unit ECU into a HDX System Procedures include the removal of the product from its packaging and inspecting for damage seating the unit in the shelf provisioning and turn up 2 PREREQUISITE PROCEDURES The following procedures must be completed prior to installing the ECU If necessary refer to the appro priate documentation before proceeding NTP 020 HDX System Installation Section 4 Site Preparation DLP 708 Installing the High Speed Connector Module 3 MATERIALS REQUIRED Total Access 3000 Expansion Controller Unit ECU P N 1181919L 1 61181918L1 1B 7 51 Section 7 Detailed Level Procedures DLP 526 Expansion Controller Unit ECU Installation Total Access HDX System Manual 7 52 WARNING To prevent electrical shock do not install equipment in a wet location or during a lightning storm CAUTION Electronic modules can be damaged by static electrical discharge Before handling modules wear an antistatic discharge wrist strap to prevent dam age to electronic components Place modules in antistatic packing mate rial when transporting or storing When working on modules always place them on an approved antistatic mat that is electrically grounded 61181918L1 1B Total Access HDX System Manual Detailed Level Procedures Section 7 Expansion Controller Unit ECU Installation DLP 5
62. Instances and press ENTER This option may be set between 1 and 7 and controls the number of SCA files stored on the TFTP server for each system Refer to the description in step 1 for more information concerning this field o Enter the maximum file instances and press ENTER 61181918L1 1B PRELIMINARY 7 111 Section 7 Detailed Level Procedures Total Access HDX System Manual DLP 729 Saving the System Configuration Archive From the SCA AutoSave Provisioning menu select AutoSave Time Hour and press ENTER q Using 24 hour clock hours enter the hour in which the automatic save function should occur From the SCA AutoSave Provisioning menu select AutoSave Time Minute and press ENTER Enter the minute of the hour in which the automatic save function should occur From the SCA AutoSave Provisioning menu select AutoSave Retries and press ENTER This option dictates the number of times the PCU will try to transfer the file to the TFTP server if the previous attempt fails The number of retries may be set between 0 and 99 Verify the SCA automatic save was successful Verification of SCA automatic save can be accomplished by verifying that the SCA filename including the defined prefix instance and suffix appears on the TFTP server after an automatic save is scheduled to occur 4 Manually Perform an SCA Save a b C a From the Total Access Main menu select System Controller and press ENTER From th
63. Interface IP Forwarding State Network Management Port Port Mode Port Baud Rate NOTE All MNPS settings that will be automatically restored are listed under MNPS Items on page 7 38 8 Verify replacement PCU s communication over the IP LAN 61181918L1 1B 7 37 Section 7 Detailed Level Procedures Total Access HDX System Manual DLP 523 Primary Controller Unit PCU Replacement NOTE It may take up to 20 minutes for the replacement PCUs new MAC address to be updated in its network peer s ARP cache Until this update occurs the PCU will not be able to communicate with the network For details refer to DLP 795 MNPS Items The provisioning item System Controller Provisioning Network Management Get Net Prov from MUX must be enabled for the following items to be retrieved from the MUX unit The SNMP OID adTAePCURestoreNetProvFromMUX in the ADTRAN TAePCU MIB can also be used to enable or disable MNPS General Management Ports Interbank Comm Mode Admin Port Communications Admin Port DCD Admin Port DTR Network Management Port Communications Network Management Port Baud Rate Admin Craft and Network Port Baud Rates Logoff Craft Port When DTR is lost Network Management Ethernet Interface IP Address Subnet Mask Gateway Interface Enabled Disabled Inband Interface IP Address Subnet Mask Gateway Interface Enabled Disabled IP Service Ports TLI Telnet
64. Level Procedures Total Access HDX System Manual DLP 784 Auto Upgrade for System Firmware Upgrade The F L P and N hotkeys shown below control the subsequent block irst Slot rev Occupied Slot N ext Occupied Slot Associated block Slot 11 00 00 00 Idle 1181402L1 needs upgrade A05 A06 In this case the state of the module in slot 11 is displayed The field indicates the current status the type of the module and that it needs an upgrade MNPS Items The provisioning item System Controller Provisioning Network Management Get Net Prov from MUX must be enabled for the following items to be retrieved from the MUX unit The SNMP OID adTAeSCURestoreNetProvFromMUX in the ADTRAN TAePCU MIB can also be used to enable or disable MNPS General Management Ports Interbank Comm Mode Admin Port Communications Admin Port DCD Admin Port DTR Network Management Port Communications Network Management Port Baud Rate Admin Craft and Network Port Baud Rates Logoff Craft Port When DTR is lost Network Management Ethernet Interface IP Address Subnet Mask Gateway Interface Enabled Disabled Inband Interface IP Address Subnet Mask Gateway Interface Enabled Disabled IP Service Ports TL1 Telnet Port 7 130 61181918L1 1B Total Access HDX System Manual Detailed Level Procedures Section 7 Auto Upgrade for Sys
65. Level Procedures Section 7 Provisioning an In band Management PVC Connection DLP 799 7 Disable the In band PVC Press the D key followed by the number of the In band PVC and press ENTER to disable the PVC The current screen should show In band PVC as disabled 8 Select the In band PVC Select the index number of the In band PVC and press ENTER The In band PVC will have MGMT in the Slot column under Endpoint 1 9 Update the PVC The visible menu allows the user to change the physical endpoints change VPI VCI information and update the PVC If IMA is being used for the network uplink the DS3 Port Endpoint must be changed to the slot group of the appropriate IMA module Once the PVC specific information has been entered press the U key The PVC has now been updated 10 Enable the PVC Press the E key and type the number of the Inband PVC Press ENTER to enable the PVC The current screen should show the Inband PVC as Enabled 11 To return to the Total Access Main Menu press ESC NOTE Press the V key to toggle between the enable disable status of the PVC and the name of the PVC Provision the Secondary Offline Cell Switch Module 12 From the Total Access Main menu select the online PSM 13 From the PSM menu select Provisioning and press ENTER 14 From the PSM Provisioning menu select Advanced Provisioning and press ENTER If Linked Provi sioning is disabled continue with step 15 If Linked Prov
66. P N 61183010L1 5 for a functional description of these interfaces Features The Total Access 3050 Splitter Shelf includes the following features Designed to operate with the Total Access 3000 DSLAM Provides for POTS operation even with Splitter Modules are removed Provides support for Metallic Test Access with optional MTAU functionality Conserves rack space with its integrated DSLAM filter assembly 61181918L1 1B 1 13 Section 1 System Description Total Access HDX System Manual Shelf Controller Units The Shelf Controller Units SCU supported by the HDX System are listed in Table 1 1 on page 9 Refer to individual Practices and Job Aids for detailed information on installation testing operation maintenance and troubleshooting NOTE In the expansion shelves Expansion Controller Units ECU are placed in the SCU slots in order to connect wires to the backplane All functionality provisioning is completed via the Primary Controller Unit PCU Primary Controller Unit The Primary Controller Unit PCU P N 1181918L1 is used in the High Density Expansion architecture HDX and works in conjunction with the Expansion Controller Unit ECU The PCU see Figure 1 5 is installed in the SCU slot of the primary shelf and is the focal point for all management functions carried out by the primary and expansion shelves The operator provisions and monitors other modules in the system either locally or remotely via the PCU
67. Port TL1 Raw TCP Port Secondary Telnet Port NTWK Mgmt Terminal Server Telnet Port NTWK Mgmt Terminal Server Security 7 38 61181918L1 1B Total Access HDX System Manual Detailed Level Procedures Section 7 Primary Controller Unit PCU Replacement DLP 523 ADMIN Terminal Server Telnet Port ADMIN Terminal Server Security Telnet Dead Client Detection Domain Name System DNS DNS Lookup System Primary DNS Server Secondary DNS Server Domain Search List Default Route Interface IP Forwarding Get Prov from Mux TLI Target ID CLLI Code Unit Number Client Shelf Management Mode SNMP SNMP Trap Host Information 1 4 SNMP iflndex Method Controller Unit Traps ENABLE DISABLE Read Community Write Community System Name System Location System Contact SNMP Enable Authentication Traps Auto Upgrade TFTP Cache Expire Auto Upgrade Mode Auto Upgrade Config Refresh Interval Auto Upgrade Retries Auto Upgrade Config Basepath Auto Upgrade Config Filename SCA SCA TFTP Server SCA Remote Filename SCA Provisioning SCA Line Card Restore bitmap Other Firmware TFTP Server IP 61181918L1 1B 7 39 Section 7 Detailed Level Procedures DLP 523 Primary Controller Unit PCU Replacement Total Access HDX System Manual Firmware TFTP Upgrade Filename User Account Information 5 FOLLOW UP PROCEDURE Once
68. Q lo e 0 lo gt 63 08 DOS 0 0 300 og 5 Spacer Fuse Alarm 2 Fuse Alarm 1 Baffle 3 Chassis 3 Splitter 3 Baffle 2 Chassis 2 Splitter 2 Baffle 1 Chassis 1 Splitter 1 ba Ie 9 ea bo cd 300 0 o00Jeo os Juve 0 0 oc0 oo oe 70o 0 0 O00 SINN Tota Access 3050 209 0 0o00 0060 0 SONGS oo 209 0 0o00 0069 0o590 oo osf 0o 0 0 o99 995 9 0 O00 goes 61181918L1 1B Figure 7 1 HDX Bay Configuration 1344 Lines Fuse Alarm 4 Fuse Alarm 3 Baffle 6 Chassis 6 Splitter 46 Baffle 5 Chassis 5 Splitter 5 Baffle 4 Chassis 4 Splitter 4 Section 7 Detailed Level Procedures Total Access HDX System Manual DLP 520 HDX System Installation Connect Power and Ground Dual power buses are provided with separate battery returns Power connections use two separate opposing blocks labeled TS1 and TS2 located on the lower left side of the backplane underneath the Pair 6 Pair 5 amphenol connector The terminals are on 0 4375 inch centers and allow for wire gauges of up to 10 AWG There is a separate Frame Ground terminal labeled FR GND located on the bottom left corner of the Total A
69. Return to the System Configuration Archive SCA menu by pressing Esc Configure the SCA Restore Options 9 From the System Configuration SCA menu select SCA PCU Restore Provisioning and press ENTER The SCA PCU Restore Provisioning menu allows the user to specify which types of provisioning options are to be overwritten by the SCA restore and which types of provisioning options will be unaffected The following text provides a description of the types of provisioning options available on the PCU Restore Provisions To PCU This option is use to disable or enable the ability to overwrite provi sioning options to the PCU using the restore function If the Restore Provisions To PCU option is enabled the remaining options described below will dictate what options are overwritten and which are unaffected If the Restore Provisions To PCU option is disabled no provisioning changes will be made to the PCU during an SCA restore This option is useful for protecting the current PCU settings during an SCA restore operation that should only impact the Cell Switch and Access Modules Restore PCU SCA Provisions This option dictates whether SCA related provisioning parameters should be restored on the PCU All SCA provisions such as SCA AutoSave filename PCU and Access Module restore settings etc will be overwritten if this option is set to enable No SCA provi sions will be overwritten if this option is set to disable e Restore PCU Ne
70. System Security Settings in the PCU DLP 797 g From the Edit Account menu select Delete User and press ENTER see Figure 7 29 TID Unacknowledged Alarms Total Access System Unit Number Edit User Account abcdABCD12345678 ENABLED 03 31 03 13 27 1 Selection 1 Change Password Access Privilege 2 Enable Disable User Account 3 Delete User ENABLED System Help Screen 61181918L1 1B Figure 7 29 Edit User Account Menu 7 191 Section 7 Detailed Level Procedures DLP 797 Setting System Security Settings in the PCU Total Access HDX System Manual Enable Disable User Account 1 Logon to the HDX System using an Admin level user account For details refer to DLP 716 2 After logging on using an Admin user account perform the following steps a o o O From the Total Access Main menu select System Controller and press ENTER From the System Controller menu select Provisioning and press ENTER From the Provisioning menu select System Administration and press ENTER From the System Administration menu select Security Administration and press ENTER e From the Security Administration menu select Edit User Accounts and press ENTER mh 7 192 From the Edit User Accounts menu select the account to enable or disable and press ENTER see Figure 7 30 TID Unacknowledged Alarms Num USER 1 ADMIN 2 READONLY 3 READWRITE 4 TEST 5
71. Unit requires no provisioning This completes the installation procedure 5 FOLLOW UP PROCEDURE Once this procedure is complete return to the procedure which referred to this DLP and continue with the tasks indicated 61181918L1 1B 7 53 Section 7 Detailed Level Procedures Total Access HDX System Manual DLP 526 Expansion Controller Unit ECU Installation This page is intentionally blank 7 54 61181918L1 1B DLP 527 Metallic Test Controller Installation 1 INTRODUCTION This procedure provides step by step instructions for the installation of the Total Access 3050 Metallic Test Controller MTC into the Total Access 3050 chassis The MTC controls metallic pair accesses on the Total Access 3050 test bus It provides support for the standard TL1 test commands initiated from a test head as specified in GR 834 The MTC is compatible with Harris 107 Spirent CopperMax and Tollgrade Digitest test heads as well as other test heads supporting standard GR 834 command set 2 PREREQUISITE PROCEDURES DLP 785 Connecting Metallic Test Access Equipment to the Total Access 3050 3 MATERIALS REQUIRED Total Access 3050 Metallic Test Controller P N 1183010L1 WARNING To prevent electrical shock do not install equipment in a wet location or during a lightning storm CAUTION Electronic modules can be damaged by static electrical discharge Before handling modules wear an antistatic discharge wrist strap to prevent da
72. also allows for the neat dressing of the data cables used by the HDX System 61181918L1 1B 2 13 Section 2 Engineering Guidelines Total Access HDX System Manual 3 MANAGEMENT INTERFACES Alarm Input and Output For alarms the physical wiring will depend on which alarming equipment is used ADTRAN recommends referring to the Alarm Equipment manufacturer s instructions for alarm wiring The system currently supports six dedicated alarm outputs and two spare alarm outputs on the primary shelf The dedicated outputs are as follows Critical Visual CRI V Major Visual MAJ V Minor Visual MIN V Critical Audible CRI A Major Audible MAJ A Minor Audible MIN A Each alarm supports Normally Open or Normally Closed relay contacts Three alarm inputs are supported per HDX system shelf They are Remote AUX 1 and AUX 2 The primary shelf also has an ACO input The active alarm state is 48 V or contact closure SNMP and Telnet over 10BaseT NOTE The Ethernet 10BaseT connection is available on the primary shelf only and is not used on the expansion shelves When the PCU is installed into the HDX System the 10BaseT connection is enabled by default An RJ 45 port J32 labeled E NET provided on the backplane connects the system to an IP Lan network The PCU has a standard TCP IP stack and can operate on a standard IP network The Network Administrator must assign an IP address subnet mask and a default gatew
73. atmC atmC atmN atmC atmC atmN atmC atmC atmC atmN oCIpNoScr IpNoTaggingNoScr IpTaggingNoScr IpTransparentNoScr joClpScr pNoTaggingScr p TaggingScr pTransparentScr loCIpScrCdvt pNoTaggingScrCdvt pTagging ScrCdvt oOCIpNoScr pNoTaggingNoScr pTaggingNoScr pTransparentNoScr joClpNoSerCdvt Additional options are availables under the create PVC menu if an endpoint is set to the MGMT port Refer to the text concering PVC Provisioning for more details seoipueddy saaJ nue N y xipueddy jenue N wa sAs XAH Ak L 1816181 L9 LN penunuoo a91 nual C1L70L8LLN d 3817 8INPOW YI IMS Aieuid CSA P Y e1nB14 8 PNNI Switch Provisioning Base Menu Provisioning 9 Software Updgrade Menu DS3 PSM Main Menu 10 MDE Link Configuration Shelf 1 6 1 DS3 and Timing Status S Status 2 Port Status 3 SPVC ATM Status N Next Page P Previous Page 4 Alarms F First Page L Last Page 1 DS3 Loopback Test 2 PVC PVP Test 5 Test 3 Single Card Cell Generation Test 1 Hierarchy Depth 1 End to End 2 Segment Framing Line Length meters Bank Timing Active Loops APS Status Service State Tx Line Status Rx Line Status Line Code DS3 Cell Delineation Far End Alarm 1 DS3 Loopback N Next P Previous G Page Number V View Names Status S Search Enter Index 1 Slot 2 Configuration 3 Start New Test Stop Test Reset Coun
74. be completed prior to installing the ESM If necessary refer to the appro priate documentation before proceeding Section 4 Site Preparation e NTP 020 HDX System Installation e DLP 708 Installing the High Speed Connector Module 3 MATERIALS REQUIRED Total Access 3000 ESM 2 modules if the System is equipped for 1 1 protection switching applications WARNING To prevent electrical shock do not install equipment in a wet location or during a lightning storm CAUTION Electronic modules can be damaged by static electrical discharge Before handling modules wear an antistatic discharge wrist strap to prevent dam age to electronic components Place modules in antistatic packing mate rial when transporting or storing When working on modules always place them on an approved antistatic mat that is electrically grounded 61181918L1 1B 7 47 Section 7 Detailed Level Procedures Total Access HDX System Manual DLP 525 Expansion Switch Module ESM Installation DLP 525 Perform the Steps Below in the Order Listed 4 PROCEDURE The ESM is installed in the Common slots A or B in Total Access 3000 expansion shelves in the HDX System to manage shelf communication with the Primary Switch Module PSM on the host shelf The communication takes place via CAT 5e modular cables that are daisy chained from the PSM on shelf 1 to ESMs on shelf two shelf three and so forth to a maximum of five expansion shelves six t
75. be used to optionally install a second PSM for 1 1 protection switching applications 11 Unpack and inspect the protect slot B PSM Fach PSM is shipped in its own cardboard shipping carton Open the carton carefully and avoid cutting deeply into the carton with sharp objects After removing the unit from the carton unwrap the antistatic bubble wrap and pull the unit from the protective plastic bag After unpacking the unit inspect it for damage If the equipment has been damaged file a claim with the carrier and then contact ADTRAN Customer Service 12 Install the protect slot B PSM a Pull the locking lever on the bottom of the PSM front panel down from its closed position b Install the CAT 5e modular cable that connects the PSM and the first upstream ESM on shelf 2 The cable plugs into the single modular jack on the PSM circuit board near the front panel The cable must be shielded with both ends earth grounded and cannot be shrouded due to the close tolerances on the access module c Dress the cable to exit through the relief hole at the top edge of the PSM front panel and secure it with the proper cable ties using the vertical slot in the center near the top of the card d Hold the unit by the front panel while supporting the bottom side Align the card edges to the guide grooves for the second common slot Slot A on the left side of the chassis e Gently but firmly push the PSM into the third slot slot B at the left en
76. cool the modules and vent heat through the rear of the Heat Baffle The Fan Assembly consists of three fans with a common 1 amp GMT type fuse The shelf has two independent power inputs for redundancy The power terminal strip has connections for 48 VDC primary A terminals and secondary B terminals supply and return RET The terminals are load sharing If one input fails the other will keep all three fans online Two additional ALM A and ALM B terminals are for alarm relays In the event of a fan failure or a fuse failure the Fan Assembly provides for an alarm indication by closing the contacts on the normally open ALM relay The Fan Assembly is designed to tolerate one fan failure and still provide adequate cooling A frame ground terminal is also provided on the rear of the assembly CAUTION All grounds must terminate at a known ground source Do not stack connections Check metal to metal contact on all ground connections Ensure ground circuit continuity amp 118100611 INPUT 48VDC 0 2A THIS UNIT MAY BE POWERED BY REDUNDANT POWER SOURCES O c us FUSE 1 AMP LISTED accessory TO AN AN AN AN AM AM Pi Bana Midbdbdhdhdhdhd 48V 48V 48V 48V ALM ALM ju a T D OA B Figure 1 15 Total Access 23 Inch Fan Assembly 1 28 61181918L1 1B Total Access HDX System Manual System Description Section 1 Total Access 3050 to Total Access 3000 Cable Assembly The Total Access
77. cota No fe AN Blin reas 7 79 2 Prerequisite Procedures 000 cee es 7 79 3 Tools and Materials Required 0 2 20 7 79 A Procedure a Seet LEM tales NG ce ae Bo te kaaa aha a a EQ CRM 7 81 5 Follow up Procedures 0 00000 cee eh 7 81 DLP 710 Connecting the External Alarm Outputs 0 0c cece eee ee 7 83 1e Introduction us datar AA Usi pA se a ed eem d 7 83 2 Prerequisite Procedures es 7 83 3 Tools and Materials Required llli 7 83 4 CPEOCeQUIG sns bis Ga NANANG NAGANA NAN IRAE RR eique EP RE 7 85 5 Follow up Procedures eh 7 86 DLP 711 Connecting a Fan Assembly Alarm cee eee nn n n nnn 7 87 1 Introduction s E IRR AAA e etta Be RUE ae ed 7 87 2 Prerequisite Procedures eel 7 87 3 Tools and Materials Required llle 7 87 4 AAA tun eine des Gad e ets tera e RP a NGA 7 89 5 Follow up Procedures 7 90 DLP 713 Connecting a Shelf to an External Modem 00 cece eee eee eee eee 7 91 15 introduction oot Rr ESSE Net MADE RENE eM NERONE EE 7 91 2 Prerequisite Procedures lll 7 91 3 Tools and Materials Required sls 7 91 4 Procedure uv coo vro Rare ina Naga PE baba quad e nala a d qus aid 7 93 5 Follow up Procedures ooo 7 94 DLP 715 Connecting the Craft Port to a Terminal or PC eee 7 95 Te Introducido UE TR ET 7 95 2 Prerequisite Procedures 00 cec
78. frame space the equipment uses Frame Level NEBS provides specific objectives for heat dissipation in a frame in paragraph 04 12 for a frame such as intended for the HDX System The relevant values are as follows in Table 2 17 from GR 63 CORE table 4 through 6 Table 2 17 Heat Dissipation for Total Access 3000 System Forced air Fans 1950 W m2 181 2 W ft2 The following guideline is intended to aid the designer and planner for installations of the HDX System and meeting NEBS heat release objectives Refer to Figure 2 1 for an example of a frame installation 61181918L1 1B 2 11 Section 2 Engineering Guidelines Total Access HDX System Manual 5 Spacer Fuse Alarm 4 Fuse Alarm 3 Baffle w Fan 6 Chassis 6 Splitter 6 Baffle w Fan 5 Chassis 5 Splitter 5 Baffle w Fan 4 Chassis 4 Splitter 4 h T mm e Fuse Alarm 2 H Wm e mm es PR Fe Ml Ml e H Fuse Alarm 1 i MM Ml E 1 Primary Shelf 3 Expansion Shelves 2 Expansion Shelves 1015W 1028W
79. heat dissipation Table 2 15 Heat Dissipation Worksheet at 48VDC Part Number Equipment Qty X a Tota Dido 1181918L1 PCU X 3 3 watts 1181919L1 ECU X 0 2 watts 1181041L3 PSM X 22 watts 1181041L4 ESM X 12 5 watts 1181405L1 Octal ADSL X 10 8 watts 1183001L1 Total Access 3050 w 28 X 2 0 watts splitters and MTC 1181006L1 Fan Assembly X 9 6 watts Total watts PA 61181918L1 1B Total Access HDX System Manual Engineering Guidelines Section 2 HDX System Heat Dissipation and GR 63 CORE Telcordia GR 63 CORE specifies the physical protection requirements and objectives for telecommunica tions equipment Often referred to as NEBS Network Equipment Building System these guidelines have become the de facto standard for U S telecommunications equipment and include both requirements and objectives for heat dissipation The NEBS requirement is that the heat release of telecommunications equipment be documented For the HDX System this is done in the previous section Power Dissipation Considerations System Level NEBS further provides specific objectives for heat dissipation within a system in paragraph 04 12 For an equipment system such as the HDX System the relevant values are as follows in Table 2 16 from GR 63 CORE Tables 4 through 6 Table 2 16 Heat Dissipation for Total Access 3000 System Forced air Fans 300 W m2 per meter 27 9 W ft2 ft of vertical
80. initial installation of a shelf steps 2 34 should be repeated for all 28 access module slots When performing this test as part of a troubleshooting procedure test only the slots involved in the troubleshooting Repeat for entire procedure for the POTS MDF connections When performing this test during the initial installation of a shelf steps 2 35 should be repeated for all 28 access module slots When performing this test as part of a troubleshooting procedure test only the slots involved in the troubleshooting 7 154 61181918L1 1B Total Access HDX System Manual Detailed Level Procedures Section 7 Verify Total Access 3050 Splitter Shelf Wiring to the MDF DLP 791 5 FOLLOW UP PROCEDURES Once this procedure is complete return to the procedure which called out this DLP and continue with the tasks indicated there 61181918L1 1B 7 155 Section 7 Detailed Level Procedures Total Access HDX System Manual DLP 791 Verify Total Access 3050 Splitter Shelf Wiring to the MDF This page is intentionally blank 7 156 61181918L1 1B DLP 792 Verifying the Fan Assembly Alarm Connection to the PCU 1 INTRODUCTION This procedure details the test steps which must be performed to verify that the Fan Assembly s Alarm Relay contacts have been properly wired to the PCU external alarm inputs and that the PCU is properly provisioned to indicate a Fan Assembly failure when this condition is indicated by the Fan Assembly This procedure sho
81. manufacturer s instructions 3 TOOLS AND MATERIALS REQUIRED Medium straight slot screwdriver Fiber optic cable WARNING To prevent electrical shock do not install equipment in a wet location or during a lightning storm 61181918L1 1B 7 145 Section 7 Detailed Level Procedures DLP 790 Routing Cable Through the Heat Baffle Total Access HDX System Manual 7 146 CAUTION Electronic modules can be damaged by static electrical discharge Before handling modules wear an antistatic discharge wrist strap to prevent dam age to electronic components Place modules in antistatic packing mate rial when transporting or storing When working on modules always place them on an approved antistatic mat that is electrically grounded 61181918L1 1B Total Access HDX System Manual Detailed Level Procedures Section 7 Routing Cable Through the Heat Baffle DLP 790 DLP 790 Perform the following steps in order 4 PROCEDURE 1 Remove the front guard Using a medium straight slot screwdriver remove the front guard from the Heat Baffle and Fiber Tray The tray is held in place with a single screw on each end 2 Route the cable Route the cable so that there is enough slack to connect to the appropriate transceiver The cable may be routed by starting at the most convenient location The cable may be routed in out the back or in out the side of the fiber tray When routing the cable to or from the fibe
82. mode this setting also controls how often Auto Upgrade evaluation operations are automatically performed A value of zero 0 indicates the PCU should not check the TFTP server for a more recent configuration file and disables further Auto Upgrade operations Auto Upgrade Retries The number of times to attempt to retrieve the Auto Upgrade configuration file if there are errors can be adjusted by manipulating the data in the Auto Upgrade Retries field by contacting the TFTP server in addition to the number of times to attempt to upgrade each modules firmware if an error should occur during the upgrade process A value of zero indicates that retries should not be attempted Auto Upgrade Status Information The Auto Upgrade Status menu contains several fields that provide read only status information related to the Auto Upgrade system The fields include the number of successful and completed module upgrades the number of errors that have occurred since the last time the auto upgrade procedure began the number of upgrades needed the current status of the shelf as it relates to the Auto Upgrade system the current status of a slot during an Auto Upgrade and the current status of each slot in the shelf The following block represents what is typical while the Auto Upgrade system is in progress Upgrades 1 Errors 0 Upgrades needed 2 Shelf 00 05 26 Busy upgrading slot 8 118140211 Slot 8 00 01 33 Busy send file to module 43 2 1
83. modem transfer use the communi cation program being run on the computer to send the new firmware file to the PCU Make sure that Y modem transfer is selected as the protocol for the communication program Select Reboot Controller Unit and press ENTER 10 Confirm Reboot by typing Y and ENTER This will not disrupt service on the Total Access 3000 The PCU will restart and the upgrade is complete The firmware version that is currently installed may be checked by viewing the Configu ration menu of the PCU FOLLOW UP PROCEDURES Once this procedure is complete return to the procedure which called out this DLP and continue with the tasks indicated there 7 176 61181918L1 1B DLP 797 Setting System Security Settings in the PCU 1 INTRODUCTION This section provides step by step instructions for setting system security settings in the Primary Controller Unit PCU 2 PREREQUISITE PROCEDURES The following procedures must be completed prior to setting the system security settings in the PCU If necessary refer to the appropriate documentation before proceeding The prerequisite procedures include the following NTP 020 HDX System Installation e DLP 715 Connecting the Craft Port to a Terminal or PC DLP 716 Logging on to the System 3 TOOLS AND MATERIALS REQUIRED Data cable to connect to VT100 terminal or PC configured as a VT100 terminal VT100 terminal or PC configured as a VT100 terminal 61181918L1 1B
84. of installation 2 PREREQUISITE PROCEDURES The following procedure must be completed prior to performing CO Installation acceptance If necessary refer to the appropriate documentation before proceeding The prerequisite procedure is as follows e NTP 020 HDX System Installation 3 TOOLS AND MATERIALS REQUIRED Total Access 3000 Test Access Module TAM module P N 1181980L1 Oscilloscope optional e A remote terminal computer system with a modem if the Total Access 3000 is connected to an external modem Access to a computer with LAN access if the Total Access 3000 is connected to a LAN WARNING To prevent electrical shock do not install equipment in a wet location or during a lightning storm CAUTION Electronic modules can be damaged by static electrical discharge Before handling modules wear an antistatic discharge wrist strap to prevent dam age to electronic components Place modules in antistatic packing mate rial when transporting or storing When working on modules always place them on an approved antistatic mat that is electrically grounded 61181918L1 1B 7 221 Section 7 Detailed Level Procedures Total Access HDX System Manual DLP 854 Central Office Installation Acceptance Test Procedure DLP 854 Perform the following steps in order 4 PROCEDURE 1 Verify the MDF wiring Use the procedure outlined in DLP 791 to verify the wiring of each shelf to the MDF If a wiring pro
85. on the backplane labeled D in Figure 1 2 on page 6 The PSM functions as a full local ATM cell switch as a result it can locally switch any data path as well as pass it back up the high speed network connection DS3 Primary Switch Module The DS3 Primary Switch Module PSM 1181041L3 is used in the High Density Expansion architecture HDX The PSM see Figure 1 7 is a common plug in module that is an ATM switch with the switching policing and shaping functionality of a typical ATM switch plus the added functionality to extend these functions across five additional expansion shelves The PSM is designed to interface with the Expansion Switch Modules ESMs on expansion shelves via shielded CAT Se cables to accomplish the expanded switching capabilities The PSM installs into a single multiplexer slot Slot A in a non redundant configuration or Slots A and B in a redundant configuration in the Total Access 3000 chassis and interfaces to the network via the BNC I O module on the backplane A dual configuration is optional for redundancy capability with the system being fully functional with only a single PSM installed Standard traffic types such as UBR rt VBR nrt VBR and CBR are supported for data and Voice over DSL VoDSL services The PSM employs traffic prioritizing and policing on a per VC Virtual Circuit basis to ensure proper delivery of customer data Efficient data delivery is maximized through early packet discard and parti
86. server structure can be expanded to accommodate the additional traffic While a single server can be utilized for smaller networks Total Access EMS supports multiple application servers providing management accessibility that only a scalable system can offer Total Access EMS offers scalability and load sharing with multiple application servers and database servers Mediation Agents provide traffic regulation for efficient data processing Trap storms only flood the portion of the network where the storm is occurring while other mediation agents continue to transfer information into and out of the server Client workstations monitor and provision ADTRAN elements using the three panel Graphical User Interface GUI as shown in Figure 5 1 The GUI performs network mapping provides visual indications of actual network status allows end to end configuration provides point and click provisioning and reports alarm status 61181918L1 1B 53 Section 5 Network Management Systems Total Access HDX System Manual NM5 501 Total Access EMS ES Port 1 10 200 4 Octal ADSL Card 3 Port 1 C Provisioning 3 Physical amp Channel Parameters Selected Port Trap Thresholds i PortSemice State In Service y 9 CI Performance Service Mode Standard Multimode G Status 5 3 Current 15 Minutes 4 Rate Mode Fixed Previous 15 Minutes 2 Link Status Down E Current 24 Hours 3 Previous 24 Hours 2 ATUC 3 Target SNR Margin dB
87. slot slot B at the left end of the shelf Simultaneous thumb pressure at the top above the POWER LED and bottom near the latch of the unit will ensure that the edge connector seats firmly into the backplane connector Push the ejector tab up and closed against the ESM front panel g Allow the ESM module to perform a self test The POWER LED should turn green and the LINK A and LINK B LEDs will be off unless shelves are enabled h If more shelves are being equipped route the CAT Se cable to the next downstream ESM position on the HDX System and use the ESM installation procedure to connect and secure it The ESM to ESM connections must be made between units in the same common slot position PSM ESMs in common Slot A must connect to ESMs in Slot A and Slot B modules connect to Slot B 1 Continue with the next section of this document 61181918L1 1B 7 49 Section 7 Detailed Level Procedures Total Access HDX System Manual DLP 525 Expansion Switch Module ESM Installation Place the Units in Service The ESM does not store any user provisionable parameters It does however need to be enabled after it has been installed This is done via the PSM on shelf number 1 1 Log on to the HDX System s PCU For details refer to DLP 701 2 From the Total Access Main menu select the PSM hosting the ESM being enabled Common A or B and press ENTER 3 From the PSM main menu select option 2 Provisioning and press ENTER 4 From
88. stowed or closed position The Total Access 3000 PCU can only be inserted into the first or far left slot of the chassis Attempting to insert the PCU in any other slot may damage the PCU and or the backplane b Gently but firmly push the PCU into the first slot on the left of the chassis The first slot is labeled for the PCU Simultaneous thumb pressure at the top and bottom below the DB 9 craft port of the PCU will ensure a good seat of the PCU pins into the backplane connector c Push the ejector up and closed against the PCU front panel 27 Insert blank front panels Insert blank front panels into MUX and access modules slots which will not be used Blank front panel P N 1181952L1 will cover the two empty MUX slots For the 28 empty access module slots use blank face panel P N 1181953L1 These panels are to be removed when installing a MUX Cell Switch Module or access module This procedure ensures maximum cooling efficiency for the shelf Apply Power and Verify the PCU Self Test Passes All power ground and administrative connections should now be completed on the Total Access 3000 chassis and a PCU the only mandatory module for any Total Access 3000 function should be installed in the chassis This step applies power to the shelf with a PCU in place and ensures that the PCU properly powers up and successfully completes its power on self test routine 28 Check to see that the PCU completes its self test routine a Ins
89. the Heat Baffle and Fiber Tray Together they provide forced air ventilation for the Total Access 3000 chassis The fan is designed to mount directly above a Total Access 3000 shelf Since the unit is an integral component of the HDX System the assembly allows provisions to facilitate fiber optic cable routing in the front tray The Fan Assembly accommodates two power inputs each input consisting of a 48 VDC feed and a battery return feed The power inputs are on 0 375 inch centers A frame ground terminal is also provided on the rear of the assembly The unit operates with either or both inputs active In the event of a fan failure the unit provides for an alarm indication by closing a relay contact The unit is designed to tolerate one fan failure and still provide adequate cooling Six flat head screws are provided with the Fan Assembly Use the screws and a 1 phillips screwdriver to attach the Fan Assembly to the back of the Heat Baffle and Fiber Tray Cable ties are provided for strain relief and wiring management of incoming power return frame ground and alarming to the Primary Controller Unit Cable tie holders are built into the Fan Assembly to accept the cable ties provided For the install to be UL 1950 certified ADTRAN requires that the following installation guidelines be followed The Fan Assembly is intended for installation in Restricted Access Locations Only The Fan Assembly shall be installed in accordance with the req
90. the PSM Provisioning menu select option 10 MDE Link Configuration and press ENTER 5 The MDE Link Configuration menu will show the six possible shelves and the status of the shelves Shelf Present or Shelf Removed The last Shelf Present and the first Shelf Removed will have index numbers that are selectable Perform the following steps to enable a shelf a Select the index number of the shelf being added this should correspond to the first Shelf Removed and press ENTER b To enable the shelf select option 1 Shelf Present and press ENTER c Ifnecessary enable additional shelves by repeating the Step b Press Esc when complete to return to the MDE Link Configuration menu the MDE Link Configuration menu should show all new shelves as Shelf Present It should also show the status of the six possible shelf links Link Up or Link Down 6 If all cabling installation and configuration has been completed the Link Status should show Link Up for all new shelf links NOTE Ensure all alarms are cleared before placing the modules In Service This will prevent false alarm from being transmitted to the network Once the module is placed in service it will generate SNMP messages on change of state 5 FOLLOW UP PROCEDURE Once this procedure is complete return to the procedure which referred to this DLP and continue with the tasks indicated 7 50 61181918L1 1B DLP 526 Expansion Controller Unit ECU Installation 1
91. the Pair 5 position to the Pair 6 position for the same slot Connect Tip of Pair 6 to frame ground Check for green Pair 6 LED Visually verify that the LED on the TAG module labeled Pair 6 is lit green Connect Ring of Pair 6 to ground Disconnect Tip of Pair 6 from ground Connect Ring of Pair 6 to frame ground Check for red Pair 6 LED Visually verify that the LED on the TAG module labeled Pair 6 is lit red Connect Tip of Pair 7 to ground Move the test jack from the Pair 6 position to the Pair 7 position for the same slot Connect Tip of Pair 7 to frame ground Check for green Pair 7 LED Visually verify that the LED on the TAG module labeled Pair 7 is lit green Connect Ring of Pair 7 to ground Disconnect Tip of Pair 7 from ground Connect Ring of Pair 7 to frame ground Check for red Pair 7 LED Visually verify that the LED on the TAG module labeled Pair 7 is lit red Connect Tip of Pair 8 to ground Move the test jack from the Pair 7 position to the Pair 8 position for the same slot Connect Tip of Pair 6 to frame ground Check for green Pair 8 LED Visually verify that the LED on the TAG module labeled Pair 8 is lit green Connect Ring of Pair 8 to ground Disconnect Tip of Pair 7 from ground Connect Ring of Pair 8 to frame ground Check for red Pair 8 LED Visually verify that the LED on the TAG module labeled Pair 8 is lit red Repeat procedure for all the access module slots When performing this test during the
92. the following steps a b Determine which pair of fuses circuit breakers are to supply power to the Fan Assembly Remove the fuses turn off circuit breakers from the A and B slots in the fuse and alarm panel for the pair determined in step a Cut four lengths of 16 or 18 gauge wire to reach from the terminals on the fuse and alarm panel to the power terminal strip on the Fan Assembly Be sure to include enough length to allow for tying the wire neatly to the frame as specified by CO SOP Wire color should differentiate between 48 VDC supply and return according to CO SOP Using a crimping tool connect an appropriate lug to each end of the four wires Using a screwdriver appropriate for the fuse and alarm panel terminals and a 1 phillips head screw driver for the Fan Assembly terminals connect the 48 VDC A CO supply to the 48 VDC A fan module terminal Connect the 48 VDC A CO return to the 48 VDC RET A Fan Assembly terminal Connect the 48 VDC B CO supply to the 48 VDC B Fan Assembly terminal Connect the 48 VDC B CO return to the 48 VDC RET B Fan Assembly terminal Apply power and check voltage and then remove power Before proceeding further ensure that power has been correctly applied to each chassis and the Fan Assemblies The proper voltage for each component of the system is 48 VDC with an operating range of 42 VDC to 56 VDC 61181918L1 1B Total Access HDX System Manual Detailed Level Procedures
93. to VT100 terminal or PC configured as a VT 100 terminal WARNING To prevent electrical shock do not install equipment in a wet location or during a lightning storm 61181918L1 1B 7 141 Section 7 Detailed Level Procedures DLP 789 Setting IP Parameters for an PCU Total Access HDX System Manual 7 142 CAUTION Electronic modules can be damaged by static electrical discharge Before handling modules wear an antistatic discharge wrist strap to prevent dam age to electronic components Place modules in antistatic packing mate rial when transporting or storing When working on modules always place them on an approved antistatic mat that is electrically grounded 61181918L1 1B Total Access HDX System Manual Detailed Level Procedures Section 7 Setting IP Parameters for an PCU DLP 789 DLP 789 Perform the following steps in order 4 PROCEDURE Setting IP Parameters for a PCU To set the IP Parameters for a PCU perform the following steps 1 VOD 0 OQ Mm KB 15 Logon to the system For details refer to DLP 716 From the Total Access Main menu select System Controller and press ENTER From the System Controller menu select Provisioning and press ENTER NOTE Steps related the Ethernet Interface steps 5 14 are only required if Ether net on backplane J32 is used From the Provisioning menu select Network Management and press ENTER From the Netwo
94. to save to the TFTP server This is often called a backup file rotation scheme where the last files to be saved are always maintained on the backup server If this field is set to a value of seven seven uniquely named SCA files will be written to the TFTP server The eighth file to be written will overwrite the first of the saved files The sequence 1 7 1 7 1 7 will be continually cycled through until the value of this field is changed After the maximum number of SCA filenames is changed the next SCA save is named using an instance of one The generated SCA filename will be of the form excluding parentheses as shown below prefix instance suffix where prefix is the value of filename prefix field instance is decimal number between 1 and the max AutoSave instances field Suffix is the value of the filename suffix field For example if the prefix is Flintville the next AutoSave file instance is 3 and the suffix is sca the name of the next SCA AutoSave filename will be Flintville 3 sca The TFTP server is identified by a hostname or IP address The TFTP server field provides for a standard IP address or up to a 40 character hostname 61181918L1 1B PRELIMINARY 7 109 Section 7 Detailed Level Procedures Total Access HDX System Manual DLP 729 Saving the System Configuration Archive NOTE TFTP servers allow network clients to read or get practically any file from the local TFTP directo
95. using its 10Base T Ethernet ports A crossover switch allows the first port to connect directly to the LAN or allows multiple hubs to be daisy chained together 1 30 61181918L1 1B Total Access HDX System Manual System Description Section 1 BNC Adaptor Modules The Total Access 3000 Dual BNC Adaptor Modules see Figure 1 18 P N 1181004L2 provide a high speed network connection that interfaces with the HDX System Primary Switch Modules The unit is designed to mount to the rear of the Total Access 3000 system MG Figure 1 18 BNC I O Module The coaxial adapter is situated to allow routing of coaxial cables in any direction through use of a coaxial elbow connector Once elbow connectors are installed to the jacks on the side of the coaxial adapter the coaxial cables can be routed to the side top or bottom of the system merely by rotating the elbow connector 61181918L1 1B 1 31 Section 1 System Description Total Access HDX System Manual Total Access 3050 Streaker Test Access Module The Total Access 3050 Streaker Test Access Module Streaker TAM ADTRAN P N 1183011L1 or TAG Inc P N ST TA3050S is used to verify office and system connections to the Total Access 3050 Splitter Shelf For testing the Streaker TAM See Figure 1 19 is plugged into one of the access module slots 1 28 on the Total Access 3050 Splitter Shelf After testing these slots will contain the Total Access 3050 xDSL Splitter Modules The Stre
96. 0 099 228 383 999 o0009990000999 000099 o00 Ses 900 900 Sos 900 00 800 900 looe es0 E oso ceo E oco Esso 5999 EE EFE 999 S00 S00 990 Soe S00 800 ses eso 999 009 Ses 000 Sos Sos Soo 990 553 ujosolle soo eso soe B ooo ooo 8800 ET Hrs Sco Soox some BAY 330 990o 099000000090000 O99 ooo seer Bos Beer Sgor Goor Goge Baa Soox leo0lr aa0x8 come oos Beoos FA ooo 220000 At 200 000 900 990 900 990 900 000 900 000 ooo 000 coo 000 900 200 000 000 000 ooo 900 El coo ooo B oooi ooo 5999 E EEH ssa goo geo 288 gso 999 800 69 O99000900000909000900 Des Sos goo Sos 00 909 vloselfejjeco ooo daa dog E3 oo9 9999 999 eo Soo boo 999 009 880 800 800 099 009 009 009 999 Seo ses goo Ses 900 oospojooo 990 oes Soo Baa 9990 999 885 boo 099 009 000 888 goo 8859 865 0609000900 coco 808 299 Ses ses See ces 325 lssallelloss Ses ggs 888 Ed ooo 0000 Ea 5999 ma 000 ooo 000 000 ooo 000 ooo 000 ooo 000 ooo 000 000 000 ooo 000 000 coo ooo o00 900 ooo 900 900 900 s595 EP sesh 888 858 880000 2300000 8 30000 883 388 889 988 352 332 355 285 988 388 sss Ses Bse 555 5agjlel355 Ses ses 5826555 esos Al 25252 d 990 O90 no090000 0090000 0 09 0000 G 0 do Seer goor Soo Sear Goom Goom sort 990 oor Gaor Sos ooo goor Goofy ooon Baan Boon ngaa Af 2090 0000 55525 em 900 990 00 000 900 ooo 200 ooo 200 990 00 990 200 000 900 Soo 200 200 200 200 200 ooo 200 990 0055 22588 333 o o99 o dag o 999 o 209 o daa o 899
97. 04 13 24 Unacknowledged Alarms CRITICAL MAJOR INFO Unit Number 1 User ID Enter New User ID System Help Screen Figure 7 15 Enter User ID Menu NOTE The allowable characters for an account password created via menus include all alphanumeric characters as well as the following characters signs and symbols exclamation point commercial at number pound dollar Yo percent caret circumflex asterisk left and right parentheses _ underscore hyphen dash equals plus vertical line left and right brace left and right bracket colon semicolon apostrophe feet lt gt less than and greater than forward slash solidus comma period and quo tation inches Spaces and the following common characters are not allowed backslash reverse solidus amp ampersand acute and question mark NOTE The User ID may be up to sixteen alphanumeric characters The User ID is case sensitive by default This and other options may be chosen in the Security Options section of the Security Administration screen h Select Password and press ENTER i From the Password menu enter the new password 61181918L1 1B 7 179 Section 7 Detailed Level Procedures Total Access HDX System Manual DLP 797 Setting System Security Settings in the PCU NOTE The Password may be up to sixteen alphanumeric chara
98. 050 XDSL Splitter Modules P N 1183002L2 One Total Access 3050 Metallic Test Controller P N 1183010L1 Total Access 3050 Cable assembly eight cables that connect 3000 to 3050 P N 1181926L1 One CAT 5e modular cable to connect the ESM and the upstream PSM or ESM If APS is implemented One additional CAT 5e modular cable to connect the second ESM and the upstream PSM or ESM 61181918L1 1B 3 5 Section 3 Application Guidelines Total Access HDX System Manual APP 320 High Density Expansion ADSL Wiring and connections as described in this application guide NOTE The CAT 5e modular cable used to communicate with the expansion shelves must be 8 conductor RJ 45 male straight through cables with grounds on both ends The connectors should also be unshrouded due to tight clearances on the Access Modules 3 BACKPLANE CONNECTIONS BETWEEN THE HDX SYSTEM SHELVES The HDX System pairs a Total Access 3000 chassis and a Total Access 3050 chassis to allow all 28 slots of the Total Access 3000 chassis to be used for Octal ADSL Access Modules The 28 Octal POTS ADSL splitters for those modules reside in the Total Access 3050 chassis The two chassis are interconnected by eight 64 pin amphenol connecting cables that provide the ADSL connectivity from the Total Access 3050 xDSL Splitter Modules to the Total Access 3000 chassis The connections between the two chassis is shown in Figure 3 2 The Total Access 3050 chassis will have the custo
99. 1 HDX Bay Configuration 1344 Lines cc eee 7 9 Figure 7 2 Total Access 3000 Chassis Clock Connections 0 00 00 eee eee 7 73 Figure 7 3 High Speed Connector Module o oooccccccco eee 7 75 Figure 7 4 Total Access 3000 Chassis Alarm Contacts 0 00 0 00 000000000008 7 85 Figure 7 5 Total Access 3000 Fan Connections and Alarm Contacts 0 aaa 7 89 Figure 7 6 Total Access Main menu 0 00 eee eae 7 101 Figure 7 7 SCA Module Restore Provisioning cee eee eee eae 7 113 Figure 7 8 Total Access 3050 Chassis Test BUS 0 0 cee eee 7 122 Figure 7 9 Routing Cable Out the Back of the Fiber Tray 0 00 a 7 135 Figure 7 10 Routing Cable Out the Side of the Fiber Tray cee ee eee 7 136 Figure 7 11 Create User Account Menu 2 2 2222 ee 7 166 Figure 7 12 Enter User ID Menu 2 7 167 Figure 7 13 Password Menu ocorrera ser Eia e teeta 7 168 Figure 7 14 Account Properties Access Privileges Menu a 7 169 Figure 7 15 User Account Access Rights Menu 0 2 7 170 Figure 7 16 Account Properties Access Privileges Menu 000 cece eee 7 171 Figure 7 17 Edit User Accounts Menu 2 cece tee eee 7 172 Figure 7 18 Edit User Account Menu 0 2 eet 7 173 Figure 7 19 Change Password Access Privilege Menu 2 7 173 Figure 7 20 Edit Password Menu 0 2 ee eae 7 174 Figure 7 21 Change Password Access Pri
100. 18140211 This block indicates the following One successful module upgrade has already been completed No upgrade errors have occurred since the last S tart Auto Upgrade Two modules including the current one in slot 8 require firmware upgrade The shelf is Busy upgrading an 1181402L1 module in slot 8 and has been performing Auto Upgrades for 5 minutes and 26 seconds The current module in slot 8 has been in the process of an upgrade for 1 minute and 33 seconds The HDX has already retrieved the firmware file from the TFTP server or from the local TFTP Cache The 7 128 61181918L1 1B Total Access HDX System Manual Detailed Level Procedures Section 7 Auto Upgrade for System Firmware Upgrade DLP 784 HDX is actively sending the firmware file to the module over the maintenance channel using the YModem protocol which is 43 246 complete Common Auto Upgrade errors and their reasons are listed in Table 7 6 Table 7 6 Common Auto Upgrade Errors Error Message Reason Necessary resources are busy Another line card other the current card being upgraded has the Maintenance Channel reserved A Y Modem Upgrade Transfer is currently occurring to a line card In the Auto Upgrade case this upgrade is occurring manually and outside of the Auto Upgrade function it can be either SNMP or Menu driven Another option may not be functioning correctly TFTP resource error line card Part number
101. 2 Baffle 1 Chassis 1 Splitter 1 61181918L1 1B Section 2 Engineering Guidelines This section is designed for use by network engineers planners and designers who are upgrading or expanding a communications network It contains general information and describes physical and opera tional concepts module functions network relationship provisioning testing alarm status and system monitoring CONTENTS 1 Dimensions of Equipment srst eer e eee 2 3 2 System Power Requirements seen hh hh m eee eens 24 Power Dissipation Considerations liliis 2 8 Power Dissipation for a HDX System es 2 8 HDX System Heat Dissipation and GR 63 CORE 2 2 11 System Levele AAi E en N E A E ER EEE A AA nae tree ede e E dedi 2 11 FrameLevel 2 nia eres e NGANGA E A EA aloe Ea TN aa Nipa LANG NG 2 11 3 Management Interfaces 0 ccc ee eee hh mrs 2 14 Alarm Input and Output nss naka GANA BA Ama a AAA 2 14 SNMP and Telnet over 10BaseT 00000 ete 2 14 SNMP and Telnet over In band Management 2 eae 2 16 IP Forwarditig i i abe POE ree eeu ue deen ate pare PRA GAD AG Ie itus ate he 2 16 Terminal Serverzi o a Desa NANANG Mer ka AA iud db edes dod Ete pre PG HANG 2 16 4 Network Timing iia eA eT Oak eae DES UU EU TU Eur ea a ere GG 2 17 BEAGLE ECRIRE 2 17 5 I Network Connections i1 AA LEE M E eR ERE NER RUP NR RE EI IUE Ra 2 17 Cable Specifications rr 2
102. 26 DLP 526 Perform the Steps Below in the Order Listed 4 PROCEDURE The ECU is installed in the Total Access 3000 expansion chassis in the HDX System The ECU should be the first pack installed on the expansion chassis since the Expansion Switch Module s ESM in the adjoining common slots A and B will not power up without the ECU present 1 Unpack and inspect the ECU Each ECU is shipped in its own cardboard shipping carton Open the carton carefully and avoid deeply cutting into the carton with sharp objects After removing the unit from the carton unwrap the bubble wrap and pull the unit from the anti static plastic bag After unpacking the unit inspect it for damage If the equipment has been damaged file a claim with the carrier and then contact ADTRAN Customer Service For more information refer to Appendix B Warranty 2 Install the ECU into the Total Access 3000 chassis a The ECU must be installed in the common slot that is the farthest left on the 3000 chassis labeled SCU Gently but firmly push the ECU into the far left slot Simultaneous thumb pressure at the top and bottom of the unit will ensure a good seat of the ECU pins into the backplane connector b Push the ejector tab closed and against the ESU front panel c Verify that the ECU power on self test routine is successfully completed d When the power on self test is complete the PWR LED will be green 3 The Total Access DSLAM Expansion Control
103. 3 Card Type 4 Port Tx Rate 5 Port Rx Rate Port Type Scrambler Idle Cell Type Maximum VCCs 10 Maximum VPCs 6 7 8 9 11 Maximum VPI Bits 12 Maximum VCI Bits 13 Physical Address 14 Neighbor Name 15 Neighbor IP Address 16 PNNI Port Options 17 Restore Factory Defaults V ILMI 1 IN SERVICE 2 OUT OF SERVICE MAINTENANCE enuey wa sAs XAH 1 ENABLE 2 DISABLE 1 C BIT DIRECT MAP 2 C BIT PLCP 3 M23 DIRECT MAP 4 M23 PLCP 1 Bank Timing 2 Linecard 1 71 2 E1 3 2 MHz Square Wave 1 DISABLE 2 ENABLE 1 IN SERVICE 2 OUT OF SERVICE MAINTENANCE 1 UNI 2 NNI 1 Allow SVCs 2 Aggregation Token 3 Admin Weight CBR 4 Admin Weight rtVBR 5 Admin Weight nrtVBR 6 Admin Weight UBR 7 Service Classes 8 VP Connections Allowed 9 Allow SPVC Connections 10 Auto Address Setup 1 ILMI 2 VPI 3 VCI 4 Addr Reg 6 Device Type 7 UNI Type 8 Get Next Timer 9 Set Req Timer 10 Get Req Timer 11 Max SVPC VPI 12 Max SVCC VPI 13 Min SVCC VCI 1 Yes 2 No 1 No 2 Yes 1 No 2 Yes 1 DISABLE 2 ENABLE 1 DISABLE 2 ENABLE 1 User 2 Network 1 Public 2 Private e jo a fo a a o op Local Ext Bits 2 1 2 3 4 Ext Bits 1 5 6 Linecard No Classes Supported UBR Onl nrtVBR Only nrtVBR UBR rtVBR Onl rtVBR UBR rtVBR nrtVBR rtVBR nrtVBR UBR CBR Only 10 CBR UBR 11 CBR nrtVB
104. 3 6 DS3 Network Connection cc eee eee 3 7 EMS Managed Object Configuration eae 5 4 EMS Geographical Lay0Ut ooocooccocococ eae 5 5 HDX Bay Configuration 1344 Lines 0 0 2 ee 7 9 Total Access 3000 Chassis Clock Connections 220200000 7 73 High Speed Connector Module ooooccocccooo eee 7 75 Total Access 3000 Chassis Alarm Contacts cece eee eee 7 85 Total Access 3000 Fan Connections and Alarm Contacts 7 89 Total Access Main menu 002002 c eee ete eee 7 101 Security Challenge Logon screen lisse ees 7 104 Total Access Main menu 00200 eee eee 7 105 SCA Module Restore Provisioning 000 c eee eee eae 7 117 Auto Upgrade Status Screen 1 eee 7 126 Total Access 3050 Chassis Test Bus 00 7 134 Routing Cable Out the Back of the Fiber Tray a 7 147 Routing Cable Out the Side of the Fiber Tray c ee eee eee 7 148 61181918L1 1B Total Access HDX System Manual Contents Figure 7 14 Figure 7 15 Figure 7 16 Figure 7 17 Figure 7 18 Figure 7 19 Figure 7 20 Figure 7 21 Figure 7 22 Figure 7 23 Figure 7 24 Figure 7 25 Figure 7 26 Figure 7 27 Figure 7 28 Figure 7 29 Figure 7 30 Figure 7 31 Figure 7 32 Figure 7 33 Figure 7 34 Figure 7 35 Figure 7 36 Figure 7 37 Figure A 1 Figure A 2 Figure A 3 Figure A 4 Figure A 5
105. 3050 to Total Access 3000 Cable Assembly P N 1181926L1 connects the 64 pin amphenol connectors on the backplane of the Total Access 3000 to those on the Total Access 3050 see Figure 1 16 Figure 1 16 Total Access 3050 to Total Access 3050 Cable Assembly The cable group is comprised of eight separately sheathed cables of lengths varying from 24 in to 64 in Fach cable has a 64 pin amphenol connector on each end White plastic tape labels near the ends of each cable identify both the shelf Total Access 3000 or Total Access 3050 and pair designation Pair 1 Pair 8 After insertion into the appropriate connector two hold down screws are used to secure the amphenol connection to the Total Access 3050 shelf One screw and a tie wrap secures the connector to the Total Access 3000 chassis These screws are included with the cable assembly and the wire ties are included with the Total Access 3000 61181918L1 1B 1 29 Section 1 System Description Total Access HDX System Manual 8 Port Ethernet Hub The Total Access 3000 3010 8 Port Ethernet Hub see Figure 1 17 P N 1181012L1 is a NEBS compli ant temperature hardened 8 port Ethernet hub that is powered using a 48 VDC power supply and is designed to be mounted on the side of the Total Access 3000 using the provided mounting bracket Figure 1 17 Total Access 8 Port Ethernet Hub Up to seven Total Access HDX systems or other equipment can be connected to the hub
106. 35 o OMANOUBRWNEH 36 37 38 39 Blwl noire 40 Un 41 42 43 SIN E NO EE MEN ON NR EA BEN NES EEN EE EE DEN ES Le Md Le Note 8 Tls for IMA From Slot 27 amp 28 of the Total Access 3000 shelf The IMA TI 1 8 TX pairs will be on the LINE connector labeled 217 224 The IMA T1 1 8 RX pairs will be on the POTS connector labeled 217 224 No card should be placed in slots 27 or 28 of the Total Access 3050 chassis for these connections 0Z ddV SAY uoisuedx3 Aysueq ufi uonoeg sauijapins uoneoiddy jenueyy wa sAs XAH Section 3 Application Guidelines Total Access HDX System Manual APP 320 High Density Expansion ADSL 6 PROVISIONING FOR ADSL APPLICATIONS For instructions concerning provisioning the Total Access 3000 System use the following documents DLP 761 Provisioning the Octal ADSL Access Module e DLP 800 Provisioning PVC Connections for a DS3 Primary Switch Module 3 10 61181918L1 1B Section 4 Site Preparation This section provides guidelines for network designers who are incorporating the HDX System into their networks CONTENTS PREP 405 Preparing for Chassis Installation eee III 4 3 Te ee a EA 4 3 2 Prerequisite Procedures 0000 cee tees 4 3 3 Space Considerations 0000 cece eee 4 3 Fitting the Shelf into NEBS Lineups 0 0 0 eae 4 3 Vertical Space Requirements liliis 4 3 Use of Hori
107. 6 0 15 0 15 Max SNR Margin dB 16 0 31 0 31 Min SNR Margin dB 0 0 31 0 31 Fast Channel Mode Rates will be rounded to the next lower 32k multiple Max Tx Rate kbps 38 32 8160 384 32 896 Min Tx Rate kbps 32 exar 32 2895 Interleave Channel Mode Rates will be rounded to the next lower 32k multiple l Max Tx Rate kbps 32 7616 32 896 Min Tx Rate kbps 32 7616 32 896 Max Interleave Delay ms 5 255 5 255 Reset to Factory Defaults Reset Figure 5 1 EMS Managed Object Configuration The system also displays flexible topological views of the network and all associated components of the network The geographical layout illustrated in Figure 5 2 displays components as a hierarchy beginning with the root node The geographical layout is one of many different topology options In addition web based clients provide a view into the Total Access EMS alarm window Total Access EMS is designed as a carrier class management system that offers the following features The power to scale The architecture to integrate into existing and forthcoming network management systems The flexibility to accommodate growth and change 5 4 61181918L1 1B Total Access HDX System Manual Network Management Systems Section 5 Total Access EMS NMS 501 oa Geographical Topology Viewer Top Level NNevada 555 Atlantic Califomia
108. 6 61181918L1 1B Total Access HDX System Manual Detailed Level Procedures Section 7 Restoring the System Configuration Archive DLP 730 TID HDX PCU System 07 29 04 14 42 Unacknowledged Alarms MAJOR INFO Unit Number 1 SCA Module Restore Provisioning Shelf 1 of 6 Slot CardType Restore Slot CardType Restore Slot CardType Restore APAPAP E No Dui A e No 23 IMA Module No Zi 4g Seabee rd No Ba haah aahit No LU aan Ming 32G No Ara NGA GPAPARAPAT GA BR ER d No Al SNAR No 25 ADS IMM S enaka No de AL eh AS AP fin ed No DEL PT ET No DO AA No 5 Octal ADSL C No A ANAKAN No 274 DS3LMi es No Ou nigri RU KOLA No den c RE No DG oe Baa rae oen No No Bist aaa ca ce e reg No Dm No Bu Kapangan Sed No Oe A recensere aries e eral No Bis DSS9 PSM i No Oss ve bob whet ba No 205 Fast Flag No Der she TN No LO GANANG ANAN No 21 IMA Module No Tho kosa etree No 22 IMA Module No 29 Restore Provisions To Modules DISABLE In Service 30 Restore In Service Module Provisions DISABLE Out Of Service 31 Restore to Empty Slot Pre Provision DISABLE No Prov Info x Unsupported Selection 4 4 2 2 4 2 4 4 eee AY RE Empty Slot INormal Restorable Inverse NOT restorable E nable ALL D isable ALL T oggle ALL F irst P rev N ext L ast Figure 7 9 SCA Module Restore Provisioning Other selections for easy manipulation of the module restore status include the following
109. 93 Account Names and Passwords 0 000 e eee eee 7 100 Total Access 3050 Splitter Shelf Amphenol Connector Pinouts 7 124 Total Access 3050 Splitter Shelf Amphenol Connector Pinouts 7 140 PCU User Account Privileges os crie remeni ren a a O E a a y a 7 188 Security Options 22 ma AG nd E AERIS a EI MARE 7 196 HDX System Acceptance Checklist unuan auauua 7 212 61181918L1 1B DLP 520 HDX System Installation 1 INTRODUCTION This section provides step by step instructions for the installation of the HDX System in a Central Office CO MultiTenant Unit MTU or Remote Terminal RT Installation procedures include the removal of the Total Access 3000 chassis and Total Access 3050 chassis from shipping containers mounting shelves in a CO rack power up all necessary data and administrative connections and turnup Acceptance testing is provided in DLP 854 Central Office Installation Acceptance Test Procedure 2 PREREQUISITE PROCEDURES Prior to installing the Total Access 3000 chassis the installer should thoroughly review PREP 405 Preparing for Chassis Installation Based on PREP 405 the installer will know which steps of this NTP will be required for the intended use of the Total Access 3000 chassis To comply with UL1950 requirements the following steps must be adhered to Connect to a reliably grounded 48 VDC source which is electrically isolated from the AC source A rea
110. ADRAN Total Access High Density Expansion HDX System Manual Manual Part Number 61181918L1 1B 61181918L1 1B September 2004 Total Access HDX System Manual Trademarks Any brand names and product names included in this manual are trademarks registered trademarks or trade names of their respective holders To the Holder of the Manual The contents of this manual are current as of the date of publication ADTRAN reserves the right to change the contents without prior notice In no event will ADTRAN be liable for any special incidental or consequential damages or for commercial losses even if ADTRAN has been advised thereof as a result of issue of this publication ADRAN 901 Explorer Boulevard P O Box 140000 Huntsville AL 35814 4000 256 963 8000 2004 ADTRAN Inc All Rights Reserved Printed in U S A ii 61181918L1 1B Total Access HDX System Manual Revision History Revision Date Description of Changes A 8 2003 Initial version B 8 2004 Reflect updates to the PCU Conventions The following typographical conventions are used in this document This font indicates screen menus fields and parameters THIS FONT indicates keyboard keys i e ENTER ESC ALT Keys that are to be pressed simultaneously are shown with a plus sign i e ALT X indicates that the ALT key and X key should be pressed at the same time This font indicates references to other documentation sec
111. Access Main Menu Tree 1 00 n A 2 Primary Controller Unit PCU P N 1181918L1 Menu Tree A 3 Primary Controller Unit PCU P N 1181918L1 Menu Tree continued A 8 DS3 Primary Switch Module List 3 P N1181041L3 Menu Tree A 9 Octal ADSL Access Module P N 1181405L1 Menu Tree A 13 xix Contents Total Access HDX System Manual Table 1 1 Table 2 1 Table 2 2 Table 2 3 Table 2 4 Table 2 5 Table 2 6 Table 2 7 Table 2 8 Table 2 9 Table 2 10 Table 2 11 Table 2 12 Table 2 13 Table 2 14 Table 2 15 Table 2 16 Table 2 17 Table 3 1 Table 3 2 Table 4 1 Table 6 1 Table 6 2 Table 7 1 Table 7 2 Table 7 3 Table 7 4 Table 7 5 Table 7 6 Table 7 7 Table 7 8 Table 8 Table 7 1 Table 7 2 XX Tables HDX System Components 000 eae 1 9 HDX System Equipment Dimensions and Weights 000 eee ee eae 2 3 Current Draw of Each Module At 48 WDC 22 0 ee 2 4 Primary Shelf Non Redundant Current Draw at 48 VDC 0saaa a 2 4 Expansion Shelf Non Redundant Current Draw at 48 VDC 2 5 Total Access 3050 Splitter Shelf Current Draw at 48 VDC 2 5 HDX First Bay 3 Systems Current Draw at 48 VDC 0 00 a 2 5 HDX Second Bay 3 Systems Current Draw at 48VDC a 2 6 Determining Wire Gauge and Fuse Size 20 2 ce ee
112. CA system in the PCU If necessary refer to the appropriate documentation before proceeding The prerequisite procedures include the following NTP 020 HDX System Installation NTP 024 HDX System Modules Installation PSMs are needed only if the TFTP upgrade will be facil itated by the in band management channel Proper installation and connection of a TFTP server DLP 797 Setting System Security Settings in the PCU DLP 729 Saving the System Configuration Archive 7 114 61181918L1 1B Total Access HDX System Manual Detailed Level Procedures Section 7 Restoring the System Configuration Archive DLP 730 DLP 730 Perform the following steps in order 3 PROCEDURE Configure the TFTP Server Address 1 CA 7 8 From the Total Access Main menu select System Controller and press ENTER From the System Controller Main menu select Provisioning and press ENTER 2 3 4 From the Provisioning menu select PCU System Administration and press ENTER From the PCU System Administration menu select System Configuration Archive SCA and press ENTER From the System Configuration Archive SCA menu select SCA Operations and press ENTER From the SCA Operations menu select SCA TFTP Server and press ENTER This field holds the IP address or hostname of the TFTP server that holds the saved SCA files Enter the IP address or hostname of the TFTP server that holds the saved SCA files
113. CU ensure that MNPS has been enabled and that the PSM is installed and functioning The provisioning item System Controller Provisioning Network Management Get Net Prov from MUX must be enabled for the following items to be retrieved from the MUX unit The SNMP OID adTAePCURestoreNetProvFromMUX in the ADTRAN TAePCU MIB can also be used to enable or disable MNPS For details refer to DLP 523 3 MATERIALS REQUIRED Total Access 3000 Primary Controller Unit PCU WARNING To prevent electrical shock do not install equipment in a wet location or during a lightning storm CAUTION Electronic modules can be damaged by static electrical discharge Before handling modules wear an anti static discharge wrist strap to prevent damage to electronic components Place modules in anti static packing material when transporting or storing When working on modules always place them on an approved anti static mat that is electrically grounded 61181918L1 1B 6 9 Section 6 Non Trouble Clearing Procedures NTP 023 Primary Controller Unit PCU Replacement Total Access HDX System Manual NTP 023 Perform the following steps in order 4 PROCEDURE Step For details refer to 1 Unpack and inspect the replacement PCU DLP 523 Step 1 Remove the current PCU from the Total Access 3000 chassis DLP 523 Step 2 Logoff the system DLP 523 Step 3 Remove the PCU DLP 523 Step 4 Install the repl
114. Connect the Total Access 3050 to the MDF For details refer to DLP 786 Connect High Speed Metallic Interface The HDX System is connected to the ATM network via DS3 coax The DS3 connection is made using a BNC I O Module mounted to the lower right corner of backplane 18 Install the high speed connector module The high speed metallic interface is a special adapter mounted to the lower right hand corner of the backplane For details refer to DLP 708 19 Connect the high speed cabling After attaching the high speed metallic interface to the backplane data cabling must be installed from the network to route the high speed signal to the Total Access 3000 chassis For details refer to DLP 709 61181918L1 1B 7 15 Section 7 Detailed Level Procedures Total Access HDX System Manual DLP 520 HDX System Installation Connect External Alarm Inputs Outputs The Total Access 3000 provides standard bank alarm outputs Each of the alarms listed below consists of a three pin wire wrap header that connects to the PCU for alarm management The PCU provides the necessary electronic circuits for a NO COM NC contact arrangement The alarms are as follows Critical Audible CRI A Major Audible MAJ A Minor Audible MIN A Critical Visual CRI V Major Visual MAJ V Minor Visual MIN V 20 Connect the alarm outputs Depending on the vendor equipment employed at the CO wiring external alarms from the Total
115. DX System Manual DLP 523 Primary Controller Unit PCU Replacement DLP 523 Perform the following steps in order 4 I 7 36 PROCEDURE Unpack and inspect the replacement PCU Each PCU is shipped in its own cardboard shipping carton Open the carton carefully and avoid deep penetration into the carton with sharp objects After removing the unit from the carton unwrap the bubble wrap and pull the unit from the anti static plastic bag Inspect the unit for possible damage If the equipment has damaged in transit file a claim with the carrier then contact ADTRAN Customer Service Remove the current PCU from the Total Access 3000 chassis The removal of the PCU will not disrupt the flow of data through the shelf Cell Switch Modules MUX modules or access cards A temporary loss of communication with the shelf as well as the loss of monitoring and recording alarms will occur while the PCU is being replaced Since the PCU is not in the data path no data will be affected Logoff the system a From the Total Access Main menu select Logoff and press ENTER b From the Exit and Logoff screen Enter Y and press ENTER Remove the PCU a Gently but firmly pull down on the front panel ejector tab until the unit is unseated from the backplane b Slide the unit completely out of the shelf and place in an anti static bag or on an anti static surface Install the replacement PCU into the Total Access 3000 chas
116. E eed EA RA 6 16 A t Procedure 2 caeco vea Da A a ONE ERE 6 17 5 Follow up Procedures eh 6 17 Section 7 Detailed Level Procedures a a loce rete ern ea RR 7 1 DLP 520 HDX System Installation RR eee 7 5 Mi Introduction 4 ose ook DEus d pet bodies REM a ent Gace ds 7 5 2 Prerequisite Procedures es 7 5 3 Tools Required ueque ee Ah P d a eie xo AIR un 7 5 4 Materials Required erre 7 6 5 ProCedure sf secs ca alsa BATAAN ne iret Vet awa Bs Pee Ae eie eA SS 7 8 Unpack and Inspect the Shelves Heat Baffle and Fan Assembly 7 8 Mount Shelves Heat Baffles and Fans a 7 9 Connect Power and Ground ooo 7 10 61181918L1 1B Xi Contents Total Access HDX System Manual DLP 521 DLP 522 DLP 523 DLP 524 xii Wire ClOCKS acres na dace Na ate A Ne Daa lel de Gol ee cod te 7 14 Wire Test ACCESS cunoticias 7 14 Connect Total Access 3000 to Total Access 3050 aa 7 14 Connect PSTN to Total Access 3050 0000 cee eee 7 15 Connect MDF to Total Access 3050 0000 eee 7 15 Connect High Speed Metallic Interface 0 2 eee 7 15 Connect External Alarm Inputs Outputs 000 ee eee eee 7 16 Connect Miscellaneous Alarm Inputs 0 0 000 eee eee eee 7 16 Connect Management Ports 0 00 eee eee 7 17 Install the POCU 2 eg ee a a leo eee hada dee 7 18 Apply Power and Verify the PCU Self Test Passes
117. Instances 1 Autosave Time Hour Autosave Retries 5 1 Restore Provisions to PCU 1 28 A B Restore 29 Restore Provisioning to Modules 30 Restore In Service Module Provisions 31 Restore to Empty Slot Pre Provision 1 SCA TFTP Server 2 SCA Remote Filename 3 SCA Autosave Status 4 Perform TFTP SCA Save 5 Perform TFTP SCA Restore 6 TFTP SCA Save Status 7 TFTP SCA Restore Status 1 Enable 2 Disable 1 Enable 2 Disable 1 Enable 2 Disable 1 Enable 2 Disable saaJ NU N y xipueddy seoipueddy jenue N wa sAs XAH a l 1 181618119 ev 901 NU W C1L70L8LLN d 3S T 2INPOWN YMS Alewlld ESO p v 9INBIY Unit Name CLEI Code Part Number 1 Configuration Serial Number Product Revision App Software Rev Boot Code Rev 1 Advanced Provisioning DS3 PSM Main Menu 2 DS3 LIU and Timing Provisioning 2 Provisioning 3 ATM Provisioning Port Slot Port Provisioning 1 Service States 2 OAM Identification 3 Maximum Network PVCs 4 Linked Provisionin 5 Cell Buffer CAC and policing options 6 Alarms Provisioning 7 Invalid cells to exit Sync state 8 tt Valid cells to enter Sync state 9 Restore Factory Defaults 1 Framing 2 Line Length meters 3 Primary Timing 4 Secondary Timing 5 Ext Bits Mode 6 Stratum 3E Holdover 7 Line Code 8 Restore Factory Defaults 1 Port ID 2 Service Mode
118. Interbank Comm Mode and press ENTER 6 From the Interbank Comm Mode menu select Host or Client and press ENTER Set the Target ID TID for the PCU To set the TID for the PCU perform the following steps 1 From the Total Access Main menu select System Controller and press ENTER 2 From the System Controller menu select Provisioning and press ENTER 3 From the Provisioning menu select TL1 and press ENTER 4 From the TL1 menu select Target ID TID and press ENTER 5 Enter a value up to 20 spaces beginning with a character for the Target ID TID and press ENTER NOTE If TL1 northbound interface is used on the EMS the TID should also be configured in the System Name field 4 FOLLOW UP PROCEDURES Once this procedure is complete return to the procedure which called out this DLP and continue with the tasks indicated there 7 140 61181918L1 1B DLP 789 Setting IP Parameters for an PCU 1 INTRODUCTION If the Total Access 3000 shelf is to be connected to an IP network for Telnet TFTP or SNMP management there are several IP parameters that need to be set for the shelf to communicate with the network These parameters along with the procedures for setting them are described in this DLP 2 PREREQUISITE PROCEDURES This procedure assumes that an PCU is installed in the Total Access 3000 shelf 3 TOOLS AND MATERIALS REQUIRED VT100 or PC configured as a VT100 terminal e Data cable to connect
119. L1 Metallic Test Controller N A 61183010L1 5 Cell Switch Modules 1181041L3 DS3 Primary Switch Module 61181041L3 22 N A 1181046L1 Expansion Switch Module 61181046L 1 22 N A Access Modu les 1181402L1 Quad DSX 1 Module 61181402L1 22 61181402L1 5 1181403L1 Octal SHDSL Access Module 61181403L1 22 61181403L1 5 1181405L1 Octal ADSL Access Module 61181405L1 22 61181405L1 5 1181405L2 Octal ADSL DSL Module 64181405L2 22 64181405L2 5 1181407L1 Octal IDSL Access Module 61181407L1 22 61181407L1 5 1181409L1 Octal IMA Access Module 61181409L 1 22 61181409L 1 5 1181426L1 16 Port SDAL2 N A N A 61181918L1 1B Section 1 System Description Total Access HDX System Manual Table 1 1 HDX System Components Continued E System Component Description Job Aid Practice 1183002L2 Total Access 3050 xDSL Splitter Module w MTA 61183002L2 22 N A 1183002L1 Total Access 3050 xDSL Splitter Module w o MTA 61183002L 1 22 N A 1183003L1 Total Access 3050 Cut Through Module 61183003L 1 22 N A 1183003L2 Total Access 3050 Cut Through Module w Test Access 61183003L2 22 N A 1183004L1 Total Access 3050 ADSL Splitter Module with MTA 61183003L1 22 N a 1183005L1 Total Access 3050 Cut Through Module w MTA N A N A 1181008L1 Total Access 3050 DS1 Pass Through Module 61183008L1 22 N A 1181980L1 Total Access 3000 Test Access Module 61181980L1 22 61181980L1 5 Misce
120. Manual indicates that modules should be checked and upgraded only when instructed via SNMP or menus If this value is set to Manual actions controlled by the RefreshInterval option will be disabled Disabled indicates that the Auto Upgrade feature is currently disabled NOTE When the Auto Upgrade Mode is set to Auto and an upgrade is per formed manually using the standard YModem or TFTP upgrade proce dure the module will be immediately up downgraded to the firmware version associated with the Auto Upgrade Config File thus reversing the manual upgrade This setting should be set to Manual if it is necessary to deviate from the firmware versions that are associated with the Auto Upgrade Config File 61181918L1 1B 7 127 Section 7 Detailed Level Procedures Total Access HDX System Manual DLP 784 Auto Upgrade for System Firmware Upgrade NOTE If an upgrade has been performed manually and the Auto Upgrade Mode is set to Auto the Auto Upgrade system will immediately begin the process of up downgrading the module To stop the Auto Upgrade sys tem press A for Abort Auto Upgrade then set this provision to Disabled to prevent further action by the Auto Upgrade system Config File Refresh Interval The Auto Upgrade refresh interval in hours is set in the Config File Refresh Interval field and controls how often the Auto Upgrades configuration file should be retrieved from the TFTP server When in Auto
121. Module P N 1181004L2 provides a connection shared by the two Primary Switch Modules for supporting 1 1 protection of the network interface electronics The coaxial adapter is situated to allow routing of coaxial cables in any direction through use of a coaxial elbow connector Once elbow connectors are installed to the jacks on the side of the coaxial adapter the coaxial cables can be routed to the side top or bottom of the system merely by rotating the elbow connector 61181918L1 1B 2 21 Section 2 Engineering Guidelines Total Access HDX System Manual Cable Routing Some connections to the Total Access 3000 are made directly on the access modules or multiplexer modules Cables are routed through the gap between the top of the system and the top of the module front panel once a module is installed The Heat Baffle and Cable Tray is required for all systems that will incorporate any cell switch or access modules This multifunction unit which also channels heat away from units above the system and provides for mounting a Fan Assembly provides access and management for routing cables into from a system installed immediately below it Cables can be routed either through the sides see Figure 2 8 or the back see Figure 2 9 of the Heat Baffle and Cable Tray The front cover which protects installed cables must be removed to install cable or to change an existing cable installation Installation of the Fan Assembly to the rear of the He
122. N A View Change System Controller Provisioning System Administration ADMIN Only Software Update Submenu N A N A N A N A Security Administration Submenu N A N A N A N A System Configuration Submenu N A N A N A N A Archive SCA System Event Log View N A N A N A N A Auto Upgrade Status Submenu N A N A N A N A System Controller Provisioning System Administration Software Update ADMIN Only Y Modem View Change N A N A N A N A TFTP View Change N A N A N A N A Reboot Controller Unit View Change N A N A N A N A 61181918L1 1B 7 205 Section 7 Detailed Level Procedures DLP 797 Setting System Security Settings in the PCU Total Access HDX System Manual Table 8 PCU User Account Privileges Continued Menu Items ADMIN READWRITE READONLY TEST CONFIG System Controller Provisioning System Administration Security Administration ADMIN Only User Currently Logged on Submenu N A N A N A N A Edit User Accounts Submenu N A N A N A N A Create New User Account Submenu N A N A N A N A Security Options Submenu N A N A N A N A Restore Back to Defaults Submenu N A N A N A N A Accounts Access Tech Support Submenu N A N A N A N A Account System Controller Provisioning System Administration System Configuration Archive SCA ADMIN Only SCA Auto Save Submenu N A N A N A N A Provisioning SCA
123. NTRODUCTION The high speed metallic interface is a special adapter mounted to the lower right hand corner of the backplane It is a separate part not required for individual DSX 1 network inputs but is required for the high speed electrical input from the network The Dual BNC O Module allows for a non redundant ATM DS3 connection See Figure 7 3 for a depiction of the high speed connector module Q NG Figure 7 3 High Speed Connector Module 2 PREREQUISITE PROCEDURES Fach adapter will arrive in its own cardboard box After unpacking the unit inspect it for damage If the equipment has been damaged file a claim with the carrier and then contact ADTRAN Customer Service Refer to Appendix B Warranty 3 TOOLS AND MATERIALS REQUIRED 1 phillips head screwdriver 61181918L1 1B 7 75 Section 7 Detailed Level Procedures DLP 708 Installing the High Speed Connector Module Total Access HDX System Manual 7 76 WARNING To prevent electrical shock do not install equipment in a wet location or during a lightning storm CAUTION Electronic modules can be damaged by static electrical discharge Before handling modules wear an antistatic discharge wrist strap to prevent dam age to electronic components Place modules in antistatic packing mate rial when transporting or storing When working on modules always place them on an approved antistatic mat that is electrically grounded 61181918L1 1B Total
124. P over Ethernet or the in band management channel 3 TOOLS AND MATERIALS REQUIRED Total Access 3000 Primary Controller Unit Management connection to the Total Access 3000 7 174 61181918L1 1B Total Access HDX System Manual Detailed Level Procedures Section 7 Upgrading the PCU Software DLP 796 DLP 796 Perform the following steps in order 4 PROCEDURE Upgrading the PCU using TFTP 1 VOD AN OQ tA Bu 12 13 14 15 16 Save the new firmware file onto a TFTP server reachable by the Total Access 3000 PCU that is to be upgraded Logon to the PCU For details refer to DLP 716 From the Total Access Main menu select System Controller Unit and press ENTER From the System Controller Unit menu select Provisioning and press ENTER From the Provisioning menu select System Administration and press ENTER From the System Administration menu select Software Update and press ENTER From the Software Update menu select TFTP Update and press ENTER From the TFTP Update menu select Firmware TFTP Server and press ENTER Enter and or verify the IP Address of the TFTP Server containing the software file From the TFTP Update menu select Remote Filename and press ENTER 11 Enter the name of the file that was saved to the TFTP Server in step 1 Be sure to include all punctuation and file extensions that are associate with the file From the TFTP Update menu select Initiat
125. PCU asa Host 2 eae 7 140 Set the Target ID TID forthe PCU 0 0 ee 7 140 4 Follow up Procedures o 7 140 61181918L1 1B XV Contents Total Access HDX System Manual DLP 789 DLP 790 DLP 791 DLP 792 DLP 793 DLP 795 DLP 796 DLP 797 xvi Setting IP Parameters for an PCU eee n n nnn 7 141 Ve le a 7 141 2 Prerequisite Procedures 0c eee eens 7 141 3 Tools and Materials Required 02000 cece eee ee 7 141 4 Procedure A othe Da naa ti RA eL 7 143 Setting IP Parameters for a PCU 0 eee 7 143 5 Follow up Procedures 2000 cee eens 7 144 Routing Cable Through the Heat Baffle oooooooommmmmmmoo 7 145 T Introduction comer A PA qe 7 145 2 Prerequisite Procedures es 7 145 3 Tools and Materials Required 02000 cece eee ee 7 145 4 Brocedure viu a Rees ae GG REA S eI ERR ER 7 147 5 Follow up Procedures 2 eee 7 148 Verify Total Access 3050 Splitter Shelf Wiring to the MDF 7 149 1e Introduction Nabasa si ber m bep bue Edu deci Ue dub ta lote PG Na 7 149 2 Prerequisite Procedures ees 7 149 3 Tools and Materials Required llle 7 149 A Siret idee ee ave dy PANGA Ire era EUN Npa ote piv een 7 151 5 Follow up Procedures tiara y do RS EE Ree Reds 7 155 Verifying the Fan Assembly Alarm Connection to the PCU 7 157 1 Introducti
126. PIER EI RET eS ee HUA ANA A 1 Appendix B Warranty si es ere x OE BK KG Ioa WG a UNT CR a PG A B 1 61181918L1 1B xvii Contents Total Access HDX System Manual Figure 1 1 Figure 1 2 Figure 1 3 Figure 1 4 Figure 1 5 Figure 1 6 Figure 1 7 Figure 1 8 Figure 1 9 Figure 1 10 Figure 1 11 Figure 1 12 Figure 1 13 Figure 1 14 Figure 1 15 Figure 1 16 Figure 1 17 Figure 1 18 Figure 1 19 Figure 1 20 Figure 1 21 Figure 2 1 Figure 2 2 Figure 2 3 Figure 2 4 Figure 2 5 Figure 2 6 Figure 2 7 Figure 2 8 Figure 2 9 Figure 2 10 Figure 3 1 Figure 3 2 Figure 3 3 Figure 5 1 Figure 5 2 Figure 7 1 Figure 7 2 Figure 7 3 Figure 7 4 Figure 7 5 Figure 7 6 Figure 7 7 Figure 7 8 Figure 7 9 Figure 7 10 Figure 7 11 Figure 7 12 Figure 7 13 xviii Figures HDX Configurations 2 cent oe ats dade ee pa E E 1 4 Total Access 3000 Backplane 0 0 00 1 6 Front View of Total Access 3000 Shelf 00222 e eee eee 1 11 Total Access 3050 Ch ssis 5a goes anal ature In bao Era ee RERO TRE e ea 1 12 PCU Front Panel een Ex A o Dre ate E Rent 1 14 EGCU Eront Panel 2 el NAA NAE LA NA eli S NA Wand NA BALANGA Ri Ee 1 16 DS3 Primary Switch Module 2 22 eh 1 18 Expansion Switch Module 2 2 2222 les 1 20 Octal ADSL 3 35 ue RE rer Lied de esi eeu s 1 21 Metallic Test Controller liliis 1 23 XDSL Splitter Module wMTA ssssseeeee ee 1 24 xDSL
127. Port DB 25 female connector allows port access for a Terminal Server connection This port is wired to connect to a DCE device If a Total Access 3050 is used for metallic test access this interface is used for intershelf communications between each Total Access 3000 3050 pair of shelves using the Total Access 3050 to Total Access 3000 Cable Assembly P N 1181926L1 NOTE The Network Management Port connection is only valid on the primary shelf Flag G Administrative Port Female DB 25 local access port to VT100 terminal modem or other serial device for permanent provisioning and troubleshooting This port is wired to connect to a DCE device NOTE The Administrative Port connection is only valid on the primary shelf Flag H RJ 45 for 10Base T RJ 45 jack provides for TCP IP Telnet SNMP TFTP communication over 10Base T NOTE The Ethernet 10Base T connection is only valid on the primary shelf 61181918L1 1B 1 7 Section 1 System Description Total Access HDX System Manual Alarms Flag I Audiovisual Alarms The system provides for eight alarm outputs from the primary shelf only Critical Visual Critical Audible Major Visual Major Audible Minor Visual Minor Audible Each alarm can be individually wired for normally open or normally closed configuration NOTE Alarm output connections are only valid on the primary shelf Flag J External Alarm Inputs per shelf Each shelf
128. R 12 CBR nrtVBR UBR 13 CBR rtVBR 14 CBR riVBR UBR 15 DBR rtVBR nrtVBR 16 CBR rtVBR nrtVBR UBR y xipueddy seal nuay seoipueddy OL V al 1 181618119 penunuoo a91 nuaw c1L70L8LLN d 3817 AINPOJA YMS Areuiad CSA P Y e1nBi4 e Provisioning Provisioning 4 ATM Provisioning DS3 5 ATM Provisioning MGMT Port 6 Traffic Descriptor Provisioning 7 VC VP Provisioning Port ID Service State Port Type Scrambler Idle Cell Type Maximum VCCs Maximum VPCs Maximum VPI Bits Maximum VCI Bits COIN o JO a Jo m j o 10 Physical Address 11 Neighbor Name 12 Neighbor IP Address 13 PNNI Port Options 14 Restore Factory Defaults I ILMI 1 Port ID 2 Service Mode 3 Port Type 4 Maximum VCCs 5 Maximum VPCs 6 Maximum VPI Bits 7 Maximum VCI Bits 8 Physical Address 9 Neighbor Name 10 Neighbor IP Address 11 CSM Linecard Channel VPI 12 CSM Linecard Channel VCI 13 CSM Linecard Channel Class 14 Suggested Linecard APS VCI 15 Suggested Linecard APS VCI 16 Restore Factory Defaults N Next P Previous C Create PVC R Remove PVC S Search E Enable PVC D Disable PVC V View Names Status Enter Index 1 IN SERVICE 2 OUT OF SERVICE MAINTENANCE 3 OUT OF SERVICE UNASSIGNED 1 UNI 2 NNI 1 Bellcore 2 ITU 1 Is a PNNI Link 2 Aggregation Token 3 Admin Weight CBR 4 Admin Weigh
129. REQUISITE PROCEDURES TFTP The following procedures must be completed prior to attempting a software upgrade on the PCU using TFTP If necessary refer to the appropriate documentation before proceeding The prerequisite procedures include the following e NTP 020 HDX System Installation NTP 024 HDX System Modules Installation PSMs are needed only if the TFTP upgrade will be facil itated by the in band management channel e DLP 795 Verifying PCU Communications Over an IP LAN YModem The following procedures must be completed prior to attempting a software upgrade on the PCU using YModem The YModem protocol may be used over a variety of transmission mediums NOTE YModem upgrade over Telnet are not supported by ProComm 61181918L1 1B 7 173 Section 7 Detailed Level Procedures Total Access HDX System Manual DLP 796 Upgrading the PCU Software The prerequisites listed below have qualifying statements If the particular transmission medium is not going to be used skip the corresponding prerequisite procedure If necessary refer to the appropriate documentation before proceeding The prerequisite procedures include the following e NTP 020 HDX System Installation DLP 713 Connecting a Shelf to an External Modem This prerequisite need only be completed if communicating with the shelf using an external modem DLP 789 Setting IP Parameters for an PCU IP Parameters are only considered a prerequisite if using I
130. S3 Primary Switch Module 0 cece eee eee n n hh hh hn 7 213 ds HittodU ctionis ister qat ido E ee SES YES QM Der nd 7 213 2 Prerequisite Procedures ese 7 213 3 Tools Required suis bebe Ec EREMO EA UPS CERAM 7 213 4 Materials Required es 7 213 5 Procedures o ces ote eo rhe eere papo ard d pa NICO feline 7 214 Provision a Traffic Descriptor 00 cece eee 7 214 Provision PVOS csset Nes RW Ex etam NIS ces Su 7 215 Provision the Secondary Offline Primary Switch Module Less 7 215 6 Follow up Procedure oooocoocco nr 7 216 DLP 801 Connecting the Total Access 3000 and Total Access 3050 7 217 de Introduction 12 ee hoe Me ed ess Edd E es 7 217 2 Prerequisite Procedures liliis 7 218 3 Tools Required cuina Pula dolos eg eA abor a aea d 7 218 4 Materials Required es 7 218 Bie ProGed rei iii ote Ea t A v lan ee pt nk AA dte oA estet baba 7 219 6 Follow up Procedure ssssllll re 7 219 DLP 854 Central Office Installation Acceptance Test Procedure 7 221 Di Introd ctionz i sco Sa PAREN A ee Kha bee et eee eee 6 7 221 2 Prerequisite Procedures s 7 221 3 Tools and Materials Required 000 e eee eee 7 221 4 Procedure cerunt Qed pate edel dad ecd eer Olan aid DIN SCA Bale 7 222 5 Follow up Procedures anaana naana 7 223 Appendix A Menu Trees ran rU We KG ee ale DD
131. Section 7 HDX System Installation DLP 520 L CAUTION Installing fuses in the fuse alarm panel at this stage will provide power to the chassis and fans All three fans on the Fan Assembly will begin to rotate and there will be power to pins on the backplane and inside the shelf Exercise caution to avoid electric shock Install 15 amp fuses in the slots in the fuse and alarm panel that service the Total Access 3000 chassis or turn on the 15 amp circuit breaker that powers the chassis Using a voltmeter place the common normally black lead on the TS1 48 VDC RET terminal and the DC volts normally red lead on the TS1 48 VDC PRI terminal The reading should be in the operating range of 42 VDC to 56 VDC with a nominal value of 48 VDC Note the polarity Using a voltmeter repeat using the TS2 48 VDC RET terminal and the TS2 48 VDC SEC terminal Remove the fuses turn off circuit breakers from the fuse and alarm panel slots powering the Total Access 3000 chassis Install 5 amp fuses in the slots in the fuse and alarm panel that power the Total Access 3050 chassis Using a voltmeter place the common normally black lead on the Total Access 3050 48 VDC RET for the primary terminal and the DC volts normally red lead on the fan module 48 VDC PRI terminal The reading should be in the operating range of 42 VDC to 56 VDC with a nominal value of 48 VDC Note the polarity
132. Splitter Module Connections llli 1 25 Heat Baffle and Fiber Tray 0 0 0 eee eh 1 26 Heat Baffle Operation 00000 cece ee 1 27 Total Access 23 Inch Fan Assembly ee eee 1 28 Total Access 3050 to Total Access 3050 Cable Assembly 1 29 Total Access 8 Port Ethernet Hub 0 000 cece eee 1 30 BNC VO Module s nata ox ue P eee aaa e tke ea ad a ae 1 31 Total Access 3050 Streaker TAM 200 0 cece eee eee 1 32 HDX Bay Configuration Front 1344 Lines lle 1 33 HDX Bay Configuration Rear 1344 Lines 0 00 2 eee 1 34 Total Access 3000 DSLAM HDX 1344 ports in 2 bay configuration 2 12 SNMP Telnet and TL1 over 10Base T ccc ee 2 15 Clocking FUNCUHONS s os scree anG Po ate wha eee PNG RID Ente pe 2 17 Backplane and Amphenol Connectors for Total Access 3050 2 19 Pinout for a Single Connector 0 0 cee eee 2 19 Connection from Total Access 3000 Chassis to Total Access 3050 Chassis 2 20 BNC Adaptor Module yeas e po aati eae raaa ne 2 21 Heat Baffle with Cables Routed Out the Side anaana 2 22 Heat Baffle with Cables Routed Out the Back anaana 2 23 Wire wrap Pins for Metallic Test Access 000 cece eee eae 2 24 HDX ADS esi HABAG KGG NG PP TLB NANG bag tad bh MVP P Sadie Red eade 3 4 Connection from Total Access 3000 Chassis to the Total Access 3050 Chassis
133. U Replacement 000 cece eee eee 7 35 DLP 524 DS3 Primary Switch Module Installation c eee eee eee 7 41 DLP 525 Expansion Switch Module ESM Installation leere 7 47 DLP 526 Expansion Controller Unit ECU Installation cee eee 7 51 DLP 527 Metallic Test Controller Installation eee eee eee 7 55 DLP 528 xDSL Splitter Module with Test Access 2 ron 7 59 DLP 561 Octal ADSL Access Module Installation lees 7 63 DLP 701 Removing and Replacing the Rear Plastic Guard 2 00 c eee eee eee 7 67 DLP 703 Connecting a Primary and Secondary T1 Clock eee eee eee 7 71 DLP 708 Installing the High Speed Connector Module s eese 7 75 DLP 709 Connecting High Speed Cabling cece eee eee BB 7 79 DLP 710 Connecting the External Alarm Outputs e eee eee eee 7 83 DLP 711 Connecting a Fan Assembly Alarm cece eee RR n nnn 7 87 DLP 713 Connecting a Shelf to an External Modem ss eee eee 7 91 DLP 715 Connecting the Craft Port to a Terminal or PC cece eee 7 95 DLP 716 Logging on to the System cece tee n n nn nnn 7 99 DLP 729 Saving the System Configuration Archive leere 7 103 DLP 730 Restoring the System Configuration Archive 00ce cece e eee eee eee 7 109 DLP 761 Provisioning the Octal ADSL Access Module eee eee eens 7 115 DLP 785 Connec
134. UP PROCEDURES Once this procedure is complete return to the procedure which called out this DLP and continue with the tasks indicated there 7 86 61181918L1 1B DLP 711 Connecting a Fan Assembly Alarm 1 INTRODUCTION The Total Access Fan Assemblies use a normally open circuit to pass a fan alarm to the HDX System if one or more of the three individual fans ceases to operate or power is lost to the Fan Assembly itself Under these circumstances the circuit closes causing a 48 VDC signal to be passed to the Total Access 3000 chassis external alarm input header The PCU notes the alarm and passes the information as appro priate The two Total Access Fan Assemblies covered in this DLP are as follows 23 Inch Fan Assembly P N 1181006L1 19 Inch Fan Assembly P N 1182006L1 2 PREREQUISITE PROCEDURES The following procedures must be completed prior to connecting a Fan Assembly alarm to the primary shelf If necessary refer to the appropriate documentation before proceeding Since this procedure is used specifically for a Fan Assembly alarm the Fan Assembly must be mounted to an installed Heat Baffle and Fiber Tray The prerequisite procedures include the following e DLP 521 Flush mounting the Shelves Heat Baffles and Fans DLP 522 Mid mounting the Shelves Heat Baffles and Fans 3 TOOLS AND MATERIALS REQUIRED Wire strippers Wire wrap gun Phillips head screwdriver 61181918L1 1B 7 87 Section 7 Deta
135. URES The following procedure must be completed prior to connecting high speed cables If necessary refer to the appropriate documentation before proceeding The prerequisite procedure is as follows DLP 708 Installing the High Speed Connector Module 3 TOOLS AND MATERIALS REQUIRED Wire strippers Wire wrap tool 61181918L1 1B 7 79 Section 7 Detailed Level Procedures DLP 709 Connecting High Speed Cabling Total Access HDX System Manual 7 80 WARNING To prevent electrical shock do not install equipment in a wet location or during a lightning storm CAUTION Electronic modules can be damaged by static electrical discharge Before handling modules wear an antistatic discharge wrist strap to prevent dam age to electronic components Place modules in antistatic packing mate rial when transporting or storing When working on modules always place them on an approved antistatic mat that is electrically grounded 61181918L1 1B Total Access HDX System Manual Detailed Level Procedures Section 7 Connecting High Speed Cabling DLP 709 DLP 709 Perform the following steps in order 4 PROCEDURE 1 Determine which cable from the network is for transmitting and which is for receiving 2 Attach the network transmit cable to the Total Access 3000 backplane s upper BNC connector labeled Rx The fitting is a standard BNC connector Align the outer ring of the cable connector with the keys on t
136. Unit which can be either a PCU or an ECU the next two slots are designated for Cell Switch Modules either PSM or ESM and the remaining 28 slots are reserved for access modules Slot openings are labeled for easy identification A Total Access 3000 chassis which has been populated with the common modules and access cards is referred to as a Shelf A single HDX system consists of one Primary shelf and up to five Expansion shelves The 6 inch high 12 inch deep 23 inch wide chassis is constructed of heavy gauge sheet metal with vent perforations on the top and bottom planes Construction provides for all standard wire runs Reversible mounting brackets allow for flush mount or 5 inch overhang configurations Mounting brackets meet either the 1 inch or 1 3 4 inch mounting hole pattern see Figure 1 3 Total Access ah Aran DAN j 59558555018 12 23 Figure 1 3 Front View of Total Access 3000 Shelf 61181918L1 1B 1 11 Section 1 System Description Total Access HDX System Manual Total Access 3050 Chassis The Total Access 3050 chassis P N 1183001L1 can accommodate 28 xDSL Splitter Modules matching 1 1 with the 28 modules in the Total Access 3000 chassis One Total Access 3050 chassis is used with each Total Access 3000 Primary or Expansion shelf The Total Access 3050 chassis mounts in a standard 23 inch wide rack The
137. Using a voltmeter repeat using the 48 VDC RET B and 48 VDC B terminals Install 1 amp fuses in the slots in the fuse and alarm panel that power the Fan Assemblies Using a voltmeter place the common normally black lead on the fan module 48 VDC RET A terminal and the DC volts normally red lead on the fan module 48 VDC A terminal The reading should be in the operating range of 42 VDC to 56 VDC with a nominal value of 48 VDC Note the polarity Using a voltmeter repeat using the 48 VDC RET B and 48 VDC B terminals Remove the fuses turn off the circuit breakers from the fuse and alarm panel slots powering the fan module Use a 1 phillips head screwdriver to replace the protective guard over the power terminals 11 Remove the rear plastic guard The large rear Plexiglass guard covering the backplane is a safety feature of the Total Access 3000 chassis designed to keep personnel and equipment from contacting potentially high voltage exposed at some backplane locations Following the sequence of steps outlined in this NTP will allow the service provider to remove the guard once make all the necessary Total Access 3000 backplane connections and then reinstall the guard For details refer to DLP 701 61181918L1 1B 7 13 Section 7 Detailed Level Procedures Total Access HDX System Manual DLP 520 HDX System Installation NOTE Wire tie anchors are pre installed on the backplane 64 pin 50 pin amphe
138. _T EQP_R bus that looks into the HDX System hardware The other bus will be the facility FAC_T FAC_R bus that looks out onto the facility loop 2 24 61181918L1 1B Section 3 Application Guidelines This section provides guidelines for network designers who are incorporating a HDX System into their networks APP 320 Figure 3 1 Figure 3 2 Figure 3 3 Table 3 1 Table 3 2 CONTENTS High Density Expansion ADSL 2 22222 02 eee 3 3 Tr USA cea deo dato kt A id iS e tox de iod 3 3 2 Components aaa a Aida deus e uq Rege den D D DA UE et ER 3 5 3 Backplane Connections between the HDX System shelves 3 6 4 Connections ATM DS3 Network Feed 2 ers 3 7 5 Connections ADSL Loop irris rn 3 7 6 Provisioning for ADSL Applications 2 000002 cee 3 10 FIGURES HDX ADSL 8 boy cate t Reales bes ag ads ada o s NR E UR e eR oe abge Duce ect 3 4 Connection from Total Access 3000 Chassis to the Total Access 3050 Chassis 3 6 DS3 Network Connection lille 3 7 TABLES Total Access 3000 To Total Access 3050 Splitter Shelf Connection Chart 3 8 Total Access 3050 Splitter Shelf Amphenol Connector Pinouts 3 9 61181918L1 1B 3 1 Section 3 Application Guidelines Total Access HDX System Manual This page is intentionally blank 3 2 61181918L1 1B APP 320 High Density Expansion ADSL 1 USAGE This application guide pro
139. a voltmeter set to its lowest resistance range if applicable place one lead on the rack s ground strap and the other lead on the Total Access 3000 frame ground terminal The reading should be less than 1 ohm Greater readings should be investigated b Using a voltmeter set to its lowest resistance range if applicable place one lead on the rack s ground strap and the other lead on the Total Access 3050 frame ground terminal The reading should be less than 1 ohm Greater readings should be investigated c Repeat the process for the Fan Assembly using the rack s grounding strap and bare metal on the Fan Assembly chassis such as the mounting screws Readings should be less than 1 ohm Greater readings should be investigated 7 Connect power and return to the Total Access 3000 chassis After connecting and checking the ground to the Total Access 3000 chassis connect power to the chassis Check to make sure the power source is providing the correct power and polarity to the chassis To connect power and return to the chassis perform the following steps a Determine which fuse circuit breaker pairs are to supply power and return to the Total Access 3000 chassis b Remove the fuses turn off circuit breakers from the A and B slots for the pair determined in the above step c Using a 1 phillips head screwdriver remove the Plexiglass cover to the power terminals The power terminals are labeled TS1 and TS2 d Cut four lengths of AWG
140. abcdABCD12345678 Selection N ext P revious Total Access System 03 31 03 13 27 STATUS ENABLED ENABLED ENABLED ENABLED ENABLED gt gt gt END OF ACCOUNT LIST System Help Screen Edit User Accounts NUM LOGINS ACCESS RIGHTS SOGO H 0 Unit Number 1 Page lof 1 ADMIN READ READ WRITE TEST TEST Figure 7 30 Edit User Accounts Selection Menu 61181918L1 1B Total Access HDX System Manual Detailed Level Procedures Section 7 Setting System Security Settings in the PCU DLP 797 g From the Edit Account menu select Enable Disable User Account and press ENTER see Figure 7 31 TIDI Unacknowledged Alarms Unit Number 1 Edit User Account abcdABCD12345678 ENABLED 1 Change Password Access Privilege 2 Enable Disable User Account ENABLED 3 Delete User Selection Total Access System 03 31 03 13 27 1 System Help Screen Figure 7 31 Edit User Account Menu 61181918L1 1B 7 193 Section 7 Detailed Level Procedures Total Access HDX System Manual DLP 797 Setting System Security Settings in the PCU View Users Currently Logged On 1 Logon to the HDX System using an Admin level user account For details refer to DLP 716 2 After logging on using an Admin user account perform the following steps a b a o 7 194 From the Total Access Main menu select System Controller and press ENTER From th
141. abeled 1 24 The POTS and LINE connectors in that group has the ADSL ports and Line connections for the eight ports from slots 1 2 and 3 The connections are detailed in APP 320 Horizontal side Terminal Blocks As shown in the Section 3 Application Guidelines each Total Access 3050 chassis wires out to its own terminal block on the side of the MDF A separate terminal block location on the side of the MDF should be reserved for each shelf to be installed The type of terminal block and number of cables needed for each system application will be determined by the CO SOP The terminal block for each chassis should be mounted on the MDF and the MDF cables should be attached as shown in Section 3 Application Guidelines The other end of the cable should be routed to the anticipated location of the chassis and labeled to indicate the terminal block location and cable designation at the terminal block 8 FOLLOW UP PROCEDURES Once the Central Office preparations described in this procedure are complete the actual installation of the HDX System as described in NTP 020 can be performed 61181918L1 1B 4 7 Section 4 Site Preparation PREP 405 Preparing for Chassis Installation Total Access HDX System Manual This page is intentionally blank 61181918L1 1B Section 5 Network Management Systems This section is designed for use by network engineers planners and designers who are upgrading or inten sifying a communications network
142. acement PCU into the Total Access 3000 chassis DLP 523 Step 5 Connect a terminal or PC to the craft port DLP 715 Provision the replacement PCU DLP 523 Step 7 2 3 4 2 6 7 8 Verify replacement PCU s communication over the IP LAN DLP 795 5 FOLLOW UP PROCEDURE Once this procedure is complete return to the procedure which referred to this NTP and continue with the tasks indicated 61181918L1 1B Total Access HDX System Manual Section 6 Non Trouble Clearing Procedures Primary Controller Unit PCU Replacement NTP 023 61181918L1 1B 6 11 Section 6 Non Trouble Clearing Procedures Total Access HDX System Manual NTP 023 Primary Controller Unit PCU Replacement 6 12 61181918L1 1B Total Access HDX System Manual Section 6 Non Trouble Clearing Procedures Primary Controller Unit PCU Replacement NTP 023 61181918L1 1B 6 13 Section 6 Non Trouble Clearing Procedures Total Access HDX System Manual NTP 023 Primary Controller Unit PCU Replacement 6 14 61181918L1 1B NTP 024 HDX System Modules Installation 1 INTRODUCTION This procedure provides step by step instructions for the installation of the HDX System modules Accep tance testing is provided in DLP 854 Central Office Installation Acceptance Test Procedure 2 PREREQUISITE PROCEDURES The following procedures must be completed prior to the HDX System modules If necessary refer to the appropriat
143. ailed Level Procedures DLP 797 Setting System Security Settings in the PCU Total Access HDX System Manual Delete User Account 1 Logon to the HDX System using an Admin level user account For details refer to DLP 716 2 After logging on using an Admin user account perform the following steps a o o O From the Total Access Main menu select System Controller and press ENTER From the System Controller menu select Provisioning and press ENTER From the Provisioning menu select System Administration and press ENTER From the System Administration menu select Security Administration and press ENTER e From the Security Administration menu select Edit User Accounts and press ENTER m 7 190 From the Edit User Accounts menu select the account to delete and press ENTER see Figure 7 28 TID Unacknowledged Alarms Num USER 1 ADMIN 2 READONLY 3 READWRITE 4 TEST 5 abcdABCD12345678 Selection N ext P revious Total Access System 03 31 03 13 27 STATUS ENABLED ENABLED ENABLED ENABLED ENABLED gt gt gt END OF ACCOUNT LIST System Help Screen Edit User Accounts NUM LOGINS ACCESS RIGHTS SOGO H 0 Unit Number 1 Page lof 1 ADMIN READ READ WRITE TEST TEST Figure 7 28 Edit User Accounts Selection Menu 61181918L1 1B Total Access HDX System Manual Detailed Level Procedures Section 7 Setting
144. aker TAM has on board power and a jack at the bottom of the module to connect it to frame ground This connection is necessary for continuity testing The connections are tested by grounding the Tip or Ring of the circuit under test at the remote end MDF frame and verifying that the appropriate LED lights on the Streaker TAM The Streaker TAM has three groups of LEDs on the front panel Each group has eight pair of LEDs that represent the eight ports available at the card position where the Streaker TAM is inserted In each pair there is one red LED for the Ring connection and one green LED for the Tip connection The three groups the eight POTS circuits the eight ADSL POTS circuits each to the MDF and the eight ADSL circuits that go to the Octal ADSL Access Modules in the Total Access 3000 chassis Two people are necessary for the testing One person will identify the connections at the MDF and sequentially ground the Tip or Ring leads of each connection while the second person verifies that the correct LEDs illuminate on the Streaker TAM The ADSL connections from the Total Access 3050 chassis to the Total Access 3000 chassis require using an extender to access the ports for grounding CO TALKON EH bor ckr ele a ED Ck13 ele cxT4 ele ST TA30508 OO CKTE ele ckt7 ele ECSNUU ECSNMDLU cr2 ofo Ck13 e e cra ofo Roo od Ck17 ole crsa o e CK11 efe c12 ofo Ck13 ofe CK14 ofo aod od
145. al Access 3050 Splitter Shelf equipped with xDSL Splitter Modules the Total Access 3000 s capacity to provide ADSL service is doubled The Total Access 3050 can accommodate 28 xDSL Splitter Module with slots matching 1 1 to the module slots in the Total Access 3000 chassis If the xDSL Splitter Module is removed the lifeline POTS service is not disrupted since the Total Access 3050 chassis backplane plugs are designed with make before break splitter module connectors 2 MATERIALS REQUIRED Total Access 3050 xDSL Splitter Module with Test Access P N 1183002L2 WARNING To prevent electrical shock do not install equipment in a wet location or during a lightning storm 61181918L1 1B 7 59 Section 7 Detailed Level Procedures DLP 528 xDSL Splitter Module with Test Access Total Access HDX System Manual 7 60 CAUTION Electronic modules can be damaged by static electrical discharge Before handling modules wear an antistatic discharge wrist strap to prevent dam age to electronic components Place modules in antistatic packing mate rial when transporting or storing When working on modules always place them on an approved antistatic mat that is electrically grounded 61181918L1 1B Total Access HDX System Manual Detailed Level Procedures Section 7 xDSL Splitter Module with Test Access DLP 528 DLP 528 Perform the Steps Below in the Order Listed 3 PROCEDURE 1 Unscrew the thumbscrew at t
146. al packet discard Substantial buffers are also utilized to optimize data throughput The PSM PCU combination supports both local and remote management Operation Administration Maintenance and Provisioning OAM amp P tasks can be performed through the OS interface on the PCU Remote management via Total Access Element Management System EMS using SNMP is supported through the PCU Reporting and managing of QoS is also supported The PSM also exercises synchronized Performance Monitoring PM and provisioning between active and standby units 61181918L1 1B 1 17 Section 1 System Description Total Access HDX System Manual DS3 PSM 1181041L3 POWER STATUS O TT O NM O cock Lockout ONLINE e i TEST an ka EN uod Figure 1 7 DS3 Primary Switch Module The PSM incorporates these features e Provide unchannelized DS3 interface with the following standard features Supports the M13 or C bit parity DS3 formats B3ZS line code compatible Software controlled DS3 LBO and automatic receive equalization Detects and indicates DS3 alarm and loopback conditions Provides near and far end C bit mode only DS3 performance monitoring PLCP framing for legacy ATM equipment Accepts automatic system provisioning data from the PCU Provide a redundant 1 1 equipment protection with dual PSM application 1 18 61181918L1 1B Total Access HDX System Manual System Description Section 1 e
147. allation 3 MATERIALS REQUIRED e Octal ADSL Access Module P N 1181405L 1 Terminal computer with terminal emulating program or computer with Telnet capabilities 61181918L1 1B 7 119 Section 7 Detailed Level Procedures Total Access HDX System Manual DLP 761 Provisioning the Octal ADSL Access Module DLP 761 Perform the following steps in order 4 PROCEDURE Provisioning Menu Options NOTE Some of the provisioning changes can only be made when the Octal ADSL Access Module is in one of the Out of Service states 1 Logon to the Primary Controller Unit PCU For details refer to DLP 716 2 From the Total Access Main menu select Access Modules and press ENTER The Octal ADSL Access Module provides options that correspond to interaction with the Cell Switch Module and with the Customer Premise Equipment There are five sub menus available from the main menu These sub menus include Configuration Provisioning Status Alarms and Performance This document discusses the Provisioning sub menu The following options are available under the Octal ADSL Provisioning menu 1 Line Card Provisioning 2 Card Service State 3 Reset to Factory Default 4 Software Update NOTE This DLP provides the steps necessary to provision the Octal ADSL Access Module A menu tree corresponding to each available module is provided in Appendix A Menu Trees NOTE In order to return to a previous menu whil
148. ame bay 5 inch horizontal aisle spacers should be added on both sides of the bay to accommodate the high wire density of the shelves and to allow additional ventilation space for any high power applications which might be deployed in the shelves Fitting the Chassis into MTU and RT Applications For individual shelf applications the Total Access 3000 or the Total Access 3050 occupies 6 inches of rack space When the shelves are being used in the HDX System they must be used in conjunction with the Heat Baffle and Fiber Tray and fans as described above All applications should be implemented where there is adequate heat dissipation and available power 4 ELECTRICAL CONSIDERATIONS The Total Access 3000 chassis and the Total Access 3050 chassis supports either single feed or dual feed 48 VDC power inputs The use of single or dual feeds should be specified by the Site Engineer and power wiring should be run accordingly Power Wiring and Fusing Return connections of 48 VDC and 48 VDC should be provided from the fuse panel using insulated 10 AWG wire for 20 amp fuses 12 AWG wire should be used for 10 or 15 amp fuses A separate wire should be run from the fuse panel for each 48 VDC input and for each 48 VDC return Power wire with red insulation is recommended for the 48 VDC feeds and power wire with black insulation is recommended for the 48 VDC return feeds For the HDX System Fan Assemblies require separate 48 VDC and 48 VDC retu
149. anufacturer for exact alarm markings Connect Management Ports The Total Access 3000 chassis integrates onto the backplane several different management ports to allow for remote management of the shelf The management interfaces terminate on the Primary Controller Unit PCU discussed in detail in Section 1 System Description With a PCU installed in the system NMA over TL1 on an X 25 network SNMP over Ethernet TL1 over Ethernet or Telnet may be used to manage the system from a remote location Also up to 32 other systems can be linked together on the RS 485 bus for management using menus and TL1 from a single management interface 23 If applicable connect the RS 485 bus between each Total Access system Up to 32 Total Access systems can be linked together for management from a single system designated as host The other systems will be configured as clients This feature allows conservation of valuable external management ports within the CO and provides local or remote management for up to 32 total Access systems from the craft interface on front of the host PCU or from the remote management port connections described in this section The alarm status of each shelf in the daisy chain can be seen from the auxiliary system access menu on the host PCU For details refer to DLP 732 61181918L1 1B 7 17 Section 7 Detailed Level Procedures Total Access HDX System Manual DLP 520 HDX System Installation 24 25 NOTE Th
150. ary Controller unit PCU for use with the management system NOTE The Target ID TID will be issued by the NMA TIRKS system adminis trator and should be provided to the installer as part of the Total Access 3000 installation package If not see the CO system administrator for Tar get ID TID assignments For COs not using NMA TIRKS values must still be entered into the Target ID TID locations if the shelf is to be used as a host or INE client shelf on the RS 485 bus 2 PREREQUISITE PROCEDURES The following procedures must be completed prior to setting NMA TIRKS parameters in the PCU If necessary refer to the appropriate documentation before proceeding The prerequisite procedures include the following e DLP 715 Connecting the Craft Port to a Terminal or PC DLP 716 Logging on to the System 61181918L1 1B 7 139 Section 7 Detailed Level Procedures Total Access HDX System Manual DLP 787 Setting NMA TIRKS Parameters in the PCU DLP 787 Perform the following steps in order 3 PROCEDURE Configure the PCU as a Host To configure the PCU as the host perform the following steps 1 From the Total Access Main menu select System Controller and press ENTER From the System Controller menu select Provisioning and press ENTER From the Provisioning menu select General and press ENTER 2 3 4 From the General menu select Management Ports and press ENTER 5 From the Management Ports menu select
151. at Baffle and Cable Tray does not affect cable routing in this unit Figure 2 8 Heat Baffle with Cables Routed Out the Side 2 22 61181918L1 1B Engineering Guidelines Section 2 Total Access HDX System Manual 5 Y 9 Heat Baffle with Cables Routed Out the Back Figure 2 2 23 61181918L1 1B Section 2 Engineering Guidelines Total Access HDX System Manual 6 TEST ACCESS SUPPORT The HDX System supports a comprehensive array of test capabilities including metallic test access Use of metallic test access requires splitter shelf modules with support for metallic test access Metallic Test Access Interface Metallic test access is provided through six wire wrap pins labeled P29 Splitter Test Access Bus and located on the back panel of the Total Access 3050 see Figure 2 10 r SPLITTER TEST ACCESS BUS EE ed dide H n o dH o d I O O I Ou uoi ES a aaa e P29 l Figure 2 10 Wire wrap Pins for Metallic Test Access One bus will be the equipment EQP
152. ata Set Ready 19 N A 7 Signal Ground 20 Data Terminal Ready 8 Carrier Detect 21 N A 9 N A 22 Ring Indicate 10 N A 23 N A 11 N A 24 N A 12 N A 25 N A 13 N A 61181918L1 1B 7 93 Section 7 Detailed Level Procedures Total Access HDX System Manual DLP 713 Connecting a Shelf to an External Modem 5 Route the data cable to the modem 6 Connect the other end of the cable to the modem configured as described above 7 Connect the modem to POTS line as required by the manufacturer NOTE To complete the connection to the HDX System the HDX System must now be called from a PC configured as a VT100 terminal with communi cation software set for 9600 8 N 1 and no flow control 5 FOLLOW UP PROCEDURES Once this procedure is complete return to the procedure which called out this DLP and continue with the tasks indicated there 7 94 61181918L1 1B DLP 715 Connecting the Craft Port to a Terminal or PC 1 INTRODUCTION HDX System management and provisioning is facilitated by a series of intuitive menus that are accessible on a computer screen Connecting either a VT100 terminal or a PC emulating a VT100 terminal to the craft interface on the PCU front panel allows access to the menus and management features of the HDX System This procedure specifies how to connect the VT100 terminal or PC to the Total Access PCU The front craft access port for the HDX System is located on the front panel of the Primary
153. ate is set to In Service 11 Repeat steps 1 10 until all necessary lines have been provisioned and proceed to the next step 12 From the ADSL Provisioning menu select Card Service State and press ENTER The following states are avallable 1 In Service 2 Out of Service Maintenance 3 Out of Service Unassigned Use the Out of Service Maintenance service state while provisioning the service for the module This will prevent alarms from being sent to the PCU 13 Once all provisioning is completed place the module In Service This will allow the card to report alarms to the PCU 7 122 61181918L1 1B Total Access HDX System Manual Detailed Level Procedures Section 7 Provisioning the Octal ADSL Access Module DLP 761 5 FOLLOW UP PROCEDURE Once this procedure is complete return to the procedure which called out this DLP and continue with the tasks indicated there 61181918L1 1B 7 123 Section 7 Detailed Level Procedures Total Access HDX System Manual DLP 761 Provisioning the Octal ADSL Access Module This page is intentionally blank 7 124 61181918L1 1B DLP 784 Auto Upgrade for System Firmware Upgrade 1 INTRODUCTION When the Auto Upgrade system is enabled either manually or automatically the HDX will compare the current product revision and firmware revision information against what has been specified in a retrieved Auto Upgrade Config File Modules that are not currently running the firmware revision
154. ation or during a lightning storm CAUTION Electronic modules can be damaged by static electrical discharge Before handling modules wear an antistatic discharge wrist strap to prevent dam age to electronic components Place modules in antistatic packing mate rial when transporting or storing When working on modules always place them on an approved antistatic mat that is electrically grounded 61181918L1 1B Total Access HDX System Manual Detailed Level Procedures Section 7 Connecting a Shelf to an External Modem DLP 713 DLP 713 Perform the following steps in order 4 PROCEDURE 1 Mount the modem to be used with the HDX System in its permanent position 2 Connect power to the modem per manufacturer s instructions 3 Configure the modem to be used as follows Speed 9600 bps Data bits 8 Parity none Stop bits 1 Flow control off or none Auto answer on DTR ignore RTS ignore 4 Connect the male DB 25 connector end of the data cable to the female DB 25 connector J31 J18 labeled ADMIN located on the upper right corner of the Total Access 3000 primary shelf backplane screw down the cable See Table 7 4 for the DB 25 pinout Table 7 4 ADMIN Connector Pinout J31 J18 Pin Use PIN Use 1 Frame Ground 14 N A 2 Transmit Data 15 Transmit Clock 3 Receive Data 16 N A 4 Request to Send 17 Receive Clock 5 Clear to Send 18 N A 6 D
155. ation procedures include the removal of the product from its packaging inspecting for damage and seating the unit in the shelf Accep tance testing is provided in DLP 854 Central Office Installation Acceptance Test Procedure 2 DESCRIPTION The Total Access 3000 Octal ADSL Access Module is an eight port high density Central Office trans ceiver unit that provides data rates up to 8 Mbps per port A single module supports eight separate inter faces over eight one pair copper loops 3 PREREQUISITE PROCEDURES The following procedures must be completed prior to installing the Octal ADSL Access Module If necessary refer to the appropriate documentation before proceeding NTP 020 HDX System Installation e NTP 024 HDX System Modules Installation 4 MATERIALS REQUIRED Total Access 3000 Octal ADSL Access Module 61181918L1 1B 7 63 Section 7 Detailed Level Procedures DL P 561 Octal ADSL Access Module Installation Total Access HDX System Manual 7 64 WARNING To prevent electrical shock do not install equipment in a wet location or during a lightning storm CAUTION Electronic modules can be damaged by static electrical discharge Before handling modules wear an antistatic discharge wrist strap to prevent dam age to electronic components Place modules in antistatic packing mate rial when transporting or storing When working on modules always place them on an approved antistatic mat that is electrically
156. ay to the PCU The Telnet feature of HDX supports standard Telnet client software In a Telnet session the same VT100 menu is displayed as would be seen on the craft interface The PCU provides support for up to four SNMP trap hosts Access security is provided via standard community name strings The PCU also provides a TL1 machine interface that can be accessed using a configurable TCP IP port number see Figure 2 2 2 14 61181918L1 1B Total Access HDX System Manual Engineering Guidelines Section 2 SNMP over 10Base T One IP Address PCU Gateway p ELLE LL HD O MAMA KANAN ANAN O Connected to RJ45 socket __4 on backplane of host shelf 10Base T Router Network Administrator Provides 1 IP Address to Host PCU 2 subnet mask 3 default gateway Central Office NMA SNMP Host SNMP SNMP Host Host TL1 Up to four SNMP Trap Hosts are supported Figure 2 2 SNMP Telnet and TL1 over 10Base T 61181918L1 1B Section 2 Engineering Guidelines Total Access HDX System Manual SNMP and Telnet over In band Management The HDX System PCU provides Telnet and SNMP interfaces through a virtual connection created in the Primary Switch Module The use of SNMP or Telnet requires the installation of both a PCU and a PSM The In band Management Channel is provided as a default PVC that may be modified to work in the exist ing n
157. ble 6 Telnet Dead Client Detection 2 Disable 1 DNS Lookup System oe Disable 2 Primary DNS Server 3 Secondary DNS Server 4 Domain Search List 1 Firmware TFTP server 2 SCA TFTP server 1 Trap Host 1 IP 2 Trap Host 2 IP 3 Trap Host 3 IP 4 Trap Host 4 IP 5 PCU Traps 1 Enable 6 System Name 2 Disable 7 System Location 8 System Contact 9 Read Community 10 Write Community 11 NonVol CardStat 1 Enable 2 Disable saaJ nusy y xipueddy seoipueddy enuey wa sAs x aH 81 L18L6L8LL19 LN penunguoo 291 nuey 118161811 N d nod HUN 4911043005 Keuig Z Y enBi4 4 SNMP 5 TL1 6 System Administration Trap Host 1 IP Trap Host 2 IP Trap Host 3 IP Trap Host 4 IP PCU Traps System Name System Location System Contact ojo fo fa as on Read Community 10 Write Community 11 NonVol CardStat Unit Number 1 1 Client Shelf Management 2 Target ID TID 3 TL1 Telnet Port 2000 4 TL1 Raw TCP Port 2001 5 Exchange TL1 Ports 6 Legacy AID Compatibilit 1 Software Update 2 Security Administration 1 Enable 2 Disable 1 Enable 2 Disable 1 Intelligent NE 2 Expansion Shelf 1 Disable 2 Enable 1 YMODEM Update 2 TFTP Update 3 Reboot Controller Unit 1 Firmware TFTP Server 2 Remote Filename 3 Initiate Transfer 1 Users Currently Logged On 2 Edit User Accounts 1
158. blem is found correct the problem before proceeding For details refer to DLP 791 2 Verify the timing connections If timing connections have been made to the Total Access 3000 chassis perform the steps indicated below a Check for the timing source port alarm Visually check the output module on the timing source to ensure that no alarm condition is associated with the output port connected to the Total Access shelves b Check waveform with oscilloscope This test step is optional but is recommended in cases where the clock wire run is long or is routed past possible sources of interference Verify that the input clock waveform meets requirements 3 Verify fan operation If the Fan Assembly has been installed with the system perform the steps indicated below a Visually verify fan operation Visually verify that all of the fans are operating and that no obstructions are present to impede free air flow through the shelves b Verify the Fan Assembly alarm input to PCU Use the procedure outlined in DLP 792 to verify that the Fan Assembly generates the proper alarm when it fails For details refer to DLP 792 4 Verify Alarm Relay output connections If a shelf s alarm relays have been wired to external alarming equipment use the procedure in DLP 793 to verify that the alarm relay outputs are properly wired and functioning For details refer to DLP 793 5 Verify external modem connection If an external modem
159. cal discharge Before handling modules wear an antistatic discharge wrist strap to prevent dam age to electronic components Place modules in antistatic packing mate rial when transporting or storing When working on modules always place them on an approved antistatic mat that 1s electrically grounded 61181918L1 1B 7 71 Section 7 Detailed Level Procedures Total Access HDX System Manual DLP 703 Connecting a Primary and Secondary T1 Clock DLP 703 Perform the following steps in order 4 PROCEDURE 1 Locate the clock wiring To connect a TI clock input to Total Access 3000 chassis determine the and drain or shield wires from the CO clock source 2 Strip the ends of the clock wire for wire wrapping Using wire strippers strip 1 to 1 1 2 inches of the insulation from the end of the clock source drop wire 3 Connect the lead Using the wire wrap tool wire wrap the wire from the clock source to the pin marked on connector P18 EXTCLK B IN 4 Connect the lead ee 99 Wire wrap the wire from the clock source to the pin marked on connector P18 EXTCLK B IN 5 Terminate the shield drain wire Trim the shield wire flush with the insulation Do not wire wrap to the S pin 6 Dress out the wiring Route the clock wire out of the right side of the frame and neatly tie it down 7 If required connect the secondary T1 clock To Connect a secon
160. ccess 3000 backplane and can accommodate up to 6 AWG wire The two power inputs TS1 and TS2 are identical in function and can be used for redundant power configurations The frame ground terminal routes to mechanical contact points on the chassis and provides an electrical connection to the chassis metalwork 3 Connect the Total Access 3000 chassis to frame ground The frame ground lug located on the lower left corner of the Total Access 3000 backplane can accom modate from 6 to 10 AWG wire When connecting the frame ground use 6 AWG wire a Using an appropriate crimping tool and lug fasten the lug to the ground wire b Locate a nearby grounding screw on the equipment rack c Secure the ground wire to frame ground using the lugged end of the grounding wire d Cut the ground wire length to reach from the grounding lug on the rack to the Total Access 3000 grounding terminal located on the lower left corner of the backplane Leave enough slack to allow for tying to the rack if required e Using wire strippers strip 5 8 inches of insulation from the grounding wire Apply an approved antioxidant compound to the exposed wire f Insert stripped end of the ground wire into the copper Total Access 3000 grounding terminal g Tighten the ground connection securely with a straight slot screwdriver 4 Connect the Total Access 3050 to frame ground The frame ground located above the Total Access 3050 backplane on the right side of the up
161. cedure that called out this DLP and continue with the tasks indicated there 7 216 61181918L1 1B DLP 801 Connecting the Total Access 3000 and Total Access 3050 1 INTRODUCTION This procedure provides instructions for installation of the Total Access 3050 to Total Access 3000 Cable Assembly P N 1181926L1 This cable assembly connects the 64 pin amphenol connectors on the backplane of the Total Access 3000 to those on the Total Access 3050 see Figure 7 37 Figure 7 37 Total Access 3050 to Total Access 3000 Connection The cable group is comprised of eight separately sheathed cables of lengths varying from 24 in to 64 in Each cable has a 64 pin amphenol connector on each end White plastic tape labels near the ends of each cable identify both the shelf TA3000 or TA3050 and pair designation Pair 1 Pair 8 After insertion into the appropriate connector two hold down screws are used to secure the amphenol connection to the Total Access 3050 chassis One screw and a tie wrap secures the connector to the Total Access 3000 chassis These screws are included with the cable assembly and the wire t
162. cess HDX System Manual Detailed Level Procedures Section 7 Logging on to the System DLP 716 The READWRITE access level allows the user to test the system and read and write the current configuration of the system but it does not allow the user to change network configuration or management interface settings The TEST access level allows the user to test the system and read the current configuration of the system The lowest level of access is READONLY and allows a user to see but not change the current configuration of the system 4 Upon entering the correct password the Total Access Main menu is presented on the screen see Figure 7 6 Shelf Total Access System 07 09 03 18 27 Unacknowledged Alarms Total Access System Controller Common A PSM Common B 44s Access Modules System Alarms Auxiliary Shelf Access Logoff IT O 4a WN FP Selection Figure 7 6 Total Access Main menu A logon to the HDX System has now been performed successfully Security Challenge Key The Craft Telnet Login screen provides a Challenge Key Response support feature that allows customers to recover from lost or destroyed ADMIN account passwords For further information see DLP 716 Logging on via the Security Challenge Key 5 FOLLOW UP PROCEDURES Once this procedure is complete return to the procedure which called out this DLP and continue with the tasks indicated there 61181918L1 1B 7 101 S
163. chassis to frame ground DLP 520 Step 3 Connect the Total Access 3050 to frame ground DLP 520 Step 4 CA Tighten the ground connection securely with a straight slot screwdriver Connect Fan Assembly to frame ground DLP 520 Step 5 6 Test the frame ground connection DLP 520 Step 6 7 Connect power and return to the Total Access 3000 chassis DLP 520 Step 7 8 Connect power and return to each Total Access 3050 chassis DLP 520 Step 8 9 Connect power to the Fan Assembly DLP 520 Step 9 10 Apply power and check voltage and then remove power DLP 520 Step 10 11 Remove the rear plastic guard DLP 701 12 Connect the T1 clock DLP 703 13 Connect Metallic Test Access Bus to Total Access 3050 DLP 785 14 Connect the Total Access 3000 to the Total Access 3050 DLP 801 15 Replace the rear guard DLP 701 16 Connect the Total Access 3050 to the PSTN DLP 520 Step 16 17 Connect the Total Access 3050 to the MDF DLP 786 18 Install the high speed connector module DLP 708 19 Connect the high speed cabling DLP 709 20 Connect the alarm outputs DLP 710 21 Connect the fan alarm input DLP 711 22 Connect an external alarm input to the shelf DLP 520 Step 22 6 6 61181918L1 1B Total Access HDX System Manual Section 6 Non Trouble Clearing Procedures HDX System Installation NTP 020 Step For details refer to
164. ck to connect the wire wrap pin labeled R for Pair 1 to frame ground Check for red Pair 1 LED Visually verify that the LED on the TAG module labeled Pair 1 is lit red No other LED on the TAG module should light If the LED lights up green this indicates that the Tip and Ring wires are reversed No LED lit indicates no continuity on Ring Connect Tip of Pair 2 on the MDF to ground Move the test jack from the Pair position to the Pair 2 position for the same slot Connect Tip of Pair 2 to frame ground 61181918L1 1B 7 151 eSi L al 1 181618119 Table 7 8 Total Access 3050 Splitter Shelf Amphenol Connector Pinouts Total Access 3050 Splitter Shelf POTS or LINE 50 Pin Amphenol Connectors Pinouts 50 Pin Amphenol Connector Port TR LINE or POTS 1 24 25 48 49 72 73 96 97 120 121 144 145 168 169 192 193 216 217 224 1 26 1 2 27 2 3 28 3 4 29 4 Slot 1 Slot4 Slot 7 Slot 10 Slot 13 Slot 16 Slot 19 Slot 22 Slot 25 Slot 28 5 30 5 1 6 31 6 2 3 7 32 7 4 8 33 8 5 6 1 34 9 7 2 35 10 3 9 3 36 11 10 4 37 2 1 Slot 2 Slot 5 Slot 8 Slot 11 Slot 14 Slot 17 Slot 20 Slot 23 Slot 26 See Note 1 5 38 13 13 14 6 39 14 15 7 40 15 19 17 8 41 16 18 1 42 17 13 20 2 43 18 21 22 3 44 19 23 4 45 20 24 Slot 3 Slot 6 Slot 9 Slot 12 Slot 15 Slot 18 Slot 21 Slot 24 Slot 27 Not Used 25 5 46 21 6 47
165. connection has been made place a call from a remote modem into the Total Access 3000 modem to verify that the modem is properly connected and functioning Once the call is connected logon to the system and verify that the menus are properly displayed When menu verifi cation is complete logout of the shelf and disconnect the call 7 222 61181918L1 1B Total Access HDX System Manual Detailed Level Procedures Section 7 Central Office Installation Acceptance Test Procedure DLP 854 6 Verify IP LAN connection If the shelf is connected via the 10Base T port to a network use the procedure in DLP 795 to verify that the network connection is properly configured and working For details refer to DLP 795 5 FOLLOW UP PROCEDURES Once this procedure is complete the Total Access 3000 shelves should be ready for installation of multi plexer modules and access modules If a multiplexer module is to be installed in any of the shelves find the Installation and Turnup Procedure NTP for that module and proceed with the installation Once any multiplexer modules have been installed and tested use the installation instructions for the access modules to install them as required 61181918L1 1B 7 223 Section 7 Detailed Level Procedures Total Access HDX System Manual DLP 854 Central Office Installation Acceptance Test Procedure Acceptance Test Checklist for DLP 854 Table 7 2 HDX System Acceptance Checklist Test Step Completed Ini
166. containers mounting shelves in a CO rack power up all necessary data and administrative connections and turnup Acceptance testing is provided in DLP 854 Central Office Installation Acceptance Test Procedure NOTE References to common but differing parameters between the Total Access 3000 and the Total Access 3010 such as number of slots will be conveyed by the convention a b The a represents the Total Access 3000 parameter and the b represents the Total Access 3010 parameter For example the differing number of access slots in the two platforms 28 for the Total Access 3000 and 22 for the Total Access 3010 would be dis played 28 22 2 PREREQUISITE PROCEDURES Before beginning the installation described in this NTP the installer should thoroughly review PREP 405 Preparing for Chassis Installation Based on PREP 405 the installer will know which steps of this NTP will be required for the intended use of the Total Access 3000 shelf To comply with UL1950 requirements the following steps must be adhered to Connect to a reliably grounded 48 VDC source which is electrically isolated from the AC source A readily accessible disconnect device that is suitably approved and rated shall be incorporated in the fixed wiring The branch circuit overcurrent protection shall be a fuse or circuit breaker rated 48 VDC minimum 30 Amps maximum This product is intended for installation in Restricted Access Locati
167. contains three 48 VDC active external alarm inputs and the primary shelf contains ACO The external alarm inputs are connected on each outlet labeled ACO IMT AUX1 and AUX 2 respectively and described as follows ACO Used to remotely activate the ACO feature primary shelf only Remote Alarm input For TL1 this input is adjustable in both description and severity AUXI and AUX2 Same functionality as Remote The external alarm inputs for each shelf are user definable 1 8 61181918L1 1B Total Access HDX System Manual System Description Section 1 3 SYSTEM COMPONENTS The HDX System is composed of the following main elements e Total Access 3000 and Total Access 3050 Chassis e Controller Units e Cell Switch Modules e Access Modules e Miscellaneous Equipment The system components supported by the HDX System are listed in Table 1 1 Refer to individual Practices and Job Aids for detailed information on installation testing operation maintenance and troubleshooting Table 1 1 HDX System Components Part System Component Description Job Aid Practice Number Chassis 1181001L1 Total Access 3000 Chassis 61181001L1 22 61181001L1 5 1183001L1 Total Access 3050 Chassis 61183001L1 22 61183001L1 5 Controller Units 1181918L1 Primary Controller Unit 61181918L1 22 61181918L1 5 1181918L1 S N A 61181918L1 S 5 1181919L1 Expansion Controller Unit 61181919L 1 22 N A 1183010
168. crews appropriate to the CO rack to secure the Heat Baffle into place immedi ately above the Total Access 3000 shelf it is intended to serve 7 32 61181918L1 1B Total Access HDX System Manual Section 7 Detailed Level Procedures Mid mounting the Shelves Heat Baffles and Fans DLP 522 Install Fans The Fan Assembly is designed to mount on the rear of the Heat Baffle and Fiber Tray Together they provide forced air ventilation for the Total Access 3000 shelf The fan is designed to mount directly above a Total Access 3000 shelf Since the unit is an integral component of the HDX System the assembly allows provisions to facilitate fiber optic cable routing in the front tray The Fan Assembly accommodates two power inputs each input consisting of a 48 VDC feed and a battery return feed The power inputs are on 0 375 inch centers A frame ground terminal is also provided on the rear of the assembly The unit operates with either or both inputs active In the event of a fan failure the unit provides for an alarm indication by closing a relay contact The unit is designed to tolerate one fan failure and still provide adequate cooling Six flat head screws are provided with the Fan Assembly Use the screws and a 1 phillips screwdriver to attach the Fan Assembly to the back of the Heat Baffle and Fiber Tray Cable ties are provided for strain relief and wiring management of incoming power return frame ground and alarming to the Primary Con
169. cters All user input for passwords will be displayed as asterisks for confidentiality The Password is case sensitive by default This and other options may be cho sen in the Security Options section of the Security Administration screen j From the Password menu confirm the new password see Figure 7 16 TID HDX Unacknowledged Alarms PCU System 08 02 04 13 31 CRITICAL MAJOR INFO Unit Number 1 Account Name TESTING New Password Ckckckckck kck kk Confirm Password System Help Screen 7 180 Figure 7 16 Password Menu 61181918L1 1B Total Access HDX System Manual Detailed Level Procedures Section 7 Setting System Security Settings in the PCU DLP 797 k Select Account Properties Access Privilege and press ENTER see Figure 7 17 TID HDX Unacknowledged Alarms PCU System CRITICAL MAJOR INFO Account Properties Access Privileges TESTING 1 Access Rights READ 2 Enable Disable User Account DISABLED Selection System Help Screen 08 02 04 13 31 Unit Number 1 DISABLED Figure 7 17 Account Properties Access Privileges Menu 61181918L1 1B 7 181 Section 7 Detailed Level Procedures Total Access HDX System Manual DLP 797 Setting System Security Settings in the PCU l From the Account Properties Access Privilege menu select Access Rights and press ENTER m Choose the access privileges for the account and press ENTER s
170. d antistatic mat that is electrically grounded NOTE At this point in the Installation and Turn up Procedure power should not be applied a Pull the ejector on the bottom of the ECU front panel from its stowed or closed position The Total Access 3000 ECU can only be inserted into the first or far left slot of the shelf Attempting to insert the ECU in any other slot may damage the ECU and or the backplane b Gently but firmly push the ECU into the first slot on the left of the shelf The first slot is labeled for the SCU Simultaneous thumb pressure at the top and bottom of the ECU will ensure a good seat of the ECU pins into the backplane connector c Push the ejector up and closed against the ECU front panel 61181918L1 1B 7 21 Section 7 Detailed Level Procedures Total Access HDX System Manual DLP 520 HDX System Installation 6 FOLLOW UP PROCEDURES Once this procedure is complete return to the procedure which referred to this DLP and continue with the tasks indicated 7 22 61181918L1 1B DLP 521 Flush mounting the Shelves Heat Baffles and Fans 1 INTRODUCTION The Total Access 3000 chassis and Total Access 3050 chassis come with mounting brackets that can be mounted with the flanges facing forward or backward in two different locations on the shelf sides Therefore the rack can be flush mounted or mid mounted This DLP covers the flush mount orientation Refer to DLP 522 for mid mounting orientation insta
171. d of the shelf Simultaneous thumb pressure at the top above the POWER LED and bottom below the TEST ENABLE button of the unit will ensure a good seat of the DS3 pins into the backplane connector Push the ejector tab up and closed against the DS3 front panel f Allow the PSM module to perform a self test The POWER STATUS ATM CLOCK LOCKOUT and ONLINE LEDs should turn green and the TEST LED should be orange All LEDs then go off The top five LEDs begin to cycle through a running pattern until the board has completed the self test process Allow at least 3 minutes for the self test to complete Upon completion of the self test the LEDs will reflect the true state of the hardware A stable configuration will prompt the POWER and STATUS LEDs to be green and the TEST ATM CLOCK LOCKOUT and ONLINE LEDs to be off g Route the CAT 5e cable to the downstream ESM position on HDX System shelf 2 and use the ESM installation procedure to connect and secure it The PSM to ESM connections must be made between units in the same common slot position PSMs or ESMs in common Slot A must connect to ESMs in Slot A and Slot B connects to Slot B h Continue with the next section of this document 7 44 61181918L1 1B Total Access HDX System Manual Detailed Level Procedures Section 7 DS3 Primary Switch Module Installation DLP 524 Place the Units in Service 1 Provision the PSM For details refer to DLP 800 NOTE Ensure all ala
172. d on the login screen Security Advisory Warning Alphanumeric Enter a message to be displayed of up to 2 lines each String consisting of up to 70 alphanumeric characters Enable Multiple Login Accounts Yes No Enabling this option will allow multiple and simulta neous logins with the same account 7 208 61181918L1 1B DLP 799 Provisioning an In band Management PVC Connection 1 INTRODUCTION This section provides step by step instructions for the provisioning of a Total Access 3000 In band Management PVC The DS3 Primary Switch Module PSM comes equipped with a Management PVC so only modification of this existing PVC is required In the case where 1 1 protection is used for the PSM instructions are included for modifying the PVC of both the primary and secondary modules 2 PREREQUISITE PROCEDURES The following procedures must be completed prior to provisioning the In band Management PVC If necessary refer to the appropriate documentation before proceeding The prerequisite procedures include the following DLP 520 HDX System Installation DLP 524 DS3 Primary Switch Module Installation 61181918L1 1B 7 209 Section 7 Detailed Level Procedures Total Access HDX System Manual DLP 799 Provisioning an In band Management PVC Connection DLP 799 Perform the following steps in order 3 PROCEDURE NOTE This DLP provides the steps necessary to setup a Management PVC in a PSM for inband manag
173. d up to a maximum length of 250 feet All connections to the Total Access 3000 64 pin amphenol connectors shall meet the following minimum characteristics Solid copper tinned wire e Shielded cable with drain wire Drain wire should be connected to pin 64 unless this arrangement is preempted by customer specification Color coding to conform to industry standard blue white through slate violet coding for pairs 1 through 25 with separate binder groups for pairs 1 25 and 26 through 28 or 32 24 AWG or 22 AWG 24 AWG preferred 28 or 32 pair 28 pair preferred 100 ohm nominal characteristic impedance 15 Mutual capacitance of 15 72 pF ft nominal 17 3 pF ft absolute maximum Attenuation for DS1 signal 0 772 MHz 1 544 Mb s nominally 12 3 dB 1000 ft Worst pair PSNEXT 53 dB 150 kHz 42 dB 772 kHz 38 dB 1600 kHz or better for test cable length of 1000 feet Cables conform to the following GR 499 DSX 1 Pulse Wave Shape Compliance at 500 feet TIA EIA 464B DSX 1 Pulse Wave Shape Compliance at 500 feet UL c UL Type CMR CMG Jacket and insulation material to conform to existing industry standards and to any applicable customer specifications e 2 18 61181918L1 1B Total Access HDX System Manual Engineering Guidelines Section 2 MDF Copper pair network interfaces are delivered through amphenol connectors on the backplane of the Total Access 3050 chassis The backplane incorporates ten 50 pin amp
174. dary T1 clock to the Total Access 3000 chassis repeat Steps 2 6 using connector P24 EXTCLK C IN instead of connector P18 EXTCLK B IN NOTE Diagrams for connecting primary and secondary T1 clock sources for the Total Access 3000 shelf are shown in Figure 7 2 7 72 61181918L1 1B Total Access HDX System Manual Detailed Level Procedures Section 7 Connecting a Primary and Secondary T1 Clock DLP 703 SECONDARY T1 CLOCK SOURCE P24 T R S EXTCLK CAN N I 1 an i I NI s E El EN B Tc x E TOTAL ACCESS E CHASSIS S R PRIMARY T1 CLOCK SOURCE T ep nnn O B OUT A OUT B IN Figure 7 2 Total Access 3000 Chassis Clock Connections 5 FOLLOW UP PROCEDURES Once this procedure is complete return to the procedure which called out this DLP and continue with the tasks indicated there 61181918L1 1B 7 73 Section 7 Detailed Level Procedures Total Access HDX System Manual DLP 703 Connecting a Primary and Secondary T1 Clock This page is intentionally blank 7 14 61181918L1 1B DLP 708 Installing the High Speed Connector Module 1 I
175. dily accessible disconnect device that is suitably approved and rated shall be incorporated in the fixed wiring The branch circuit overcurrent protection shall be a fuse or circuit breaker rated 48 VDC minimum 30 amps maximum This product is intended for installation in Restricted Access Locations Only This unit shall be installed in accordance with the requirements of NEC NFPA 70 Instructions stating the proper methods for grounding shall be included within the guidelines of the installation practice 3 TOOLS REQUIRED The tools required for installation of the Total Access 3000 chassis and Total Access 3050 chassis are as follows Wire wrap tool 2 phillips head screwdriver 1 phillips head screwdriver e Straight slot screwdriver Multimeter 61181918L1 1B 7 5 Section 7 Detailed Level Procedures DLP 520 HDX System Installation Total Access HDX System Manual Crimping tool for power lugs Wire strippers Side cutters 3 16 inch wrench 4 MATERIALS REQUIRED 48 VDC up to 20 amp power source for the Total Access 3000 such as a rack mounted fuse and alarm panel or power board see Table 7 1 Table 7 1 Recommended Wire Gauge and Fuse Sizes Current Draw at 48 VDC Recommended Wire Gauge Recommended Fuse Size 2 6 to 5 8 Amps 14 AWG 10 Amps 5 8 to 10 Amps 12 AWG 15 Amps 10 to 15 Amps 10 AWG 20 Amp Frame Ground Wire Fuse Size Used for Power Input
176. dware View Change View View View View Change Handshaking Terminate Session Upon View Change View View View View Change Carrier Loss De assert Drop DTR on View Change View View View View Change Logout System Controller Provisioning MUX Module Write Module Provisioning View Change View Change N A View Change View Change MUX Auto Provisioning View Change View View View View Change Module Auto Provisioning View Change View View View View Change 61181918L1 1B 7 201 Section 7 Detailed Level Procedures DLP 797 Setting System Security Settings in the PCU Total Access HDX System Manual Table 8 PCU User Account Privileges Continued Menu Items ADMIN READWRITE READONLY TEST CONFIG System Controller Provisioning Network Management IP Network Provisioning Submenu Submenu Submenu Submenu Submenu Get Net Prov from MUX View Change View View View View Change System Controller Provisioning Network Management Ethernet Interface Interface View Change View View View View Change IP Address View Change View View View View Change Subnet Mask View Change View View View View Change Gateway View Change View View View View Change ENET LED Mode View Change View View View View Change Ethernet Link View View View View View MAC Address View View View View View System Controller Provisioning Network Management Inband Interface Interface View Change View View View View Change IP Address View Change View Vi
177. e mounting bracket flanges facing forward NOTE Other orientations will require either mounting from the front or rear and depend on the rack type installed in the CO or MTU and the standard operating procedures established by the CO or MTU location 3 Using four screws appropriate for the CO or MTU rack or RT cabinet and an appropriate screwdriver secure the Total Access chassis in place on the rack Install Heat Baffles The Total Access Heat Baffle functions as both a heat baffle and cable routing tray As a heat baffle it channels heated air to the back and away from equipment operating above a Total Access 3000 DSLAM system As a cable routing tray it provides channels and guides to properly route fiber optic cables delivered to multiplexer and access slots of a system The front panel is removable for routing fiber optic cables To protect installed fiber optic cables the panel should remain installed when access is not required Fiber optic cable may be routed to the sides of the unit or to the rear of the unit The Heat Baffle and Fiber Tray has mounting brackets similar to those on the Total Access chassis and should be mounted in the same orientation as the mounting brackets for the Total Access chassis 4 Using the two screws provided and a 2 phillips head screwdriver position and attach the mounting brackets on the Total Access 3000 Heat Baffle for the mid mount configuration Use the same screw driver and four more s
178. e Password Access Privilege 2 Enable Disable User Account ENABLED 3 Delete User Selection System Help Screen Figure 7 21 Edit User Account Menu h Select Password and press ENTER see Figure 7 22 TID Unacknowledged Alarms Unit Number T Total Access System 03 31 03 13 28 Edit User Account User ID abcdABCD12345678 2 Password I0 ko ck ck ke ke kk ke ek 3 Account Properties Access Privilege TEST Selection System Help Screen 61181918L1 1B Figure 7 22 Change Password Access Privilege Menu 7 185 Section 7 Detailed Level Procedures DLP 797 Setting System Security Settings in the PCU Total Access HDX System Manual i From the Password menu enter the new password NOTE The password may be up to sixteen alphanumeric characters All user input for passwords will be displayed as asterisks for confidentiality The Password is case sensitive by default This and other options may be cho sen in the Security Options section of the Security Administration screen NOTE The allowable characters for an account password created via menus include all alphanumeric characters as well as the following characters signs and symbols exclamation point commercial at number pound dollar Yo percent caret circumflex asterisk left and right parentheses _ underscore hyphen dash equals plus vertical line
179. e RS 485 chain is not used with the HDX High Density ADSL applica tion Connect the external modem Total Access 3000 can be accessed and managed via modem allowing the same capabilities to a user as if he were connected to the local craft access port on the front of the PCU Access is provided by a DB 25 connector J31 J18 and labeled ADMIN located on the upper right corner of the backplane If several shelves are wired together the modem should be attached to the shelf containing the Host PCU When the Total Access 3000 system is called the user can access not only the particular shelf to which it is connected but also any shelf daisy chained to it via the RS 485 bus For details refer to DLP 713 Connect the Ethernet Total Access 3000 can provide SNMP management capability over Ethernet The PCU has a built in Ethernet interface and once configured may connect to the network Access to the network is via an RJ 45 10Base T connector J32 J28 labeled E NET located on the lower right side of the backplane under the Pair 8 Pair 7 connector To connect the Total Access 3000 chassis to the Ethernet LAN simply plug the male RJ 45 modular connector into the female RJ 45 port on the Total Access 3000 backplane When planning a cable run to the Total Access 3000 chassis be sure to allow enough cable for routing the cable to the right from the backplane connector to the frame and for tie off in accordance with CO SOP For detai
180. e SCA Operations menu select Perform TFTP SCA Restore and press ENTER A status screen will provide information about the SCA restore including the state of the transfer When the transfer is complete the status screen will display the following SCA Restore Status Complete with exceptions Any exceptions will be listed below the SCA Restore Status field Multiple pages are viewed by selecting the following keys P for Previous N for Next F for First L for Last 4 Verify that the restore was successful Verification of SCA restore may be accomplished by verifying that the SCA Restore Status shows complete and no unexpected exceptions appear in the exceptions list 5 Return to the main Total Access Main menu by pressing Esc 4 FOLLOW UP PROCEDURES Once this procedure is complete return to the procedure which called out this DLP and continue with the tasks indicated there 7 118 61181918L1 1B DLP 761 Provisioning the Octal ADSL Access Module 1 INTRODUCTION This procedure provides step by step instructions for the provisioning of the Octal ADSL Access Module when installed in the HDX System 2 PREREQUISITE PROCEDURES The following procedures must be completed prior to installing the Octal ADSL Access Module If necessary refer to the appropriate documentation before proceeding The prerequisite procedures include the following NTP 020 HDX System Installation DLP 561 Octal ADSL Access Module Inst
181. e System Controller menu select Provisioning and press ENTER From the Provisioning menu select System Administration and press ENTER From the System Administration menu select Security Administration and press ENTER From the Security Administration menu select Users Currently Logged On and press ENTER see Figure 7 32 TID Total Access System 04 04 03 12 04 Unacknowledged Alarms Unit Number 1 Users Currently Logged On 4 Page 1 of 1 Num USER ACCESS TYPE FROM PORT LOGIN CONNECT TIME 1 ADMIN IP Menu 172 22 108 157 23 04 04 03 11 57 54 2 ADMIN IP TLI 172 22 108 157 2001 04 04 03 11 58 42 3 abcdABCD12345678 Craft Menu 0 04 04 03 12 01 13 4 TEST IP TLI 172 22 108 157 2001 04 04 03 12 02 12 Lolo gt gt gt END OF LOG ON LIST Selection to Terminate logoff N ext P revious Figure 7 32 Users Currently Logged On Menu 61181918L1 1B Total Access HDX System Manual Detailed Level Procedures Section 7 Setting System Security Settings in the PCU DLP 797 Terminate Logoff Current User Session 1 Logon to the HDX System using an Admin level user account For details refer to DLP 716 2 After logging on using an Admin user account perform the following steps a o o O e From the Security Administration menu select Users Currently Logged On and press ENTER Eh session is to be terminated or logged off see Figure 7 33 From the System C
182. e System Controller menu select Provisioning and press ENTER From the Provisioning menu select PCU System Administration and press ENTER From the PCU System Administration menu select System Configuration Archive SCA and press ENTER From the System Configuration Archive SCA menu select SCA Operations and press ENTER From the SCA Operations menu select Remote Filename and press ENTER This field provides for a 1 to 40 character filename This filename will be saved to the TFTP server when an SCA save is performed manually No extension will be added to this filename If an extension is desired put the dot and extension in the filename field From the SCA Operations menu begin the SCA save by selecting Perform TFTP SCA Save and press ENTER A status screen will provide information about the SCA save including the state of the transfer When the transfer is complete the status screen will display the following SCA Save Status Complete Verify that the save was successful Verification of SCA save can be accomplished by verifying that the SCA filename appears on the TFTP server after an automatic save is scheduled to occur 4 FOLLOW UP PROCEDURES Once this procedure is complete return to the procedure which called out this DLP and continue with the tasks indicated there 7 112 PRELIMINARY 61181918L1 1B DLP 730 Restoring the System Configuration Archive 1 INTRODUCTION The Primary Con
183. e Transfer and press ENTER The TFTP Status will show Transfer in Progress while transferring and Transfer Complete when finished The Flash Status will show Flash Write Completed when finished Once the Flash Status flashes Flash Write Completed press ESC twice to return to the Software Update menu Select Reboot Controller Unit and press ENTER Confirm Reboot by typing Y and ENTER This will not disrupt service on the Total Access 3000 The PCU will restart and the upgrade is complete The firmware version that is currently installed may be checked by viewing the Configu ration menu of the PCU 61181918L1 1B 7 175 Section 7 Detailed Level Procedures Total Access HDX System Manual DLP 796 Upgrading the PCU Software Upgrading the PCU Using the Ymodem Protocol 1 2 o NN ON tA A Q 5 Save the new firmware file onto the computer that is being used to control the upgrade Logon to the PCU For details refer to DLP 716 From the Total Access Main menu select System Controller Unit and press ENTER From the System Controller Unit menu select Provisioning and press ENTER From the Provisioning menu select System Administration and press ENTER From the System Administration menu select Software Update and press ENTER From the Software Update menu select Y modem Update and press ENTER Press Y and ENTER to initiate the download The Software Upload screen will appear and display Expecting a Y
184. e documentation before proceeding Section 4 Site Preparation NTP 020 HDX System Installation 61181918L1 1B 6 15 Section 6 Non Trouble Clearing Procedures NTP 024 HDX System Modules Installation Total Access HDX System Manual 3 MODULES REQUIRED Refer to Table 6 2 to determine the required quiddities of each module to be installed in the HDX System Table 6 2 HDX System Module Quantities HDX System Modules Chassis Quantity X Number of Total Shelves Quantity Primary Shelves Modules PCUO Total Access 3000 1 X 1 PSM Total Access 3000 lor2 O X 1 Octal ADSL Total Access 3000 28 max X 1 xDSL Splitter Module Total Access 3050 28 max X 1 MTC Total Access 3050 1 X 1 Expansion Shelf Modules ECU Total Access 3000 1 X 1 to 5 ESM Total Access 3000 lor2 X 1 to 5 Octal ADSL Total Access 3000 28 max X 1 to 5 xDSL Splitter Module Total Access 3050 28 max X 1 to 5 MTC Total Access 3050 1 1 to 5 0 Module installation is covered in NTP 020 and is not included in this NTP Two modules are required for 1 1 protection switching applications during a lightning storm WARNING To prevent electrical shock do not install equipment in a wet location or CAUTION Electronic modules can be damaged by static electrical discharge Before handling modules wear an antistatic discharge wrist strap to prevent dam age to electronic compone
185. e eee eee 7 95 3 Tools and Materials Required 0 0000 eo 7 95 4 Procedure 214 Kahin hepa bed o Made ed Maha Veg Abad te gis 7 97 Connecting to a VT100 Terminal eh 7 97 Connecting to a Personal Computer Emulating a VT100 Terminal 7 97 5 Follow up Procedures 000 c cece eee 7 98 DLP 716 Logging on to the System 0 cece cee eee 7 99 AA Se 7 99 2 Prerequisite Procedures cece eee teens 7 99 3 Tools and Materials Required 0000 cece eee eee 7 99 A AG v sated e a A a ee bee oe 7 100 Security Challenge Key 0 0 0 7 101 5 Follow up Procedures 2 000 e eee tee eee 7 101 DLP 717 Logging on via the Security Challenge Key 2000 e eee e eee eee e eee 7 103 1 Introd ction oss Ae ek EE eee See ee dae Boe el peu Rn Aa 7 103 2 Prerequisite Procedures 000 eee 7 103 3 Tools and Materials Required 000 c eee eee 7 103 4 Proced te ici ge ibt WG Read UE Jo et baad M ee tdt p s wee 7 104 5 Follow up Procedures 2 ere 7 105 DLP 729 Saving the System Configuration Archive eee eee eee 7 107 da Introd ction ac 4 45 4 td TRE Ee cu eb eedem e ure ERR d 7 107 2 Prerequisite Procedures liliis 7 108 3 LPIOCeOUIG AA s 7 109 xiv 61181918L1 1B Total Access HDX System Manual Contents 4 Follow up Procedures 2 c eee e 7 112 DLP 730 Restoring the Sys
186. e ete i 1 7 Management Interfaces nosne surare hh 1 7 NA RT 1 8 3 System Components eee nh mh eee eee 1 9 Total Access 3000 Chassis s aae a a A a E a els 1 11 Total Access 3050 Chassis anaana naa 1 12 FG AtureS us Lo nka da ate Sent DAL Apaia Dhu Postale a ani BAN dad Pama A e Balhae oda 1 13 Shelf Controller Units llli eee 1 14 Primary Controller Unit rerien liliis Hu 1 14 Feat tes uae tae Eee ug peius te peces Id oasis dore RAAT Der x V as 1 15 Expansion Controller Uitge essre se es 1 16 Features iius Roe Ee a ER A A E TRECE 1 16 Primary Switch Modules PSMs 2 2 eee ee 1 17 DS3 Primary Switch Module oooococcccoooo rn 1 17 Expansion Switch Module 00000 eee es 1 20 Features La AS edt ee dicet Bee NG eet 1 20 Access Modules 22 KENA Saeko A LA NG So ae NN eee 1 21 Total Access 3000 Octal ADSL P N 118140511 2 2 1 21 Total Access 3050 Metallic Test Controller P N 118301011 aa 1 23 EL AA 1 23 Total Access 3050 xDSL Splitter Module w MTA P N 1183002L2 1 24 Miscellaneous Equipment ooo 1 26 Heat Baffle and Fiber Tray 2 nekep Gaaga eee de eee hh eee 1 26 Fari Assembly 22 to erent AG KP eda a BAGAN ka Kanang 1 28 Total Access 3050 to Total Access 3000 Cable Assembly 1 29 8 Port Ethernet Hub 2 2 200 000 cee 1 30 BNC Adaptor Modules esera araa a e cece eee 1 31 Tota
187. e present in the Alarm Log indicating that the Fan Assembly failure alarm has cleared Clear any inactive alarms From the Alarm Log Master Alarms screen select C lear inactive to remove any inactive alarms Use the Y key to confirm when prompted This action should remove the fan alarms from the Alarm Log Log out of the HDX System Use the Esc key to back up through the menu levels until logged out of the system FOLLOW UP PROCEDURES Once this procedure is complete return to the procedure which called out this DLP and continue with the tasks indicated there 7 160 61181918L1 1B DLP 793 Verifying the Alarm Relay Output Connections to the PCU 1 INTRODUCTION This procedure details the test steps which must be performed to verify that the Total Access 3000 chassis external alarm relay outputs are properly connected to any office alarm equipment 2 PREREQUISITE PROCEDURES The following procedure must be completed prior to verifying the alarm relay output connections If necessary refer to the appropriate documentation before proceeding The prerequisite procedure is as follows DLP 710 Connecting the External Alarm Outputs 3 TOOLS AND MATERIALS REQUIRED VT100 Terminal or PC with VT100 Terminal Emulation software WARNING To prevent electrical shock do not install equipment in a wet location or during a lightning storm 61181918L1 1B 7 161 Section 7 Detailed Level Procedures DLP 793 Verifying the A
188. e provisioning the Octal ADSL Access Module press Esc 7 120 61181918L1 1B Total Access HDX System Manual Detailed Level Procedures Section 7 Provisioning the Octal ADSL Access Module DLP 761 Provisioning the Octal ADSL Access Module 1 From the Octal ADSL Provisioning menu select Line Card Provisioning and press ENTER NOTE The following options will be available for each of the eight ADSL Ports 2 From the Line Provisioning menu select the appropriate line by pressing S for Set Line and then choosing the line number pressing N for Next Line or pressing P for Previous Line The following options will appear on the screen once the line has been selected Line Service State Service Mode Rate Mode Line Type Link Down Alarm Test Access ATU C Line Profile ATU R Line Profile ATU C Alarm Profile 10 ATU R Alarm Profile OMAN O Ad BB ON 3 From the Edit Line x Provisioning menu select Service Mode and press ENTER The following rate options will be available 1 Multimode 2 T1 413 3 Gdmt 4 Glite Select the appropriate service mode and press ENTER 4 From the Edit Line x Provisioning menu select Rate Mode and press ENTER The following rate options will be available 1 Fixed 2 Rate Adaptive Select the appropriate rate mode and press ENTER 5 From the Line x Provisioning menu select Line Type and press ENTER The following line types will be available 1 Inte
189. ear plastic guard is required for wiring several special purpose leads such as clock inputs to the appropriate backplane terminals When executed in order most procedures in this system manual only require the guard to be removed and replaced once Connecting clock inputs or test leads later will require removal replacement of the guard 2 PREREQUISITE PROCEDURES Removing the large rear plastic guard usually requires that a Total Access shelf be mounted in a rack or set on a flat work surface Refer to the appropriate procedure for more information on rack mounting e DLP 521 Flush mounting the Shelves Heat Baffles and Fans e DLP 522 Mid mounting the Shelves Heat Baffles and Fans 3 TOOLS AND MATERIALS REQUIRED e 1 phillips head screwdriver WARNING To prevent electrical shock do not install equipment in a wet location or during a lightning storm 61181918L1 1B 7 67 Section 7 Detailed Level Procedures DLP 701 Removing and Replacing the Rear Plastic Guard Total Access HDX System Manual 7 68 CAUTION Electronic modules can be damaged by static electrical discharge Before handling modules wear an antistatic discharge wrist strap to prevent dam age to electronic components Place modules in antistatic packing mate rial when transporting or storing When working on modules always place them on an approved antistatic mat that is electrically grounded 61181918L1 1B Total Access HDX System Manual D
190. ecard matching the type of module present in the SCA file for that slot will result in automatic provisioning of the module to the settings present in the SCA file The remaining text in this section describe available Hotkeys visible at the bottom of the SCA Module Restore Provisioning Screen 61181918L1 1B 7 117 Section 7 Detailed Level Procedures Total Access HDX System Manual DLP 730 Restoring the System Configuration Archive E Hotkey Pressing the E key will force the restore state of all slots to enable D Hotkey Pressing the D key will force the restore state of all slots to disable T Hotkey Pressing the T key will toggle the restore state of all slots 13 Make the appropriate changes to the SCA Module Restore Provisioning Screen 14 When finished press Esc to return to the System Configuration Archive SCA menu and continue with the next section Perform the System Archive Restoration 1 From the System Configuration Archive SCA menu select SCA Operations and press ENTER 2 From the SCA Operations menu select Remote Filename and press ENTER This field provides for a 1 to 40 character filename This filename will requested from the TFTP server by the PCU This name must match the filename stored on the TFTP server character for character including extension Determine which file is to be used for the system being restored and use that filename in this field 3 From th
191. ect Provisioning and press ENTER From the Provisioning menu select System Administration and press ENTER From the System Administration menu select System Configuration Archive SCA and press ENTER From the System Configuration Archive SCA menu select SCA Operations and press ENTER From the SCA Operations menu select SCA TFTP Server and press ENTER Enter the IP address or hostname of the TFTP server that is to store the SCA files This field will support up to 30 characters Return to the Total Access Main menu by pressing Esc PRELIMINARY 61181918L1 1B Total Access HDX System Manual Detailed Level Procedures Section 7 Saving the System Configuration Archive DLP 729 3 Configure the SCA System for Automatic Archival From the Total Access Main menu select System Controller and press ENTER o 0 From the System Controller menu select Provisioning and press ENTER From the Provisioning menu select System Administration and press ENTER a o From the System Administration select System Configuration Archive SCA and press ENTER O From the System Configuration Archive menu select SCA AutoSave Provisioning and press ENTER rh From the SCA AutoSave Provisioning menu select AutoSave System and press ENTER The following settings will be available Enable Disable This option is the master control for the automatic save If this option is enabled automatic save
192. ection and the backward direction The forward direction is defined as traffic moving from Endpoint 1 to Endpoint 2 as indicated by the 1 52 symbol provided on the Create VC VP Menu The backward direction is defined as traffic moving from Endpoint 2 to Endpoint 1 as indicated by the 2 51 symbol on the Create VC VP Menu 7 214 61181918L1 1B Total Access HDX System Manual Detailed Level Procedures Section 7 Provisioning PVC Connections for a DS3 Primary Switch Module DLP 800 Provision PVCs 1 2 3 6 From the PSM Provisioning menu select VC VP Provisioning and press ENTER Press the C key to create a PVC Assign a Traffic Descriptor to each endpoint A TD may be assigned to an endpoint using the following two methods Method 1 a From the VC VP Provisioning menu select Forward Traffic Descriptor 1 gt 2 or Backward Traffic Descriptor 2 gt 1 and press ENTER b Type in the name or number of the appropriate TD and press ENTER The assigned TD will be displayed on the VC VP Provisioning screen Method 2 a From the VC VP Provisioning menu select Forward Traffic Descriptor 1 gt 2 or Backward Traffic Descriptor 2 gt 1 and press ENTER b Press the key for a list of the available TDs c Press the A key to assign the TD d ENTER the index of the appropriate TD for the respective direction and press ENTER The assigned TD will be displayed on the VC VP Provisioning screen Update the PVC
193. ection 7 Detailed Level Procedures Total Access HDX System Manual DLP 716 Logging on to the System This page is intentionally blank 7 102 61181918L1 1B DLP 717 Logging on via the Security Challenge Key 1 INTRODUCTION The Craft Telnet Login screen provides a Challenge Key Response support feature that allows customers to recover from lost or destroyed ADMIN account passwords Users with lost login passwords are able to enter CHALLENGE as the username resulting in a Challenge Key being provided a correct Response Key provided by ADTRAN Technical Support must then be supplied With the correct Response Key users will gain ADMIN level access to the system 2 PREREQUISITE PROCEDURES The following procedures must be completed prior to logging on to the system If necessary refer to the appropriate documentation before proceeding The prerequisite procedure is as follows e DLP 713 Connecting a Shelf to an External Modem if using a modem to access the shelf e DLP 715 Connecting the Craft Port to a Terminal or PC If using the PCU craft port e DLP 789 Setting IP Parameters for an PCU If using a Telnet session over a LAN e DLP 795 Verifying PCU Communications Over an IP LAN If using a Telnet session over a LAN 3 TOOLS AND MATERIALS REQUIRED VT100 or PC configured as a VT100 terminal Data cable to connect to VT100 terminal or PC configured as a VT100 terminal if local access is required 61181918L1 1B 7 103
194. ectors and the wire must exit the connector perpendicular to the backplane due to the density of connectors 1 For the HDX System the Total Access 3000 chassis is paired with a Total Access 3050 chassis The two shelves are interconnected by the eight cables shown with the cables connecting 1 1 i e the Pair 1 connector on the Total Access 3000 chassis is connected to pair 1 on the Total Access 3050 chassis pair 2 connects to pair 2 etc The eight cables are ordered as a single part P N 1181926L1 2 For use in applications where cabling is wire wrapped directly to the MDF terminal block see Table 3 2 for cable pinouts 3 For use in applications where cabling is wire wrapped directly to the MDF terminal block see Table 3 2 for cable pinouts 3 8 61181918L1 1B a l 1 181618119 6 6 Table 3 2 Total Access 3050 Splitter Shelf Amphenol Connector Pinouts Total Access 3050 Splitter Shelf POTS or LINE 50 Pin Amphenol Connectors 4972 72 73 96 97 120 121 144 145 168 169 192 193 216 217 224 Slot 16 Slot 22 Slot 25 Slot 10 Slot 13 Slot 19 Slot 28 Slot 11 Slot 14 Slot 17 Slot 20 Slot 23 Slot 26 Slot 12 Slot 15 Slot 18 Slot 21 Slot 24 Slot 27 The 25th Pair on each LINE and POTS connector except the 217 224 connectors are straight through connections which do not utilize the xDSL Splitter Module Pinouts 50 Pin Amphenol Connector T R LINE or POTS 26 1 27 2 28 3 29 4 30 5 31 6 32 7 33 8 34 9
195. ecure the Total Access chassis in place on the rack Install Heat Baffles The Total Access Heat Baffle functions as both a heat baffle and cable routing tray As a heat baffle it channels heated air to the back and away from equipment operating above a Total Access 3000 DSLAM system As a cable routing tray it provides channels and guides to properly route fiber optic cables delivered to multiplexer and access slots of a system The front panel is removable for routing fiber optic cables To protect installed fiber optic cables the panel should remain installed when access is not required Fiber optic cable may be routed to the sides of the unit or to the rear of the unit The Heat Baffle and Fiber Tray has mounting brackets similar to those on the Total Access chassis and should be mounted in the same orientation as the mounting brackets for the Total Access chassis 4 Using the two screws provided and a 2 phillips head screwdriver position and attach the mounting brackets on the Total Access 3000 Heat Baffle for the flush mount configuration Use the same screw driver and four more screws appropriate to the CO rack to secure the Heat Baffle into place immedi ately above the Total Access 3000 shelf it is intended to serve 7 26 61181918L1 1B Total Access HDX System Manual Section 7 Detailed Level Procedures Flush mounting the Shelves Heat Baffles and Fans DLP 521 Install Fans The Fan Assembly is designed to mount on the rear of
196. edure which called out this DLP and continue with the tasks indicated there 61181918L1 1B 7 69 Section 7 Detailed Level Procedures Total Access HDX System Manual DLP 701 Removing and Replacing the Rear Plastic Guard This page is intentionally blank 7 70 61181918L1 1B DLP 703 Connecting a Primary and Secondary T1 Clock 1 INTRODUCTION An external T1 clock source input may be required when deploying some services from the HDX System This procedure assumes that an appropriate drop wire shielded two wire with drain from the CO clock source has been run to the HDX System and is ready for connection Refer to PREP 405 for a further description of the clock source wire Refer to the installation and maintenance practices of the cards being installed both for the multiplexer slots and the access modules to determine the clock requirements 2 PREREQUISITE PROCEDURES The following procedure must be completed prior to connecting a Primary and Secondary T1 clock to a HDX System If necessary refer to the appropriate documentation before proceeding The prerequisite procedure is as follows DLP 701 Removing and Replacing the Rear Plastic Guard 3 TOOLS AND MATERIALS REQUIRED Tools and Materials Required Wire strippers Wire wrap tool WARNING To prevent electrical shock do not install equipment in a wet location or during a lightning storm CAUTION Electronic modules can be damaged by static electri
197. ee Figure 7 18 TID HDX PCU System 08 02 04 13 32 Unacknowledged Alarms CRITICAL MAJOR INFO Unit Number 1 Access Rights READ TESTING READ READ WRITE TEST CONFIG ADMIN OP WN H Selection System Help Screen Figure 7 18 User Account Access Rights Menu NOTE User account access privileges include READ READ WRITE TEST CONFIG and ADMIN Refer to Table 8 on page 7 200 for a listing of the PCU settings and what access privileges a user must have to view or change them 7 182 61181918L1 1B Total Access HDX System Manual Detailed Level Procedures Section 7 Setting System Security Settings in the PCU DLP 797 n Enable or disable the account by selecting Enable Disable User Account and pressing ENTER see Figure 7 19 TID HDX PCU System 08 02 04 13 33 Unacknowledged Alarms CRITICAL MAJOR INFO Unit Number J Account Properties Access Privileges TESTING DISABLED 1 Access Rights READ 2 Enable Disable User Account DISABLED Selection 1 System Help Screen Figure 7 19 Account Properties Access Privileges Menu 61181918L1 1B 7 183 Section 7 Detailed Level Procedures DLP 797 Setting System Security Settings in the PCU Total Access HDX System Manual Edit User Accounts 1 Logon to the HDX System using an Admin level user account For details refer to DLP 716 2 After logging on using an Admin user account perform the following steps
198. efore beginning the site preparations described below the Site Engineer should review Section 2 Engineering Guidelines and Section 3 Application Guidelines to determine which system applications each shelf will be wired to perform Based upon application the Site Engineer should specify how the bay holding the shelves should fit into the NEBS lineup for CO applications The same type of considerations should be made for RT and MTU applications These considerations include which power transmission and clock connections will be required for each shelf 3 SPACE CONSIDERATIONS Fitting the Shelf into NEBS Lineups The Total Access 3000 chassis and Total Access 3050 chassis are designed to flush mount or mid mount in any standard 23 inch network bay or unequal flange relay rack Since the chassis meet the 12 inch NEBS depth profile they may be mounted in any 12 inch 18 inch or 24 inch network lineup Full cable routing support is provided for power and transmission cables in both flush mount and mid mount configurations Vertical Space Requirements Fach shelf occupies 6 inches of vertical space in the rack The Heat Baffle and Fiber Tray occupies an additional 4 inches of vertical rack space In a typical application a Total Access 3000 and a Total Access 3050 chassis are mounted adjacent to each other to accommodate the eight cables that connect their backplanes These units would be mounted in the frame beginning at the bottom with a 3050 chass
199. electrical shock do not install equipment in a wet location or during a lightning storm 61181918L1 1B 7 167 Section 7 Detailed Level Procedures DLP 795 Verifying PCU Communications Over an IP LAN Total Access HDX System Manual 7 168 CAUTION Electronic modules can be damaged by static electrical discharge Before handling modules wear an antistatic discharge wrist strap to prevent dam age to electronic components Place modules in antistatic packing mate rial when transporting or storing When working on modules always place them on an approved antistatic mat that is electrically grounded 61181918L1 1B Total Access HDX System Manual Detailed Level Procedures Section 7 Verifying PCU Communications Over an IP LAN DLP 795 DLP 795 Perform the following steps in order 4 PROCEDURE 1 Ascertain the PCU IP Address IfIP Address for the PCU is not available either obtain it from the network administrator or manually check for the address in the Provisioning menu of the Network Management Interface NOTE System Administrator logon privileges are required to modify the IP parameters on the PCU 2 Ping the PCU from a remote computer on the network Using a remote computer system connected to the local area network perform an ICMP Ping on the IP Address of the PCU Verify that the PCU responds properly If the PCU fails to respond try the following e Verify that the proper IP Address
200. elf POTS or LINE 50 Pin Amphenol Connectors Pinouts 50 Pin Amphenol Connector Port TR LINE or POTS 1 24 25 48 49 72 73 96 97 120 121 144 145 168 169 192 193 216 217 224 1 26 1 2 27 2 3 28 3 4 29 4 Slot 1 Slot4 Slot 7 Slot 10 Slot 13 Slot 16 Slot 19 Slot 22 Slot 25 Slot 28 5 30 5 1 6 31 6 2 3 7 32 7 4 8 33 8 5 6 1 34 9 7 2 35 10 B 9 3 36 11 10 4 37 12 Es Slot 2 Slot 5 Slot 8 Slot 11 Slot14 Slot17 Slot20 Slot23 Slot26 See Note 12 5 38 13 13 14 6 39 14 15 7 40 15 16 17 8 41 16 18 1 42 17 13 20 2 43 18 21 22 3 44 19 23 4 45 20 24 Slot 3 Slot 6 Slot 9 Slot 12 Slot 15 Slot 18 Slot 21 Slot 24 Slot 27 Not Used 25 5 46 21 6 47 22 7 48 23 8 49 24 The 25th Pair on each LINE and POTS connector except the 217 224 connectors are straight through connections which do not utilize the 50 25 xDSL Splitter Module Note 8 Tls for IMA from Slot 27 amp 28 of the Total Access 3000 shelf The IMA T1 1 8 TX pairs will be on the LINE connector labeled 217 224 The IMA TI 1 8 RX pairs will be on the POTS connector labeled 217 224 No cut thru card is necessary in the Total Access 3050 chassis for these connections Heys JeHIdS OGOE sseooy ejo1 ay 0 4AN Dunoeuuo 982 4710 SoJnpaooJg 9 9 pa lelag Z uonag enuey wels s XAH sseooy jelo Total Access HDX System Manual Detailed Level Procedures Section 7 Connecting MDF to the Total Access 3050 Splitter Shelf DLP 786 2 PREREQUISITE PROCEDURES The follo
201. ement capabilities Refer to Appendix A Total Access Main Menu Tree to view the PM menu tree Provision the Traffic Descriptor 1 From the PSM Provisioning menu select Traffic Descriptor Provisioning and press ENTER 2 Press the M key to modify the traffic descriptor Then select the index number of the inband Traffic Descriptor InbandTD and press ENTER 3 Define the Traffic Descriptor for the PVC Define the Traffic Descriptor TD parameters for the management PVC by using options from the visible menu Once the Traffic Descriptor parameters are set select Update and press ENTER This action will prompt a confirmation screen Press the Y key and press ENTER The completion of above step will display the Traffic Descriptor Screen which provides a list of the existing TDs 4 Press Esc to return to the PSM main provisioning menu NOTE The default inband Traffic Descriptor InbandTD must govern both directions of the management traffic Provision the Management PVC 5 From the PSM Provisioning menu select VC VP Provisioning and press ENTER 6 Determine In band PVC Status Determine if the In band PVC is enabled or disabled by viewing the field located in the Status column The In band PVC will have MGMT in the field located in the Slot column under Endpoint 1 If the Status is enabled go to the step 7 If the Status is disabled go to step 8 7 210 61181918L1 1B Total Access HDX System Manual Detailed
202. eople one at the shelf under test and the other at the MDF 2 PREREQUISITE PROCEDURES The following procedure must be completed prior to verifying the Total Access 3050 Splitter Shelf wiring to the MDF If necessary refer to the appropriate documentation before proceeding The prerequisite procedure is as follows DLP 786 Connecting MDF to the Total Access 3050 Splitter Shelf 3 TOOLS AND MATERIALS REQUIRED Total Access 3050 Streaker Test Access Module also referred to as TAG module TAG Inc P N ST TA3050S Test Jack Wire wrap post slide on connectors to alligator clips WARNING To prevent electrical shock do not install equipment in a wet location or during a lightning storm 61181918L1 1B 7 149 Section 7 Detailed Level Procedures DLP 791 Verify Total Access 3050 Splitter Shelf Wiring to the MDF Total Access HDX System Manual 7 150 CAUTION Electronic modules can be damaged by static electrical discharge Before handling modules wear an antistatic discharge wrist strap to prevent dam age to electronic components Place modules in antistatic packing mate rial when transporting or storing When working on modules always place them on an approved antistatic mat that is electrically grounded 61181918L1 1B Total Access HDX System Manual Detailed Level Procedures Section 7 Verify Total Access 3050 Splitter Shelf Wiring to the MDF DLP 791 DLP 791 Perform the following steps in ord
203. er 4 PROCEDURE NOTE Note that this procedure is being performed on the Total Access 3050 Splitter Shelf on the Primary or Expansion shelves in the HDX System Table 7 8 provides the amphenol connector pinouts and should be used as a reference while connecting the Total Access 3050 Splitter Shelf to the MDF Begin by testing the ADSL POTS connections to the MDF 1 Verify that the Total Access 3050 Splitter Shelf under test is receiving power Verify that the shelf to be tested is powered with 48 VDC Seat the TAG module in the Total Access 3050 Splitter Shelf slot to be tested Seat the TAG module in the slot to be tested If the entire shelf needs to be tested start with slot 1 This test may only be performed on the access module slots labeled 1 through 28 This test may not be performed on the PCU slot or the A and B MUX slots Connect Tip of Pair 1 on the MDF to ground Locate the position on the MDF which corresponds to Pair for the slot under test Use the test jack to connect the wire wrap pin labeled T to frame ground Check for green Pair 1 LED Visually verify that the LED on the TAG module labeled Pair 1 is lit green No other LED on the TAG module should light If the LED lights up red this indicates that the Tip and Ring wires are reversed No LED lit indicates no continuity on Tip Connect Ring of Pair 1 on the MDF to ground Disconnect Tip of Pair 1 from frame ground Use the test ja
204. es DLP 797 Setting System Security Settings in the PCU Total Access HDX System Manual Table 8 PCU User Account Privileges Continued Menu Items ADMIN READWRITE READONLY TEST CONFIG Trap Host 1 Status View Change View View View View Change Trap Host 1 Seq Num View View View View View Requested Trap Host 1 Seq Num View View View View View Confirmed Trap Host 1 Cache View View View View View System Controller Provisioning SNMP Trap Host 2 Trap Host 2 IP View Change View View View View Change Trap Host 2 Method View Change View View View View Change Trap Host 2 Confirmation View Change View View View View Change Trap Host 2 Initial Time View Change View View View View Change Out Trap Host 2 Retry Limit View Change View View View View Change Trap Host 2 Status View Change View View View View Change Trap Host 2 Seq Num View View View View View Requested Trap Host 2 Seq Num View View View View View Confirmed Trap Host 2 Cache View View View View View System Controller Provisioning SNMP Trap Host 3 Trap Host 3 IP View Change View View View View Trap Host 3 Method View Change View View View View Trap Host 3 Confirmation View Change View View View View Trap Host 3 Initial Time View Change View View View View Out Trap Host 3 Retry Limit View Change View View View View Trap Host 3 Status View Change View View View View Trap Host 3 Seq Num View V
205. et the Default Route Interface The Default Route Interface dictates to which interface the PCU will send IP traffic that is intended for an unknown subnet any subnet other than the subnets used by the local interfaces The Default Route Interface may be set to Ethernet Inband or None Both interfaces may be utilized simultaneously if the subnet to which the Ethernet interface is assigned and the subnet to which the Inband interface is assigned are not logically connected FOLLOW UP PROCEDURES Once this procedure is complete return to the procedure which called out this DLP and continue with the tasks indicated there 7 144 61181918L1 1B DLP 790 Routing Cable Through the Heat Baffle 1 INTRODUCTION The Total Access Heat Baffle and Fiber Tray also serves as a cable routing tray for routing the cables from the front of the DS3 Primary Switch Module PSM and Expansion Switch Module ESM across to the left side of the shelf viewed from the front and to the CO overhead cable routing system This procedure describes briefly the general guidelines for routing the cables The two Total Access Heat Baffle and Fiber Trays covered in this DLP are as follows Total Access 23 Inch Heat Baffle and Fiber Tray P N 1181003L1 Total Access 19 Inch Heat Baffle and Fiber Tray P N 1182005L1 2 PREREQUISITE PROCEDURES To route cables this procedure assumes that vertical cable guides have been mounted on the frame in accordance with the
206. etailed Level Procedures Section 7 Removing and Replacing the Rear Plastic Guard DLP 701 DLP 701 Perform the following steps in order 4 PROCEDURE 1 Remove the wire wrap terminal guard Using a 1 phillips head screwdriver remove the long thin Plexiglass guard covering the wire wrap terminals at the bottom of the backplane It is held in place with two screws 2 Remove the main guard Using a 1 phillips head screwdriver remove the four screws that hold the guard in place Carefully remove the guard by pulling it straight back from the backplane NOTE Wire tie anchors are pre installed on the backplane 64 pin amphenol con nector s cable ends It is easier to thread the wire ties through the anchors while the backplane guard is removed ADTRAN recommends using the wire ties provided to secure the amphenol connectors Thread them through the anchors at this time with the guard off 3 Reinstall the main guard Line up the Plexiglass guard with the holes provided for securing it to the backplane Using a 1 phillips head screwdriver reattach the backplane guard to the backplane using the four phillips head screws provided two at each end 4 Reinstall the wire wrap terminal guard Using a 1 phillips head screwdriver reinstall the long thin Plexiglass guard using the screws 2 threaded into the standoffs just reinstalled 5 FOLLOW UP PROCEDURES Once this procedure is complete return to the proc
207. ete return to the procedure which called out this DLP and continue with the tasks indicated there 7 134 61181918L1 1B DLP 786 Connecting MDF to the Total Access 3050 Splitter Shelf 1 INTRODUCTION All customer loops from the Total Access 3050 Splitter Shelf will normally go to the Main Distribution Frame MDF In the Central Office CO the HDX System data cables go to the horizontal side of the frame where they are connected to the frame either by another amphenol connector for data cables connectorized at both ends or by individual wire wrapping on the appropriate pins cables connectorized at one end and stubbed at the other The Total Access 3050 Splitter Shelf uses ten 50 pin male amphenol connectors for connection of the LINE cable pairs to the MDF and ten 50 pin male amphenol connectors for connection of the POTS cable pairs from the PSTN Each set of 50 pin male amphenol connectors LINE and POTS represents 24 circuits from three consecutive slots in the Total Access 3050 chassis Table 7 7 provides the amphenol connector pinouts and should be used as a reference while connecting the Total Access 3050 Splitter Shelf to the MDF 61181918L1 1B 7 135 9EL L al 1 181618119 Table 7 7 Total Access 3050 Splitter Shelf Amphenol Connector Pinouts Total Access 3050 Splitter Sh
208. etwork All in band management traffic is carried over an ATM interface from a network router The Network Administrator must assign an IP address subnet mask default gateway VPI and VCI for the connection In Band IP Interface The In Band IP Interface also allows In Band IP access to all of the HDX system expansion shelves Once the connection is established the In band Management Channel provides the same functionality as the Ethernet Interface including SNMP menus over Telnet and TL1 over TCP IP IP Forwarding The HDX System PCU provides an option to forward TCP IP based traffic between the Ethernet and In band interfaces When a packet is received either on the Ethernet or In band interface the PCU router code examines the target or destination IP network address of each outgoing packet and determines if it matches the network address of one of its local IP interfaces Ethernet or In band If there is a match the packet is sent through the corresponding interface otherwise the packet is sent through the selected default route interface Ethernet or In band If the default route provision item is set to None and the network portion of the outgoing packets target IP does not match one of the local interfaces the packet is discarded If the designated default route interface has a non zero gateway specified packets not matching the network addresses of the local IP interfaces will be sent directly to that gateway otherwise the
209. ew View View Change Subnet Mask View Change View View View View Change Gateway View Change View View View View Change Inband Link View View View View View System Controller Provisioning Network Management Terminal Server Provisioning Terminal Server amp Admin View Change View Change View View Change View Change Port Baud Rate Ntwk Terminal Server View Change View View View View Change Telnet Port Ntwk Terminal Server View Change View View View View Change Security Admin Port Baud Rate View Change View Change View View Change View Change Admin Terminal Server View Change View View View View Change Telnet Port Admin Terminal Server View Change View View View View Change Security System Controller Provisioning Network Management IP Telnet Service Ports TL1 Telnet Port View Change View View View View Change TL1 Raw TCP View Change View View View View Change 7 202 61181918L1 1B Total Access HDX System Manual Detailed Level Procedures Section 7 Setting System Security Settings in the PCU DLP 797 Table 8 PCU User Account Privileges Continued Menu Items ADMIN READWRITE READONLY TEST CONFIG Secondary Telnet Port View Change View View View View Change Ntwk Terminal Server View Change View View View View Change Telnet Port Admin Terminal Server View Cha
210. f Each Module At 48 VDC 2 2 2 2 4 Primary Shelf Non Redundant Current Draw at 48 VDC 2 0 aa 2 4 Expansion Shelf Non Redundant Current Draw at 48 VDC 00 2 5 Total Access 3050 Splitter Shelf Current Draw at 48 VDC 2 5 HDX First Bay 3 Systems Current Draw at 48 VDC 0 0 ee 2 5 HDX Second Bay 3 Systems Current Draw at 48 VDC 2 0 0 2 aa 2 6 Determining Wire Gauge and Fuse Size cee ee 2 6 Current Draw Worksheet at 48 VDC 2 eae 2 7 Heat Dissipation at 48 VDC 2 ee 2 8 HDX Primary Shelf Non Redundant Heat Dissipation 00 0000 2 9 HDX Expansion Shelf Non Redundant Heat Dissipation o o oo o 2 9 HDX First Bay 3 Systems Heat Dissipation 0 0 2 9 HDX Second Bay 3 Systems Heat Dissipation 0 000 e ee eee 2 10 Heat Dissipation Worksheet at 48VDC 0 0022 eee 2 10 Heat Dissipation for Total Access 3000 System 2 0 00 eee 2 11 Heat Dissipation for Total Access 3000 System 2 000 eee 2 11 61181918L1 1B Total Access HDX System Manual Engineering Guidelines Section 2 1 DIMENSIONS OF EQUIPMENT Table 2 1 lists the dimensions of the Total Access 3000 chassis Total Access 3050 chassis Heat Baffle and Fiber Tray Fan Assembly and modules Table 2 1 HDX System Equipment Dimensions and Weights
211. grounded 61181918L1 1B Total Access HDX System Manual Detailed Level Procedures Section 7 Octal ADSL Access Module Installation DLP 561 DLP 561 Perform the Steps Below in the Order Listed 5 PROCEDURE 1 Unpack and inspect the Octal ADSL Access Module Fach Octal ADSL Access Module is shipped in its own cardboard shipping carton Open the carton carefully and avoid cutting deeply into the carton with sharp objects After removing the unit from the carton unwrap the antistatic bubble wrap and pull the unit from the protective plastic bag After unpacking the unit inspect it for damage If the equipment has been damaged file a claim with the carrier and then contact ADTRAN Customer Service For more information refer to Appendix B Warranty 2 Install the Octal ADSL Access Module e Pull the ejector on the bottom of the Octal ADSL Access Module front panel from its stowed or closed position The Octal ADSL Access Module may be inserted into any of the 28 22 access slots of the Total Access 3000 chassis To avoid confusion with the Access and PSM slots the Access slots start with the fourth slot from the left of the shelf and are numbered 1 through 28 1 through 22 on the underlying silk screen Attempting to insert the Octal ADSL Access Module in either the SCU or MUX slots may damage the module and or the backplane f Gently but firmly push the Octal ADSL Access Module into an access slot
212. h field is the setting for the BasePath prefix that precedes all Auto Upgrade configuration and module firmware files The BasePath option allows the customer to specify a directory prefix where the Auto Upgrade configuration and flash firmware files will be located on the TFTP server All Auto Upgrade system configuration flash firmware files should be located in the same directory so this field applies to all Auto Upgrade module specification entries The BasePath argument should not contain spaces commas quotes or other unusual characters that would generally be considered invalid in a path specification Although the PCU does not interpret the contents of this string different operating systems have different rules concerning what constitutes valid characters and path file separators Auto Upgrade Config Filename The Auto Upgrade Config Filename field is used to set the Auto Upgrade configuration filename that will be retrieved from the firmware TFTP server The Auto Upgrade configuration filename will be supplied by ADTRAN The file that is provided by ADTRAN will typically have an auc extension Auto Upgrade Mode The Auto Upgrade system operating mode is set by selecting Auto Upgrade Mode e Auto indicates that modules should be automatically checked and upgraded after power up of the PCU or upon module insertion into the shelf If this value is set to Auto actions controlled by the RefreshInterval option will also be enabled
213. hat edge connector seats firmly into the backplane Push the ejector tab up and closed against the PSM front panel f Allow the PSM module to perform a self test The POWER STATUS ATM CLOCK LOCKOUT and ONLINE LEDs should turn green and the TEST LED should be orange All LEDs then go off The top five LEDs begin to cycle through a running pattern until the board has completed the self test process Allow at least 3 minutes for the self test to complete Upon completion of the self test the LEDs will reflect the true state of the hardware A stable configuration will prompt the POWER STATUS and ONLINE LED s to be green and the TEST ATM CLOCK and LOCKOUT LED s to be off g Route the CAT 5e cable to the downstream ESM position on HDX System shelf 2 and use the ESM installation procedure to connect and secure it The PSM to ESM connections must be made between units in the same common slot position PSMs or ESMs in common Slot A must connect to ESMs in Slot A and Slot B modules connects to Slot B If a single PSM configuration is being employed proceed to DLP 800 for the procedure to provision the PSM If a protection configuration is being employed proceed to DLP 800 after the Protect second PSM has been installed 61181918L1 1B 7 43 Section 7 Detailed Level Procedures Total Access HDX System Manual DLP 524 DS3 Primary Switch Module Installation Common Slot B Protect PSM Installation Procedure This procedure will
214. he Alarm Relay Concentrator for Out of Service or Test If the shelves are connected to an Alarm Relay Concentrator which is connected to an upstream alarm system configure the Concentrator in Out of Service or Test mode for the HDX System s input positions so that no alarms will be forwarded Refer to the Alarm Relay Concentrator documentation 5 Check the Critical Audible Relay a Select menu option 1 to toggle the Critical Audible Relay on b Verify that the Alarm Relay Concentrator indicates a critical audible alarm for the proper shelf location c Select menu option 1 again to toggle the Critical Audible Relay off d Verify that the alarm indication clears on the Concentrator 6 Check the Critical Visual Relay a Select menu option 2 to toggle the Critical Visual Relay on b Verify that the Alarm Relay Concentrator indicates a critical visual alarm for the proper shelf location c Select menu option 2 again to toggle the Critical Visual Relay off d Verify that the alarm indication clears on the Concentrator 61181918L1 1B 7 163 Section 7 Detailed Level Procedures Total Access HDX System Manual DLP 793 Verifying the Alarm Relay Output Connections to the PCU 7 10 11 12 13 Check the Major Audible Relay a Select menu option 3 to toggle the Major Audible Relay on b Verify that the Alarm Relay Concentrator indicates a major audible alarm for the proper shelf location c Select menu opti
215. he HDX System craft interface If not already connected to the shelf s craft interface either with a VT100 compatible terminal or with a PC running VT100 emulation software use the procedure in DLP 715 to connect to the craft interface Alternately if the shelf is part of a management cluster connected to the local network a PC connected to the network can be used to Telnet into the shelf 2 Logon to the HDX System For details refer to DLP 716 3 Go to the Total Access Alarm Log menu a From the shelf s top level menu select option 5 System Alarms and press ENTER b From the System Alarms menu select option 2 Alarm Logs and press ENTER 4 Verify that no Fan Assembly alarm is currently active Check the Alarm Log to verify that no active alarm is indicated for the Fan Assembly The Fan Assembly alarm utilizing the AUX 1 input will by default have a description of EXTN input 1 This can be changed at the User Definable Alarms menu If an alarm is indicated check that the Fan Assembly is powered and working If the Fan Assembly is operating but an alarm state is still present check the wiring between the Fan Assembly and the Total Access shelf to verify that it is correct Refer to DLP 711 for details of correct wiring Take any corrective action required to clear the alarm state before proceeding 5 Locate the fuse for the Fan Assembly Locate the fuse in the bay fuse panel that feeds that Fan Assembly under test If no individua
216. he carton carefully and avoid cutting deeply into the carton with sharp objects After removing the unit from the carton unwrap the bubble wrap and pull the unit from the antistatic plastic bag After unpacking the unit inspect it for damage If the equipment has been damaged file a claim with the carrier and then contact ADTRAN Customer Service For more information refer to Appendix B Warranty 10 Install the primary PSM o Pull the locking lever on the bottom of the PSM front panel down from its closed position b Install the CAT 5e modular cable that connects the PSM and the first upstream ESM on shelf 2 The cable plugs into the single modular jack on the PSM circuit board near the front panel The cable must be shielded with both ends earth grounded and cannot be shrouded due to the close tolerances on the access module e Dress the cable to exit through the relief hole at the top edge of the PSM front panel and secure it with the proper cable ties using the vertical slot in the center near the top of the card d Hold the unit by the front panel while supporting the bottom side Align the card edges to the guide grooves for the second common slot Slot A on the left side of the chassis O Gently but firmly push the PSM module into the second slot slot A at the left end of the shelf Simultaneous thumb pressure at the top above the POWER LED and bottom below the TEST ENABLE button of the unit will ensure t
217. he shelf connector barrel press the cable in and turn approximately one half turn clockwise to the locking detente 3 Attach the network receive cable to the Total Access 3000 backplane s lower BNC connector labeled Tx The fitting is a standard BNC connector Align the outer ring of the cable connector with the keys on the chassis connector barrel press the cable in and turn approximately one half turn clockwise to the locking detente NOTE If the high speed cabling is to be run to the DS3 cross connect panel the Tx side of the coax adapter on the Total Access 3000 backplane should connect to the Tx port on the cross connect and the Rx to the Rx side If the cabling is to run to another multiplexer device the connect as described in steps 1 3 above 4 Route the coax cable through the cable trays to the DSX 3 cross connect Route the cable down the cross connect to the appropriate connection point 5 If necessary trim the cable to length and crimp on the appropriate connector for connection to the cross connect 6 Connect the cables to the equipment connection points on the DSX 3 cross connect Connect the Tx cable to the Tx equipment connector and the Rx cable to the Rx equipment 5 FOLLOW UP PROCEDURES Once this procedure is complete return to the procedure which called out this DLP and continue with the tasks indicated there 61181918L1 1B 7 81 Section 7 Detailed Level Procedures Total Access HDX System Manual
218. he top of the Total Access 3050 chassis door and swing the door open 2 The Total Access 3050 xDSL Splitter Module does not have a front panel and should be held by the grasping the ejector latch at the top of the module and the module edge Care should be taken to avoid touching the electronic components 3 Pull the ejector latch on the top of the xDSL Splitter Module from its closed position 4 Gently but firmly push the xDSL Splitter Module into the assigned slot in the Total Access 3050 chassis Use simultaneous thumb pressure at the top and bottom of the module until the edge connector seats firmly into the backplane 5 Seat the xDSL Splitter Module and push the latch down to secure the installation 6 The Total Access 3050 chassis has a latching door with an air filter The door should be closed after installation of the xDSL Splitter Module 4 FOLLOW UP PROCEDURE Once this procedure is complete return to the procedure which called out this DLP and continue with the tasks indicated there 61181918L1 1B 7 61 Section 7 Detailed Level Procedures Total Access HDX System Manual DLP 528 xDSL Splitter Module with Test Access This page is intentionally blank 7 62 61181918L1 1B DLP 561 Octal ADSL Access Module Installation 1 INTRODUCTION This procedure provides step by step instructions for the installation of the Total Access 3000 Octal ADSL Access Module P N 1181405L1 into the Total Access 3000 chassis Install
219. henol connectors each of which delivers a single pair of copper wires to each access module slot see Figure 2 4 EG SSS Kin E gt 2 zi 3 a YY si e roi ng PATR o a IN Can pen Sors Ane a Ode 0 TO 00 00 0 O00 Figure 2 4 Backplane and Amphenol Connectors for Total Access 3050 See Figure 2 5 for the pinout of a local loop connector on the Total Access 3050 backplane Note that pins 25 and 50 are provided as a straight through connection for a 25 non ADSL pair Recommended part number for cables provided by TSI refer to Section 3 Application Guidelines are designed so that pin 64 is connected to the cable shield drain wire Ti 26 1 R T2 27 2 R2 T3 28 3 R3 T4 29 4 R4 T5 30 5 R5 T6 31 6 R6 T7 32 7 R7 T8 33 8 R8 T9 34 9 R9 T10 35 10 R40 T11 36 11 R11 T12 37 12 R12 T13 38 13 R43 T14 39 14 R14 T15 40 15 R15 T16 41 16 R46 T17 42 17 R17 T18 43 18 R48 T19 44 19 R19 T20 45 20 R20 T21 46 21 R21 T22 47 22 R22 T23 48 23 R23 T24 49 24 R24 T25 50 25 R25 Figure 2 5 Pinout for a Single Connector 61181918L1 1B 2 19 Section 2 Engineering Guidelines Total Access HDX System Manual HDX Shelf Connection Connection betwee
220. ies are included with the Total Access 3000 61181918L1 1B 7 217 Section 7 Detailed Level Procedures Total Access HDX System Manual DLP 801 Connecting the Total Access 3000 and Total Access 3050 2 PREREQUISITE PROCEDURES The following procedure must be completed prior to connecting the Total Access 3000 and Total Access 3050 If necessary refer to the appropriate documentation before proceeding The prerequisite procedures include the following NTP 020 HDX System Installation 3 TOOLS REQUIRED 1 phillips head screwdriver 4 MATERIALS REQUIRED Total Access 3000 chassis Total Access 3050 chassis Total Access 3050 to Total Access 3000 Cable Assembly P N 1181926L 1 7 218 61181918L1 1B Total Access HDX System Manual Detailed Level Procedures Section 7 Connecting the Total Access 3000 and Total Access 3050 DLP 801 DLP 801 Perform the following steps in order 5 PROCEDURE Wire tie anchors are pre installed on the Total Access 3000 backplane 64 pin amphenol connectors It is easier to thread the wire ties through the anchors with the backplane guard removed 1 Remove the rear plastic guard For details refer to DLP 701 2 Thread the wire ties through the Total Access 3000 wire tie anchors NOTE For the cables to fit properly the Total Access 3050 chassis must be mounted directly below the Total Access 3000 chassis with no visible space between them the space in Figure 7 37 is sho
221. iew View View View Requested Trap Host 3 Seq Num View View View View View Confirmed Trap Host 3 Cache View View View View View 7 204 61181918L1 1B Total Access HDX System Manual Detailed Level Procedures Section 7 Setting System Security Settings in the PCU DLP 797 Table 8 PCU User Account Privileges Continued Menu Items ADMIN READWRITE READONLY TEST CONFIG System Controller Provisioning SNMP Trap Host 4 Trap Host 4 IP View Change View View View View Trap Host 4 Method View Change View View View View Trap Host 4 Confirmation View Change View View View View Trap Host 4 Initial Time View Change View View View View Out Trap Host 4 Retry Limit View Change View View View View Trap Host 4 Status View Change View View View View Trap Host 4 Seq Num View View View View View Requested Trap Host 4 Seq Num View View View View View Confirmed Trap Host 4 Cache View View View View View System Controller Provisioning TL1 Unit Number View View View View View Client Shelf Management View View View View View Target ID TID View Change View View View View Change TL1 Telnet Port View Change View View View View Change TL1 Raw TCP Port View Change View View View View Change Exchange TL1 Ports View Change View View View View Change Legacy AID Compatibility View Change N A N A
222. iled Level Procedures DLP 711 Connecting a Fan Assembly Alarm Total Access HDX System Manual 7 88 WARNING To prevent electrical shock do not install equipment in a wet location or during a lightning storm CAUTION Electronic modules can be damaged by static electrical discharge Before handling modules wear an antistatic discharge wrist strap to prevent dam age to electronic components Place modules in antistatic packing mate rial when transporting or storing When working on modules always place them on an approved antistatic mat that is electrically grounded 61181918L1 1B Total Access HDX System Manual Detailed Level Procedures Section 7 Connecting a Fan Assembly Alarm DLP 711 DLP 711 Perform the following steps in order 4 PROCEDURE 1 Replace the plastic guard over the backplane For details refer to DLP 701 2 Locate the AUX1 header pair on the EXT INPUTS block P22 on the middle bottom of the Total Access 3000 primary shelf backplane See Figure 7 5 0 00 FUSE 1 AMP 20000 48V RET 48V RET 48V DC 48V DC A B A B A B A B JA B A B H
223. ily found The following is an overview of the contents Task Index List IXL Provides a list of all the installation maintenance and acceptance test procedures related to the HDX System Provides a detailed list of the sections headings list of figures and list of tables System Description SYS Provides managers with an overview of the HDX System Engineering Guidelines ENG Provides information to assist network designers with incorporating the HDX System into their networks Application Guidelines APP Provides information on specific HDX System wiring applications Site Preparation PRP Provides information for Central Office CO engineers who will prepare the CO for a Total Access installation Network Management Systems NMS This section describes the types of network management systems that can be used Non Trouble Clearing Procedures NTP Provides step by step instructions on how to install the HDX System determine the parameters for the system install the Primary Controller Unit PCU and power up the system Detailed Level Procedures DLP Provides detailed procedural information on specific HDX System tasks Appendix A Menu Trees Appendix B Warranty vi 61181918L1 1B IXL 001 Task Index List Find the Required Task in the List Below For details refer to Installation HDX System Insta
224. ing power input and ground plus the interconnections between access modules Cell Switch Modules PSM ESM and the Shelf Controller Units PCU ECU There are also facilities for plug in modules and wire wrap pins for special purposes Refer to Figure 1 2 the Total Access 3000 backplane to identify the locations of the following System and Power Ground Flag A Power Connections The system is designed to accommodate redundant power configurations Dual terminals for 48 VDC and return are provided The system will operate with either individual supply or both supplies functioning NOTE If individual power supply is used jumpers should be used to connect the terminals TS1 and TS2 to prevent a minor alarm Flag B Frame Ground Copper terminal connection is provided for frame ground Timing Flag C Timing Input Total Access 3000 operates in local loop or external timing modes Timing may be derived from an external BITS timing source connected to the EXTCLK inputs B IN C2 or C IN C3 NOTE The timing input is only valid for the primary shelf Expansion shelves receive timing from the primary shelf 61181918L1 1B 1 5 Total Access HDX System Manual
225. ion the PCU for terminal server connection For details refer to DL P 523 Provision the remaining items on the PCU a From the Total Access Main menu select System Controller and press ENTER b From the System Controller menu select Provisioning and press ENTER c From the Provisioning menu select General and press ENTER d From the General menu select Date and press ENTER e Enter the correct Date and press ENTER The current menu will now be the General menu f From the General menu select Time and press ENTER g Enter the correct TIME and press ENTER The current menu will now be the General menu h From the General menu select Auto Logoff and press ENTER i To enable the Auto Logoff select Enable and press ENTER The current menu will now be the General menu j From the General menu select Change ADMIN Password and press ENTER k Enter the old ADMIN password and press ENTER l Enter the new alphanumeric ADMIN password and press ENTER The current menu will now be the General menu m From the General menu select Security Administration and press ENTER n From the Security Administration menu select Edit User Accounts and press ENTER o Edits the accounts as appropriate Each account may be modified disabled enabled and deleted by selecting the index of the specific account p Return to the Provisioning menu by pressing Esc 7 20 61181918L1 1B Total Access HDX System Manual Detailed Level Pr
226. iplexer and access modules of a system The front panel is remov able for routing cables To protect installed cables the panel should remain installed when access is not required Cables may be routed to the sides or to the rear of the unit Figure 1 13 Heat Baffle and Fiber Tray The Heat Baffle and Fiber Tray provides for mounting a Fan Assembly The Fan Assembly unit may be installed without removing the Heat Baffle and Fiber Tray In addition the Heat Baffle allows for either mid or flush mounting 1 26 61181918L1 1B Total Access HDX System Manual System Description Section 1 The operation of a Heat Baffle and Fan Assembly installed above the Total Access 3000 chassis and a Total Access 3050 Splitter Shelf installed below the Total Access 3000 chassis is shown in Figure 1 14 fan module Total Access lt lt 64 Pin Amphenol 3000 Front Chassis 64 Pin Amphenol bati mmm gt incoming gt cool air gt gt 50 Pin POTS g Front Cover 3 POTS ADSL and Filter Figure 1 14 Heat Baffle Operation 61181918L1 1B Section 1 System Description Total Access HDX System Manual Fan Assembly The Total Access Fan Assembly see Figure 1 15 P N 1181006L1 may be installed without removing the Heat Baffle and Fiber Tray The Fan Assembly is designed to mount directly above each HDX Total Access 3000 shelf The Fan Assembly draws air through the shelf to
227. is followed by a Total Access 3000 chassis followed by a Heat Baffle and Fibre Tray which also houses the Fan Assembly Since the Total Access 3050 chassis is populated with modules that have no front panels the front of the unit acts as the cool air intake at the bottom of the two chassis stack This makes the usual additional Heat Baffle and Fiber Tray at the bottom of the stack unnecessary The primary and expansion chassis will all be installed in the two chassis group with the Heat Baffle and Fiber Tray The Total Access 3000 chassis is 6 inches in height the Total Access 3050 chassis is 6 inches in 61181918L1 1B 4 3 Section 4 Site Preparation Total Access HDX System Manual PREP 405 Preparing for Chassis Installation height and the Heat Baffle and Fiber Tray is 4 inches in height Thus each primary or expansion shelf group will occupy 16 inches of vertical space If N is the number of primary and expansion shelf groups in the HDX System installation then the frame space used would be Vertical Space in Inches 16 x N For example if a primary and two expansion shelf groups were being installed they would occupy 3 x 16 inches or 48 inches of vertical space This would be six shelves and three Heat Baffle and Fiber Trays However this does not include space for the fuse panels at the top of the frame Use of Horizontal Spacers in a NEBS Lineup When four or more Total Access 3000 chassis are to be installed in the s
228. isioning is enabled proceed to step 18 15 From the Advanced Provisioning menu select Linked Provisioning and press ENTER 16 From the Linked Provisioning menu select Enable and press ENTER 17 Repeat steps 12 16 for the offline PSM 18 Return to the Total Access Main menu by pressing Esc The secondary offline PSM should now be provisioned with the identical settings as the primary online PSM 4 FOLLOW UP PROCEDURE Once this procedure is complete return to the procedure that called out this DLP and continue with the tasks indicated there 61181918L1 1B 7 211 Section 7 Detailed Level Procedures Total Access HDX System Manual DLP 799 Provisioning an In band Management PVC Connection This page is intentionally blank 7 212 61181918L1 1B DLP 800 Provisioning PVC Connections for a DS3 Primary Switch Module 1 INTRODUCTION This section provides step by step instructions for the provisioning of a Total Access 3000 DS3 Primary Switch Module PSM In the case of 1to1 protection instructions are included for the provisioning of the primary and secondary modules 2 PREREQUISITE PROCEDURES The following procedures must be completed prior to provisioning PVCs for the PSM If necessary refer to the appropriate documentation before proceeding The prerequisite procedures include the following e NTP 020 HDX System Installation NTP 024 HDX System Modules Installation Physical installation of any access module
229. isite Procedures es 6 3 3 Tools Required cele RERO ERA a a RU RACES a ES 6 4 4 Materials Required ses 6 4 5 Procedure oc ub RR eae E LEES AA EA 6 6 6 Follow up Procedures ln 6 7 Primary Controller Unit PCU Replacement een nnn 6 9 Ti Introduction ie A Quen he OR SE cn OE OR 6 9 2 Prerequisite Procedures es 6 9 3 Materials Required 20 0000 eee 6 9 4 Procedure zie og Sic lA e ei tL eia RSS 6 10 5 Follow Up Procedure les 6 10 HDX System Modules Installation BB 6 15 TE INTO UCA eu Nag KG DRA NG BA IUIS ter da 6 15 2 Prerequisite Procedures eh 6 15 3 Modules Required 2 00 e eee eens 6 16 4 Proced te ue ELE Rex en ad I A ede Poh se 6 17 5 Follow up Procedures 00000 e eee teens 6 17 TABLES Recommended Wire Gauge and Fuse Sizes 6 4 HDX System Module Quantities eee eens 6 16 61181918L1 1B 6 1 Section 6 Non Trouble Clearing Procedures Total Access HDX System Manual This page is intentionally blank 6 2 61181918L1 1B NTP 020 HDX System Installation 1 INTRODUCTION This section provides step by step instructions for the installation of one or more Total Access 3000 or Total Access 3010shelves in a Central Office CO MultiTenant Unit MTU or Remote Terminal RT Installation procedures include the removal of the Total Access 3000 shelves from shipping
230. l Access 3050 Streaker Test Access Module 0 0 eee 1 32 4 Bay Configurations oue RIA cI Rd a ees 1 33 61181918L1 1B ix Contents Total Access HDX System Manual Section 2 Engineering Guidelines 2 5 22 st remm ee dee Wie ee eee siete eld eaten tals 2 1 1 Dimensions of Equipment ei rrsrrinp tinner annin eee 2 3 2 System Power Requirements l l eee eee n nh hr 2 4 Power Dissipation Considerations lees 2 8 Power Dissipation for a HDX System isses ees 2 8 HDX System Heat Dissipation and GR 63 CORE 0 22 2 11 System Level 54i remi e eL EL ERE 2 11 Frame keya via A A A AC d EE Ie pde d NG 2 11 3 Management Interfaces n n nh hh rn 2 14 Alarm Input and Output 2 14 SNMP and Telnet over 10BaseT llle 2 14 SNMP and Telnet over In band Management eese 2 16 IP BOrwarding crise eit ftr er a Pe zoe per derbi ed hd ebbe e set 2 16 Terminal Sever sci Sy ba AINA UTD RP MAEAMER RR OBRA AN GR Anna 2 16 4 Network Timing lec Rr Rr RR ERR mona RES RIA Rom hi RR RR RR RU m gin 2 17 A m 2 17 5 Network Connections oorr aa e e a a a ee 2 17 Cable Specifications csee ah aa aag wakas esto oe ERR NG a e a a ei aaa 2 18 slc TIE E Y 2 19 HDX Shelf Connection AA AA den es 2 20 O EE E AER nG 2 21 Cable Routing AA A vac Ya eee tate o uem 2 22 6 Test Access Support eer een vaga ated a a dew qu mia uu dram 2 24 Metallic Test Access Interface
231. l fuse for the Fan Assembly exists on the bay fuse panel use the fuse on the rear of the Fan Assembly instead CAUTION Verify that the located fuse is the correct fuse Pulling the wrong fuse may remove power from an active transmission system and result in service affecting problems 6 Remove the Fan Assembly fuse Using the fuse extractor if necessary remove the Fan Assembly fuse from the bay fuse panel If no bay fuse exists for the Fan Assembly remove the fuse from the rear of the Fan Assembly instead 7 Verify that the system Alarm Log menu shows the Fan Assembly alarm 61181918L1 1B 7 159 Section 7 Detailed Level Procedures Total Access HDX System Manual DLP 792 Verifying the Fan Assembly Alarm Connection to the PCU 10 11 5 Check the system Alarm Log menu to verify that an active alarm has appeared which has the description EXTN input 1 associated with it Verify that the alarm level matches the user program mable level assigned during the installation procedure MINOR is the default level for this alarm If no alarm appears check the alarm wiring between the Fan Assembly and the Total Access shelf wiring details are given in DLP 711 Replace the Fan Assembly fuse that was removed in Step 6 Verify that the system Alarm Log menu shows the alarm has cleared The original EXTN input 1 Active Alarm line will remain in the Alarm Log but should no longer be reversed video A new line should b
232. larm Relay Output Connections to the PCU Total Access HDX System Manual 7 162 CAUTION Electronic modules can be damaged by static electrical discharge Before handling modules wear an antistatic discharge wrist strap to prevent dam age to electronic components Place modules in antistatic packing mate rial when transporting or storing When working on modules always place them on an approved antistatic mat that is electrically grounded 61181918L1 1B Total Access HDX System Manual Detailed Level Procedures Section 7 Verifying the Alarm Relay Output Connections to the PCU DLP 793 DLP 793 Perform the following steps in order 4 PROCEDURE 1 Connect the HDX System craft interface If not already connected to the shelf s craft interface either with a VT100 compatible terminal or with a PC running VT100 emulation software use the procedure in DLP 715 to connect to the craft interface Alternately if the shelf is part of a management cluster connected to the local network a PC connected to the network can be used to Telnet into the shelf 2 Logon to the HDX System For details refer to DLP 716 3 Go to the Primary Controller Unit s Test Alarm Relays menu a From the Total Access Main menu select option 1 System Controller and press ENTER b From the System Controller menu select option 4 Test and press ENTER c From the Test menu select option 1 Test Alarm Relays and press ENTER 4 Configure t
233. ling modules wear an antistatic discharge wrist strap to prevent dam age to electronic components Place modules in antistatic packing mate rial when transporting or storing When working on modules always place them on an approved antistatic mat that is electrically grounded 7 25 Section 7 Detailed Level Procedures Total AccessHDX System Manual DLP 521 Flush mounting the Shelves Heat Baffles and Fans DLP 521 Perform the following steps in order 5 PROCEDURE Mounting Bracket Attaching the mounting brackets to the Total Access chassis requires four screws on each side these screws are supplied with the unit 1 For flush mounting on the rack use a 2 phillips head screwdriver and attach the mounting brackets with the flanges facing rearward on the rear mounting holes Install Shelves 2 After attaching the mounting brackets to the Total Access chassis sides use the appropriate screws for the CO rack type and mount the Total Access chassis in the rack For flush mount systems the Total Access chassis must be mounted from the rear of the rack with mounting bracket flanges facing rearward NOTE Other orientations will require either mounting from the front or rear and depend on the rack type installed in the CO or MTU and the standard operating procedures established by the CO or MTU location 3 Using four screws appropriate for the CO or MTU rack or RT cabinet and an appropriate screwdriver s
234. llaneous Equipment 1181003L1 Total Access 23 Inch Heat Baffle and Fiber Tray 61181003L1 22 61181003L1 5 1181006L1 Total Access 23 Inch Fan Assembly 61181006L1 22 61181006L1 5 1183050L1 Total Access 3050 Filter Pack 61183050L1 22 N A 1181004L2 Total Access 3000 Dual BNC Adaptor Module 61181004L2 22 61181004L2 5 1181926L1 Total Access 3050 3K Short Cable 61181926L1 22 N A 1181012L1 8 Port Ethernet Hub N A 61181012L1 5 1181927L2 HDX System Interconnection Kit N A N A 1181952L1 Total Access MUX Blank Faceplate N A N A 1181953L1 Blank Face Panel N A N A Available Total Access 3050 Streaker Test Access Module TAG TAG from TAG Documents Documents ST TA3050S 61181918L1 1B Total Access HDX System Manual System Description Section 1 Total Access 3000 Chassis The Total Access 3000 chassis P N 1181001L1 houses the management cell switch modules and access modules The compact chassis includes all the features necessary for total system functioning including provisioning protection monitoring alarm status and optical fiber routing The single multifunction backplane provides for a variety of system arrangements The Total Access 3000 system is compliant with all applicable NEBS Level 3 and UL 60950 requirements All modules are inserted and removed from the front of the system Depending on whether the Total Access 3000 is used as the HDX System Primary or Expansion shelf the far left slot is designated for the Shelf Controller
235. llation NTP 020 Flush mounting the Shelves Heat Baffles and Fans DLP 521 Mid mounting the Shelves Heat Baffles and Fans DLP 522 Expansion Controller Unit ECU Installation DLP 526 Primary Controller Unit PCU Replacement NTP 023 Primary Controller Unit PCU Replacement DLP 523 HDX System Modules Installation NTP 024 DS3 Primary Switch Module Installation DLP 524 Expansion Switch Module ESM Installation DLP 525 Octal ADSL Access Module Installation DLP 561 Metallic Test Controller Installation DLP 527 xDSL Splitter Module with Test Access DLP 528 Saving the System Configuration Archive DLP 729 Acceptance Test Central Office Installation Acceptance Test Procedure DLP 854 Provisioning Provisioning the Octal ADSL Access Module DLP 761 Setting IP Parameters for an PCU DLP 789 Setting System Security Settings in the PCU DLP 797 Provisioning an In band Management PVC Connection DLP 799 Provisioning PVC Connections for a DS3 Primary Switch Module DLP 800 Maintenance Removing and Replacing the Rear Plastic Guard DLP 701 Connecting a Primary and Secondary T1 Clock DLP 703 61181918L1 1B vii IXL 001 Task Index List Total Access HDX System Manual Find the Required Task in the List Below For details refer to Connecting Metallic Test Access Equipment to the Total Access 3050 DLP 785 Connecting the Total Access 3000 and Total Access 3050 DLP 801 Connecting MDF to the T
236. llation procedures 2 PREREQUISITE PROCEDURES Before beginning the installation described in this DLP the installer should thoroughly review the document PREP 405 Preparing for Chassis Installation in Section 4 Based on PREP 405 the installer will know which steps of this NTP will be required for the intended use of the Total Access chassis To comply with UL1950 requirements the following steps must be adhered to Connect to a reliably grounded 48 VDC source which is electrically isolated from the AC source A readily accessible disconnect device that is suitably approved and rated shall be incorporated in the fixed wiring The branch circuit overcurrent protection shall be a fuse or circuit breaker rated 48 VDC minimum 30 A maximum This product is intended for installation in Restricted Access Locations Only This unit shall be installed in accordance with the requirements of NEC NFPA 70 Instructions stating the proper methods for grounding shall be included within the guidelines of the installation practice 3 TOOLS REQUIRED The tools required for installation of the Total Access chassis are Wire wrap tool 2 phillips head screwdriver 1 phillips head screwdriver Straight slot screwdriver Multimeter Crimping tool for power lugs 61181918L1 1B 7 23 Section 7 Detailed Level Procedures DLP 521 Flush mounting the Shelves Heat Baffles and Fans Total AccessHDX System Manual Wire strip
237. llie 1 12 Figure 1 5 PCU Frorit Pariel ose a de ia da tai dated balls ela ea 1 14 Figure 1 6 ECU Front Panel sis ce ec eae ees EE e XU hd bce bee 1 16 Figure 1 7 DS3 Primary Switch Module paa G eos cennera eee eee 1 18 Figure 1 8 Expansion Switch Module 0 000 eee eae 1 20 Figure 1 9 Octal ADSL na ds SN es ae A ls LA Alla Aa VES 1 21 Figure 1 10 Metallic Test Controller coco 1 23 Figure 1 11 XDSL Splitter Module W MMTA etess mi pek oE eee 1 24 Figure 1 12 XDSL Splitter Module Connections 00 ee 1 25 Figure 1 13 Heat Baffle and Fiber Tray 0 2 0 ccc tee 1 26 Figure 1 14 Heat Baffle Operation 0 0 00 en 1 27 Figure 1 15 Total Access 23 Inch Fan Assembly 0 00 cette eee 1 28 Figure 1 16 Total Access 3050 to Total Access 3050 Cable Assembly 1 29 Figure 1 17 Total Access 8 Port Ethernet Hub tee 1 30 Figure 1 18 BNC VO Module scr seta ea tee Rey eda ey hea eee 1 31 Figure 1 19 Total Access 3050 Streaker TAM 02 ee eee 1 32 Figure 1 20 HDX Bay Configuration Front 1344 Lines llle eese 1 33 Figure 1 21 HDX Bay Configuration Rear 1344 Lines eee 1 34 TABLES Table 1 1 HDX System Components een 1 9 1 2 61181918L1 1B Total Access HDX System Manual System Description Section 1 1 SYSTEM OVERVIEW General Overview ADTRAN s High Density eXpansion HDX System integrates ADTRAN s industry leading l
238. locks see Figure 2 3 Access Module in Slot 1 Access Module in Slot 28 1 544 mHz B IN Primary DS1 C IN econ DS1 Cloc 1 544 mHz Figure 2 3 Clocking Functions DS1 Clock For DS3 applications the system provides for primary and secondary DS1 timing sources The primary clock should be connected to P18 P11 labeled B IN The secondary clock should be connected to P24 P13 labeled EXTCLK C IN The multiplexer modules contain all necessary circuitry for proper operation See Figure 1 2 Flags C2 and C3 in Section 1 System Description 5 NETWORK CONNECTIONS The HDX System supports two different physical mediums for network connections copper pairs and coaxial cables Use of one type of network connection does not necessarily preclude simultaneous use of another type of network connection 61181918L1 1B 2 17 Section 2 Engineering Guidelines Total Access HDX System Manual Cable Specifications All coaxial cable for HDX System s DS3 signals shall meet the following minimum specifications The coaxial cable shall have characteristic impedance of 75 ohm e Nominal mutual capacitance shall not exceed 20 4 pF foot The cable shall conform to ANSI standard T1 102 1993 pulse mask definition The standard reference cable is WECO Type 728A at 450 feet Approved cable types include the following WECO 728A Lucent 728B Lucent 734A Belden 9231 Belden 1809A Lucent type 735A cable may be use
239. lorida For connecting the chassis to a standard DSX 3 cross connect the following TSI part numbers may be used 734 Coax Cable with BNC connectors on both ends CA1 xxxx X44 734 1 734 Coax Cable with BNC connector on one end only CA1 xxxx X41 734 1 735 Coax Cable with BNC connectors on both ends CA1 xxxx X34 735 1 735 Coax Cable with BCN connector on one end only CA1 xxxx X31 735 1 where xxxx represents the length of the cable in feet All coaxial cable for Total Access 3000 DS3 and STS 1 signals shall meet the following minimum specifi cations The coaxial cable shall have characteristic impedance of 75 Ohm Nominal mutual capacitance shall not exceed 20 4 pF foot The cable shall conform to ANSI standard T1 102 1993 pulse mask definition The standard reference cable is WECO Type 728A at 450 feet Approved cable types include the following WECO 728A Lucent 728B Lucent 734A Belden 9231 Belden 1809A Lucent type 735A cable may be used up to a maximum length of 250 feet 4 6 61181918L1 1B Total Access HDX System Manual Section 4 Site Preparation Preparing for Chassis Installation PREP 405 7 MAIN DISTRIBUTION FRAME MDF CONSIDERATIONS Most central office applications of Total Access 3000 require the chassis to be connected to the side of the MDF to provide loop side cross connects to customer loops The exact wiring requirements for MDF connections are determined by the specific syste
240. ls refer to DLP 789 Install the PCU The Total Access 3000 Primary Controller Unit PCU is the focal point for all management functions carried out by the shelf and has the greatest number of considerations when installing The individual steps in this section detail these considerations for a successful and trouble free HDX System installation The PCU provides local and remote management access to access modules and multiplexers It can be identified by its part number P N 1181918L 1 which is printed on the front of the front panel underneath the PCU label The PCU also has a built in Ethernet interface for SNMP management The PCU can also be accessed by modem through the ADMIN port J31 and front panel craft interface for menus 26 Install the PCU in the first or Primary Total Access 3000 chassis 61181918L1 1B Total Access HDX System Manual Detailed Level Procedures Section 7 HDX System Installation DLP 520 CAUTION Electronic modules can be damaged by static electrical discharge Before handling modules wear an antistatic discharge wrist strap to prevent dam age to electronic components Place modules in antistatic packing mate rial when transporting or storing When working on modules always place them on an approved antistatic mat that is electrically grounded NOTE At this point in the procedure power should not be applied a Pull the ejector on the bottom of the PCU front panel from its
241. m age to electronic components Place modules in antistatic packing mate rial when transporting or storing When working on modules always place them on an approved antistatic mat that is electrically grounded 61181918L1 1B 7 55 Section 7 Detailed Level Procedures Total Access HDX System Manual DLP 527 Metallic Test Controller Installation DLP 527 Perform the Steps Below in the Order Listed 4 PROCEDURE 1 Determine if an RS 232 cable has been installed between The Total Access 3000 chassis network management port labeled NTWK MGMT and the Total Access 3050 chassis administration port labeled ADMIN For details refer to DLP 784 NOTE The RS 232 cable used to connect the Total Access 3050 chassis adminis tration port to the Total Access 3000 network management port must be a male to male null modem type cable or equipped with a null modem adapter 2 Unscrew the thumbscrew at the top of the Total Access 3050 chassis door and swing the door open 3 Pull the ejector on the top of the MTC front panel from its stowed or closed position 4 Insert the MTC into the first or far left access slot marked MTC of the Total Access 3050 chassis NOTE The MTC Module can only be inserted into the first or far left access slot labeled MTC of the Total Access 3050 shelf 5 Gently but firmly push the MTC into the slot on the shelf Simultaneous thumb pressure at the top and bottom of the module will e
242. m application of each shelf RT and MDU MTU applica tions require similar wiring for cable runs Wiring Connections to the MDF To connect the shelf to a standard MDF Terminal Block use 24 AWG 25 pair twisted shielded trans mission cables with 50 pin female connectors on the chassis end The connector at the chassis end must have the cable entering the connector perpendicular to the backplane T style Cables for this application may be ordered to length from a number of cable vendors The number of cables required is determined by the system application Refer to Section 3 Application Guidelines to determine the MDF requirements The MDF cable connections to the HDX System are made on the Total Access 3050 chassis The POTS and POTS ADSL system connections are made via twenty 50 pin amphenol connectors on the Total Access 3050 chassis backplane These connectors are in ten groups of two and each group has one connector to the PSTN network and one POTS ADSL to the customer Each connector has 24 pair of either POTS or POTS ADLSL connections and the twenty fifth pair is a straight through connection Since each slot on the Total Access 3000 chassis contains an Octal ADSL Access Module that corresponds to an xDSL Splitter Module in the Total Access 3050 chassis each connector position has the POTS LINE connections from 3 slots The connectors are labeled by the sequential port numbers on the shelf For example the first connector pair is l
243. mer loop connections and the connections to the PSTN The connections are made from twenty 50 pin amphenol connectors on the Total Access 3050 chassis backplane ten POTS connectors and ten LINE connectors Figure 3 2 Connection from Total Access 3000 Chassis to the Total Access 3050 Chassis 3 6 61181918L1 1B Total Access HDX System Manual Application Guidelines Section 3 High Density Expansion ADSL APP 320 4 CONNECTIONS ATM DS3 NETWORK FEED The ATM DS3 network connection is made via a Dual BNC Adaptor Module P N 1181004L2 which is installed on the lower right corner of the backplane see Figure 3 3 For more information concerning the installation of the electrical DS3 network feed proceed to NTP 024 can cua CBA CBA caa oom ooo nnn mun 1000 1000 9000 000 000 5 0005 000 0005 71000 90000 000 000 000 O 000 oo o sosoo ooo 000 000 o 000 000 Seo ooo 000 000 200 000 000 2000010 000 ooo 000 000 000 282 a 39999 000 o 000 o 000 O 000 o 000 o gt 9989 000 000 000 00 000 000 E 00000 000 000 000 000 000 90000 000 0000000 0000000 1000 11000 11000 9999 ooo ooo 000 000 000 82858 00000 0000000 0000000 000 000 000 00000 000 000 000 000 000 000 90 ooo ooo ooo ooo ooo ooo 000 000 oo 000 000 000 00 000 ooo 000 oo ooo ooo oo 000 000 000 000 ooo 000 20999 000 000 000 000 000 000 H 6900 c ooo ooo o oo 000 ooo 90000 5 2000 2000 2000 2000 2000 21000 200 n 99990
244. mps 16 AWG 10 amps 5 8 to 10 amps 14 AWG 15 amps 10 to 15 amps 12 AWG 20 amps Frame Ground Wire Fuse Size Used for Power Input Recommended Wire Gauge 10 amps 16 AWG 15 amps 14 AWG 20 amps 12 AWG T Recommendations apply to wiring from Total Access 3000 system to fuse panel in same bay T Recommendation based upon the use of 16 AWG wire with a minimum bundled ampacity rating of 15 amps i Recommendation based upon the use of 16 AWG Wire with a minimum free air ampacity rating of 30 amps 2 6 61181918L1 1B Total Access HDX System Manual Engineering Guidelines Section 2 For single system deployment use Table 2 9 to calculate current draw Table 2 9 Current Draw Worksheet at 48 VDC Part Number Equipment Qty X Paan bbae ae a 1181918L1 PCU X 0 109 1181919L1 ECU X 0 005 1181041L3 PSM X 0 460 1181046L 1 ESM X 0 260 1181405L1 Octal ADSL X 0 289 1183001L1 Chassis with Splitters and MTC X 0 146 Test Active 1181006L1 Fan Assembly X 0 200 Total 61181918L1 1B 2 7 Section 2 Engineering Guidelines Total Access HDX System Manual Power Dissipation Considerations Power Dissipation for a HDX System Table 2 10 illustrates the heat dissipation of each module Table 2 10 through Table 2 12 illustrate the heat dissipation for the primary expansion and Total Access 3050 Splitter Shelf at 48 VDC Table 2 14 provides the heat dis
245. n the Total Access 3000 chassis and the Total Access 3050 chassis see Figure 2 6 is accomplished with a set of eight cables P N 1181926L1 The cable group is comprised of eight separately sheathed cables of lengths varying from 24 in to 64 in Each cable has a 64 pin amphenol connector on each end White plastic tape labels near the ends of each cable identify both the chassis TA3000 or TA3050 and pair designation Pair 1 to Pair 8 After insertion into the appropriate connector two hold down screws are used to secure the amphenol connection to the Total Access 3050 chassis One screw and a tie wrap secures the connector to the Total Access 3000 chassis These screws are included with the cable assembly and the wire ties are included with the Total Access 3000 Figure 2 6 Connection from Total Access 3000 Chassis to Total Access 3050 Chassis 2 20 61181918L1 1B Total Access HDX System Manual Engineering Guidelines Section 2 DS3 A Coaxial network interface is used for supporting high speed electrical interfaces such as DS3 and is delivered through a coaxial cable adapter see Figure 2 7 installed on the rear side of the backplane of the primary shelf labeled Adapter Module and located at J34 This backplane mounted coaxial adapter inter faces exclusively with the two multiplexer slots in the primary shelf NG Figure 2 7 BNC Adaptor Module A single interface coaxial adapter Dual BNC Adaptor
246. ndicated there 7 132 61181918L1 1B DLP 785 Connecting Metallic Test Access Equipment to the Total Access 3050 1 INTRODUCTION Metallic test bus access is accomplished through wiring into the connector labeled P29 on the right side of the Total Access 3050 chassis backplane One bus will be the equipment EQP_T EQP_R bus that looks into the HDX System hardware The other bus will be the facility FAC_T FAC_R bus that looks out onto the facility loop 2 PREREQUISITE PROCEDURES For ease of installation temporarily remove the RS 232 cable connected to the Total Access 3050 chassis ADMIN port prior to installation Additionally if installation is prior to system turn up the amphenol cable connected to Pair 1 may also be temporarily removed 3 TOOLS AND MATERIALS REQUIRED Sufficient quantity of shielded cable or wire to reach from the equipment test head to the Total Access 3050 chassis Wire strippers Wire wrap tool Cable tie wraps WARNING To prevent electrical shock do not install equipment in a wet location or during a lightning storm CAUTION Electronic modules can be damaged by static electrical discharge Before handling modules wear an antistatic discharge wrist strap to prevent dam age to electronic components Place modules in antistatic packing mate rial when transporting or storing When working on modules always place them on an approved antistatic mat that 1s electricall
247. nge View View View View Change Telnet Port Telnet Dead Client View Change View View View View Change Detection System Controller Provisioning Network Management Domain Name System DNS DNS Lookup System View Change View View View View Change Primary DNS Server View Change View View View View Change Secondary DNS Server View Change View View View View Change Domain Search List View Change View View View View Change System Controller Provisioning SNMP Provisioning Trap Host 1 IP Submenu Submenu Submenu Submenu Submenu Trap Host 2 IP Submenu Submenu Submenu Submenu Submenu Trap Host 3 IP Submenu Submenu Submenu Submenu Submenu Trap Host 4 IP Submenu Submenu Submenu Submenu Submenu HDX Traps View Change View View View View Change System Name View Change View View View View Change System Location View Change View View View View Change System Contact View Change View View View View Change Read Community View Change N A View View View Change Write Community View Change N A View View View Change NonVol Cardsat View Change View View View View Change System Controller Provisioning SNMP Trap Host 1 Trap Host 1 IP View Change View View View View Change Trap Host 1 Method View Change View View View View Change Trap Host 1 Confirmation View Change View View View View Change Trap Host 1 Initial Time View Change View View View View Change Out Trap Host 1 Retry Limit View Change View View View View Change 61181918L1 1B 7 203 Section 7 Detailed Level Procedur
248. nol connector s cable ends It is easier to thread the wire ties through the anchors while the backplane guard is removed ADTRAN recommends using the wire ties to secure the 64 pin 50 pin amphenol connectors in place Thread the wire ties through the anchors while the rear plastic guard is off Wire Clocks Total Access 3000 accepts TI inputs from an external timing source Refer to Section 3 Application Guidelines to determine whether this step is appropriate for the intended HDX System application An optional Stratum 3E Clock Module can be installed to provide holdover timing in the event that the provisioned timing source fails For details refer to DLP 559 12 Connect the TI clock An optional external TI clock input may be installed when using SONET PSMs For details refer to DLP 703 Wire Test Access 13 Connect Metallic Test Access to Total Access 3050 The Total Access 3050 has a two pair EQP T EQP R FAC T FAC R common test access bus is provided for metallic test access to all customer loops and is labeled SPLITTER TEST ACCESS BUS P29 on the backplane If the Total Access 3050 will use these testing features wiring will be required to gain access to the test leads Also if MTA is required the MTC P N 1183010L1 and MTA capable access modules are also required For details refer to DLP 785 Connect Total Access 3000 to Total Access 3050 Each Total Access 3000 chassis must be connected to its corresp
249. nsure a good seat of the pins into the backplane connector 6 Secure the HDX in place by pushing in on the ejector latch 7 Observe the PWR LED Green indicates no error conditions and power to the shelf 8 Close and secure the door of the Total Access 3050 chassis The door should be closed for normal operation NOTE For Total Access 3050 MTC provisioning information refer to the Instal lation and Maintenance Practice P N 61183010L1 5A 7 56 61181918L1 1B Total Access HDX System Manual Detailed Level Procedures Section 7 Metallic Test Controller Installation DLP 527 5 FOLLOW UP PROCEDURE Once this procedure is complete return to the procedure which called out this DLP and continue with the tasks indicated 61181918L1 1B 7 57 Section 7 Detailed Level Procedures Total Access HDX System Manual DLP 527 Metallic Test Controller Installation This page is intentionally blank 7 58 61181918L1 1B DLP 528 xDSL Splitter Module with Test Access 1 INTRODUCTION This procedure provides step by step instructions for the installation of the Total Access 3050 xDSL Splitter Module with Test Access xDSL Splitter Module into the Total Access 3050 chassis The Splitter Module is designed to be used in a Total Access 3050 chassis to combine split POTS and ADSL services The xDSL Splitter Module should be used when a Metallic Test Controller MTC is deployed in the Total Access 3050 Splitter Shelf By adding the Tot
250. nts Place modules in antistatic packing mate rial when transporting or storing When working on modules always place them on an approved antistatic mat that is electrically grounded 61181918L1 1B HDX System Manual Section 6 Non Trouble Clearing Procedures HDX System Modules Installation NTP 024 NTP 024 Perform the following steps in order 4 PROCEDURE Step For details refer to 1 Install the DS3 Primary Switch Modules DLP 524 2 Install the Expansion Switch Module DLP 525 3 Install the Octal ADSL Access Module DLP 561 4 Install the Metallic Test Controller DLP 527 5 Install the xDSL Splitter Module with Test Access DLP 528 5 FOLLOW UP PROCEDURES Once this procedure is complete return to the procedure which referred to this NTP and continue with the tasks indicated 61181918L1 1B 6 17 Section 6 Non Trouble Clearing Procedures Total Access HDX System Manual NTP 024 HDX System Modules Installation This page is intentionally blank 6 18 61181918L1 1B Section 7 Detailed Level Procedures This section provides guidelines for network designers who are incorporating a HDX System into their networks CONTENTS DLP 520 HDX System Installation ccc RI IHR n 7 5 DLP 521 Flush mounting the Shelves Heat Baffles and Fans 0 eee 7 23 DLP 522 Mid mounting the Shelves Heat Baffles and Fans cece 7 29 DLP 523 Primary Controller Unit PC
251. nual Appendix B Warranty This page is intentionally blank B 2 61181918L1 1B Notes
252. nually or automatically store the system configuration for use during disaster recovery In addition to its use for fast recovery of system provisioning in the case of flood or fire the SCA System Configuration Archive system may be used to clone baseline system configurations to new installations so that only a few system specific provisioning options need to be altered This can significantly reduce initial setup time The system administrator may access and control the SCA system using EMS terminal menus or SNMP The administrator can perform manual saves of SCA information to a TFTP server or can schedule automatic save operations for certain times of the day Scheduling save operations will help to reduce simultaneous SCA system generated network traffic The SCA system save operation saves backup information from all modules present in the HDX system including the PCU cell switch modules and access modules The restore operation allows the adminis trator to control which modules provisioning options are to be restored NOTE SCA menus and operations are available only to privileged administrator level accounts 61181918L1 1B PRELIMINARY 7 107 Section 7 Detailed Level Procedures Total Access HDX System Manual DLP 729 Saving the System Configuration Archive 2 PREREQUISITE PROCEDURES The following procedures must be completed prior to configuring the SCA system in the PCU If necessary refer to the appropriate doc
253. o 999 o 999 o 999 o Bad o daa o 999 990 o 999 o 809 o 999 o 900 o 989 o 209 o 299 o dag a 099 gooo 22228 uk 999 dag boo ooo 988 boo ses 999 S00 ooo ooo oo0 000 999 Soo boo oo9 088 999 dog boo asa ooa 9999 32382 28382 o Ses o09 goo o99 099 Sos O08 S98 goo Sos boo 909 Ses 300 989 2o Soo Ses see 989 Beo Ses O09 228 coso esses 33532 0 Ses 090 858 o 999 009 999 009 880 S00 099 099 099 Ses 909 999 Seo goo Ses 009 999 Seo Soo 099 090 9999 22238 38833 ese 099 000 0 099 099 099 000 Sco ooo See Ses 009 908 008 999 ooo ses 909 000 280 999 999 sos 998 9999 29335 EHH Boe gos oam pop Sep oom sam oom Bom oom oom Bom gt pnm Ses eee ogm gom baa Bom oom pom Bom onm ooe 900000008666 0000000000000 b f o 23 Inch Chassis Figure 1 2 Total Access 3000 Backplane 1 6 Total Access HDX System Manual System Description Section 1 Network Interfaces Flag D Switched Network Access The high speed switched interface DS3 ATM is available through standard coax cable connec tions For a nonredundant network connection Dual BNC Adaptor module P N 1181004L2 is required NOTE The DS3 network connection is only valid on the primary shelf Loop Interfaces Flag E Loop Access Loop side access is achieved via 64 pin amphenol connectors that are connected to the Total Access 3050 chassis Management Interfaces Flag F Network Management
254. ocedures Section 7 HDX System Installation DLP 520 q From the Provisioning menu select MUX Module and press ENTER r From the MUX Module menu select MUX Auto Provisioning and press ENTER s Enable or Disable MUX Auto Provisioning by selecting the corresponding number and pressing ENTER t From the MUX Module menu select Module Auto Provisioning and press ENTER u Enable or Disable Module Auto Provisioning by selecting the corresponding number and pressing ENTER The current menu will now be the MUX Module menu v To return to the Total Access 3000 Main menu press Esc 34 Provision the IP network settings on the PCU If the Total Access 3000 chassis is to be connected to an IP network for Telnet TFTP or SNMP management there are several IP parameters that need to be set for the shelf to communicate with the network For details refer to DL P 789 Install the ECU The Total Access 3000 Expansion Controller Unit ECU provides a communication channel for each expansion shelf to communicate with the primary shelf 35 Install an ECU in the each of the Expansion Total Access 3000 chassis CAUTION Electronic modules can be damaged by static electrical discharge Before handling modules wear an antistatic discharge wrist strap to prevent dam age to electronic components Place modules in antistatic packing mate rial when transporting or storing When working on modules always place them on an approve
255. ode Product Revision 2 Service Mode Main Menu Soft Revisi 2 11 413 oftware Revision 3 G dmt 4 G lite 3 Rate Mode 1 Fixed 2 Rate Adaptive 4 Line Type 1 Interleave 2 Fast 1 Enabled 5 Link Down Alarm 2 Disabled 6 ATU C Line Profile 1 Target SNR Margin 2 Max SNR Margin 3 Min SNR Margin 4 Fast Channel Min TX Rate 5 Fast Channel Max TX Rate 6 Interleave Channel Min TX Rate 7 ATU R Line Profile I 7 Interleave Channel Max TX Rate 8 Interleave Channel Max Delay LOSs Threshold 1 8 ATU C Alarm Profile 2 ESs Threshold 1 Line Provisioning 3 LOLs Threshold 1 LOSs Threshold 2 ESs Threshold 3 LPRs Threshold 9 ATU R Alarm Profile 2 Provisioning 1 In Service 2 Card Service State 2 Out of Service Unassigned 3 Out of Service Maintenance 3 Reset to Factory Default 1 Y MODEM Update 4 Software Update 2 TFTP Update 5 Reboot Card 1 ADSL Status 3 Status Interval Date aa Interval Start Time 3 Bit Allocation Table Interval Seconds Elapsed 4 Self Test Results Intitialization Attempts Loss of Link Seconds Errored Secs Severely Errored Secs 1 Alarm Status Register Loss of Signal Secs Loss of Frame Secs 1 15 Min Performance Loss of Power Secs 2 1 Day Performance Corrected Blocks FEC Uncorrected Blocks CV 4 Alarms 5 Performance Global Line Selection from any screen S setline N nextline P previous line
256. of the shelf Simulta neous thumb pressure at the top above the Power LED and at the bottom of the module will ensure a good seat of the pins into the backplane connector Push the ejector up and closed against the module front panel g Allow the self test LED sequence to complete Once this sequence is complete the LEDs reflect the true state of the hardware By default the PWR LED will be amber and the LOOP LEDs will be red This is due to the service state being set to Out of Service Maintenance by default for the access module as well as the loops 3 Provision the Octal ADSL Access Module a Logon to the system For details refer to DLP 716 b From the Total Access Main menu select option 4 Access Modules and press ENTER c From the Access Modules menu select the slot number of the desired Octal ADSL Access Module and press ENTER d From the Octal ADSL Access Module Main menu select option 2 Provisioning and press ENTER e Provision the Octal ADSL Access Module as appropriate For details refer to DLP 761 61181918L1 1B 7 65 Section 7 Detailed Level Procedures Total Access HDX System Manual DL P 561 Octal ADSL Access Module Installation 6 FOLLOW UP PROCEDURE Please proceed to the appropriate NTP for the installation of the access modules to be installed in the Total Access 3000 chassis 7 66 61181918L1 1B DLP 701 Removing and Replacing the Rear Plastic Guard 1 INTRODUCTION Removal of the r
257. ole O Tang A yo B D eom a d t n 711 TOTAL ACCESS I Lo l CHASSIS al E Es 2 Ha a 33 tople pe P3 P21 P1 EC NO C NC NO C NC NO C NC NO C NC NO C NC NO C NC NO C NC NO CNC 0 ololo o o o o o o o ojo o ooo 9 AUX1 AUX2 CRIV MAJ MIN V CRIA MAJA MIN A Figure 7 5 Total Access 3000 Fan Connections and Alarm Contacts 61181918L1 1B 7 89 Section 7 Detailed Level Procedures Total Access HDX System Manual DLP 711 Connecting a Fan Assembly Alarm 3 Using standard telco cross connect wire determine and cut the length required to reach from the Total Access Fan Assembly to the AUX1 header Allow length for 1 to 1 1 2 inches for wire wrap and routing out to the right from the Fan Assembly and the alarm header 4 Using wire strippers strip 1 to 1 1 2 inches from one end of each wire 5 Using a wire wrap gun wire wrap one strand to the B input of the Total Access 3000 AUX1 header P22 P24 Connect the other end to the Fan Assembly ALM B terminal using an appropriately sized crimp on terminal and the ALM B screw on the fan terminal strip 6 Wire wrap one end of the other strand to the A input of the Total Access 3000 AUX1 header P22 P24 Connect the other end to the Fan Assembly ALM A terminal using an appropriately sized crimp on terminal and the ALM A screw on the fan terminal strip 7 Replace the plastic guard over the backplane For details refer to DLP 701
258. ols required for installation of the Total Access 3000 shelf are Wire wrap tool 2 phillips head screwdriver e 1 phillips head screwdriver Straight slot screwdriver Multimeter 61181918L1 1B 7 29 Section 7 Detailed Level Procedures DLP 522 Mid mounting the Shelves Heat Baffles and Fans Total Access HDX System Manual Crimping tool for power lugs Wire strippers Side cutters 3 16 inch wrench 4 MATERIALS REQUIRED 48 VDC up to 20 amp power source for the Total Access 3000 such as a rack mounted fuse and alarm panel or power board See Table 7 3 Table 7 3 Recommended Wire Gauge and Fuse Sizes Current Draw at 48 VDC Recommended Wire Gauge Recommended Fuse Size 2 6 to 5 8 amps 14 AWG 10 amps 5 8 to 10 amps 12 AWG 15 amps 10 to 15 amps 10 AWG 20 amps cabinet cabinet cabinet feed and return to the Total Access 3000 shelf 7 30 Insulated 6 gauge wire and lugs for frame ground Four 12 24 screws for mounting each Total Access 3000 chassis to the CO or MTU rack or the RT Four 12 24 screws for mounting each Heat Baffle and fiber tray to the CO or MTU rack or the RT Four 12 24 screws for mounting each Total Access 3050 chassis to the CO or MTU rack or the RT Shielded 2 wire twisted pair cross connect wire with drain such as AT amp T P7 wire Insulated 10 12 gauge wire and lugs for power connections in colors dictated by the CO for the battery
259. on 3 again to toggle the Major Audible Relay off d Verify that the alarm indication clears on the Concentrator Check the Major Visual Relay a Select menu option 4 to toggle the Major Visual Relay on b Verify that the Alarm Relay Concentrator indicates a major visual alarm for the proper shelf location c Select menu option 4 again to toggle the Major Visual Relay off d Verify that the alarm indication clears on the Concentrator Check the Minor Audible Relay a Select menu option 5 to toggle the Minor Audible Relay on b Verify that the Alarm Relay Concentrator indicates a minor audible alarm for the proper shelf location c Select menu option 5 again to toggle the Minor Audible Relay off d Verify that the alarm indication clears on the Concentrator Check the Minor Visual Relay a Select menu option 6 to toggle the Minor Visual Relay on b Verify that the Alarm Relay Concentrator indicates a minor visual alarm for the proper shelf location c Select menu option 6 again to toggle the Minor Visual Relay off d Verify that the alarm indication clears on the Concentrator Logout of the HDX System a Press the Esc key until the top level shelf menu is displayed b Select menu option 7 to logout of the shelf Repeat the Test for Each Shelf Repeat steps 5 11 for each shelf Restore the Alarm Relay Concentrator If the Alarm Relay Concentrator was re provisioned in step 4 restore the provisioning by
260. on Guidelines for the particular application or refer to the shelf installation diagram if one has already been prepared T1 Clock Ifa TI Clock input is required a wire run from the clock source to the bay must be provided Use a 22 AWG or 24 AWG shielded two wire cable with drain such as AT amp T P7 wire for this run 61181918L1 1B 4 5 Section 4 Site Preparation Total Access HDX System Manual PREP 405 Preparing for Chassis Installation 6 DSX CONSIDERATIONS Depending on the system application each chassis may require connections to the DSX 3 cross connect DSX 3 Ifa chassis is to be equipped with a standard DS3 Cell Switch Module or network fed DS3 Line Module a single position on the DSX 3 cross connect should be reserved for the shelf Two runs of coax cable should be routed from a position on the DSX 3 cross connect to the anticipated location of the shelf and termi nated with standard BNC connectors on the shelf end The cables should be labeled IN and OUT at the chassis end to indicate where they are connected on the DSX 3 cross connect Either standard 734 or 735 type coax cable is recommended depending on the cable run length listed in Table 4 1 Table 4 1 TSI Amphenol Cable Model Number for DSX 1 Applications Coax Cable Type Use for Run Lengths 734 lt 450 Feet 735 or 735A lt 250 Feet Cables designed for this application may be ordered to length through Telephone Services Inc TSI of F
261. on Submenu N A N A N A N A 7 200 61181918L1 1B Total Access HDX System Manual Detailed Level Procedures Section 7 Setting System Security Settings in the PCU DLP 797 Table 8 PCU User Account Privileges Continued Menu Items ADMIN READWRITE READONLY TEST CONFIG System Controller Provisioning General Management Ports Submenu Submenu Submenu Submenu Submenu Date View Change View View View View Change Time View Change View View View View Change Auto Logoff Submenu Submenu View Submenu Submenu Logoff Craft Port When View Change View View View View Change DTR Lost Restore Default View Change N A N A N A View Change Provisioning Security Administration Submenu N A N A N A N A Change S Current Account View Change View Change N A View Change View Change Password System Controller Provisioning General Management Ports Admin Port Submenu Submenu Submenu Submenu Submenu Craft Port Baud Rate View Change View Change View View Change View Change Interbank Comm Mode View Change View View View View Change Network Management Port View Change View View View View Change Mode System Controller Provisioning General Management Ports Admin Port Terminal Server amp Admin View Change View Change View View Change View Change Port Baud Rate Admin Port View Change View View View View Change Communications Use RTS CTS Har
262. on zu ohne ee KA LAND LES ee ee y 7 157 2 Prerequisite Procedures ees 7 157 3 Tools and Materials Required llli 7 157 4 Procedure ue BS NANA na atl dene Mb ETE ee LE s 7 159 5 Follow up Procedures ooooococo eee 7 160 Verifying the Alarm Relay Output Connections to the PCU 7 161 Te Introd ctlon sour a EE ee he aba Nb aA 7 161 2 Prerequisite Procedures lees 7 161 3 Tools and Materials Required llli 7 161 4 i Procedure osi aeq Iesu Dea deed d Sete bad eet ed e d bd 7 163 5 Follow up Procedures es 7 165 Verifying PCU Communications Over an IP LAN 0 c cece eee eee 7 167 Vo Introduction s e te WA Kana aa EROR eene HO HAN a e eR grad o Baas 7 167 2 Prerequisite Procedures sees 7 167 3 Tools and Materials Required llli 7 167 4 Procedure cuv cierta o A AAA MEDIIS VEN 7 169 5 Follow up Proced tres s prii ntaa upi ge Rte Gla KG dee Re dips S Rapt NAG 7 171 Upgrading the PCU Software 22 n e n n nnn 7 173 de Introduction 22 eese x RR ba et s 7 173 2 Prerequisite Procedures see 7 173 TETE dene m nt ee oats ars ENG PAN BAN BNG PALA BUNGA KANG teeny GAN IN ANG 7 173 YM d m 2 25 ox Hier AA LED A A A AE S A Pa 7 173 3 Tools and Materials Required ooo 7 174 4 POCO UA iia EU A A A A aia 7 175 Upgrading the PCU using TETP 2 eee 7 175 Upgrading the PCU Using the Ymodem Pr
263. onding Total Access 3050 chassis using a set of eight shielded 32 pair cables P N 1181926L1 with female amphenol connectors 14 Connect the Total Access 3000 to the Total Access 3050 For details refer to DLP 801 15 Replace the rear guard Using a 1 phillips head screwdriver replace the Plexiglass cover to the power terminals The power terminals are labeled TS1 and TS2 If the Total Access 3000 chassis has been installed step by step in 7 14 61181918L1 1B Total Access HDX System Manual Detailed Level Procedures Section 7 HDX System Installation DLP 520 the order presented in this NTP the large Plexiglass guard may be replaced at this time Follow on steps do not require access behind the guard For details refer to DLP 701 NOTE Wire tie anchors are pre installed on the backplane 64 pin 50 pin amphe nol connector s cable ends It is easier to thread the wire ties through the anchors while the backplane guard is removed ADTRAN recommends using the wire ties to secure the 64 pin 50 pin amphenol connectors in place Thread them through the anchors before replacing the rear plastic guard Connect PSTN to Total Access 3050 Fach Total Access 3050 is connected to the PSTN with ten straight in 50 pin female amphenol connectors 16 Connect the Total Access 3050 to the PSTN Connect MDF to Total Access 3050 The Total Access 3050 is connected to the MDF with ten straight in 50 pin female amphenol connectors 17
264. onitor Sessions 1 INHIBIT 2 ALLOW 1 Code Violation CP P 2 Errored Sec CP P 3 Sev Erred Sec CP P 4 Unavail Sec CP P 5 Sv Er Frame CP P 1 Code Violation CP P 2 Errored Sec CP P 3 Sev Erred Sec CP P 4 Unavail Second CP P 5 Sv Er Frame CP P 1 Code Violation CP P 2 Errored Sec CP P 3 Sev Erred Sec CP P 4 Unavail Sec CP P 5 Sv Er Frame CP P TX Cells RX Cells RX Cells w Header Errors N Next P Previous G Page S Search V View Names Status Enter Index 1 Code Violation L 2 Errored Sec L 3 Sev Erred Sec L 4 Loss of Sig Sec 5 Code Violation P P 6 Code Violation CP P 7 Errored Sec P P 8 Errored Sec CP P 9 Sev Erred Sec P P 10 Sev Erred Sec CP P 11 Unavail Sec P P 12 Unavail Sec CP P 13 Sv Er Frame Sec P Protection SW Count Code Violation L Errored Sec L Sev Erred Sec L Loss of Sig Sec L Code Violation P P Code Violation CP P Errored Sec P P Errored Sec CP P 9 Sev Erred Sec P P 10 Sev Erred Sec CP P 11 Unavail Sec P P 12 Unavail Sec CP P 13 Sv Er Frame P 14 Protection SW Count fx om fu o w 2 saaJ nusy y xipueddy seoipueddy enueja wa sAs X aH Total Access HDX System Manual Appendices Menu Trees Appendix A 1 In Service 1 Line Service State Unit Name 2 Out of Service Unassigned CLEI Code 3 Out of Service Maintenance 1 Configuration Part Number Serial Number 1 Multim
265. ons Only This unit shall be installed in accordance with the requirements of NEC NFPA 70 Instructions stating the proper methods for grounding shall be included within the guidelines of the installation practice 61181918L1 1B 6 3 Section 6 Non Trouble Clearing Procedures Total Access HDX System Manual NTP 020 HDX System Installation 3 TOOLS REQUIRED The tools required for installation of the Total Access 3000 shelf are Wire wrap tool 2 phillips head screwdriver e 1 phillips head screwdriver Straight slot screwdriver Multimeter Crimping tool for power lugs Wire strippers Side cutters 3 16 inch wrench 4 MATERIALS REQUIRED 48 VDC up to 20 amp power source for the Total Access 3000 such as a rack mounted fuse and alarm panel or power board See Table 6 1 Table 6 1 Recommended Wire Gauge and Fuse Sizes Current Draw at 48 VDC Recommended Wire Gauge Recommended Fuse Size 2 6 to 5 8 amps 14 AWG 10 Amps 5 8 to 10 amps 12 AWG 15 Amps 10 to 15 amps 10 AWG 20 Amp Four 12 24 screws for mounting each Total Access 3000 shelf to the CO or MTU rack or the RT cabinet Four 12 24 screws for mounting each Heat Baffle to the CO or MTU rack or the RT cabinet Four 12 24 screws for mounting each Total Access 3050 shelf to the CO or MTU rack or the RT cabinet Insulated 10 12 gauge wire and lugs for power connections in colors dictated by the CO for the battery feed and return to the T
266. ontroller menu select Provisioning and press ENTER From the Provisioning menu select System Administration and press ENTER From the Total Access Main menu select System Controller and press ENTER From the System Administration menu select Security Administration and press ENTER TID Total Access System Unacknowledged Alarms Users Currently Logged On 4 Num USER ACCESS TYPE FROM PORT 1 ADMIN TP Menu 172 22 108 157 23 2 ADMIN IP TL1 172 22 108 157 2001 3 abcdABCD12345678 Craft Menu 0 4 TEST IP TL1 172 22 108 157 2001 Selection to Terminate logoff N ext P revious 04 04 03 12 04 Unit Number Page LOGIN CONNECT TIME 25 7 1581 01 02 04 04 03 11 04 04 03 11 04 04 03 12 04 04 03 12 2 END OF LOG ON LIST l Gf 54 42 13 12 1 I Figure 7 33 Users Currently Logged On Menu From the Users Currently Logged On screen select the number associated with the user whose 61181918L1 1B 7 195 Section 7 Detailed Level Procedures Total Access HDX System Manual DLP 797 Setting System Security Settings in the PCU g Confirm or cancel the termination logoff of the session by choosing Y or N see Figure 7 34 TID Total Access System 04 04 03 12 27 Unacknowledged Alarms Unit Number 1 Are you sure you want to Logout or Disconnect user connection TEST 172 22 108 157 Execute Y N
267. oop technol ogies into a platform that can grow from a single DSLAM 224 port configuration to a configuration allowing 1344 DSL ports from a single network feed The HDX System has unparalleled reliability flexi bility provisioning testing and management capabilities It is designed to deploy today s advanced loop technologies and those of the foreseeable future as well as support all existing technologies The HDX System delivers DSL services across an ATM interface Its backplane delivers highly reliable services across a large number of interfaces It offers comprehensive support of ATM QoS features for high speed data and other services In addition ADTRAN s Total Access EMS network Element Manage ment System provides a full range of network management features and the same TL1 interface used in the current Total Access 3000 DSLAM for OS integration The HDX system is managed using a single IP address for up to 1344 ports and appears in the Total Access EMS as a single network element to the service provider s test center The Total Access 3000 is the foundation for the HDX and is an intelligent and versatile digital services system Figure 1 1 shows the HDX System configured for an ATM network with management network and a variety of loop interfaces 61181918L1 1B 1 3 Section 1 System Description Total Access HDX System Manual Fa Octal ADSL Access Module El 28 Total Access 3000 Chassis
268. otal Access 3000 shelf Insulated 6 gauge wire and lugs for frame ground Data cables terminated at the Total Access 3050 side in 50 pin amphenol connectors and at the other end in either stubs or 50 pin amphenol connectors depending on the mechanics of MDF Coaxial cable appropriate for DS3 network input to the Total Access 3000 shelf 6 4 61181918L1 1B Total Access HDX System Manual Section 6 Non Trouble Clearing Procedures HDX System Installation NTP 020 61181918L1 1B WARNING To prevent electrical shock do not install equipment in a wet location or during a lightning storm CAUTION Electronic modules can be damaged by static electrical discharge Before handling modules wear an antistatic discharge wrist strap to prevent dam age to electronic components Place modules in antistatic packing mate rial when transporting or storing When working on modules always place them on an approved antistatic mat that is electrically grounded Section 6 Non Trouble Clearing Procedures NTP 020 HDX System Installation Total Access HDX System Manual NTP 020 Perform the following steps in order 5 PROCEDURE Step For details refer to 1 Unpack the components inspect them for damage DLP 520 Step 1 2 Attach the mounting brackets and physically install each chassis the Heat Baffle and Fiber Trays and the Fan Assemblies DLP 520 Step 2 Connect the Total Access 3000
269. otal Access 3050 Splitter Shelf DLP 786 Installing the High Speed Connector Module DLP 708 Connecting High Speed Cabling DLP 709 Connecting the External Alarm Outputs DLP 710 Connecting a Fan Assembly Alarm DLP 711 Connecting a Shelf to an External Modem DLP 713 Connecting the Craft Port to a Terminal or PC DLP 715 Logging on to the System DLP 716 Setting NMA TIRKS Parameters in the PCU DLP 787 Verifying PCU Communications Over an IP LAN DLP 795 Saving the System Configuration Archive DLP 729 Restoring the System Configuration Archive DLP 730 Routing Cable Through the Heat Baffle DLP 790 Verify Total Access 3050 Splitter Shelf Wiring to the MDF DLP 791 Verifying the Fan Assembly Alarm Connection to the PCU DLP 792 Verifying the Alarm Relay Output Connections to the PCU DLP 793 Upgrading the PCU Software DLP 796 viii 61181918L1 1B HDX System Manual Contents IXL 001 Task Index List iii AG E A PA A NAN ee a vii Section 1 System DESCAPION cues acras eR X OUR Cx BRA nee ee IDA AUR A EA RC M ERI 1 1 1 System Overview ehh hh hh eee sr rrr 1 3 General Overview o 1 3 Features and Beneftts epy aaa a cate ag centu Rupee Eau Mam ED UAE RR 1 4 2 System Connectivity eh hh hh rur 1 5 System and Power Ground ooo 1 5 WHIM zs feci BANANA exe tee was tee ERE eee ace eii es eoe LS anu 1 5 Network Interfaces sneu asea ee laRe RR Ru esse AA aw x REA us 1 7 Loop Interfaces sc kk oe A at oh Liga e
270. otal Access 3050 shelf via the Accessory Port option 61181918L1 1B 1 15 Section 1 System Description Total Access HDX System Manual Expansion Controller Unit The Expansion Controller Unit ECU P N 1181919L1 is used in the second through sixth shelves of the HDX system and works in conjunction with the PCU which is installed in the primary shelf An ECU see Figure 1 6 must be installed in the SCU slot of each expansion shelf that is a part of the HDX architec ture The ECU works in tandem with the ESM to provide intershelf communication ADTRAN ECU 118191911 PRO Figure 1 6 ECU Front Panel Features Provides shelf expansion capability for the Primary Controller Unit PCU Power LED 1 16 61181918L1 1B Total Access HDX System Manual System Description Section 1 Primary Switch Modules PSMs The PSMs supported by the HDX System are listed in Table 1 1 on page 9 Refer to individual Practices and Job Aids for detailed information on installation testing operation maintenance and troubleshooting The Total Access 3000 when functioning as an HDX platform must employ a PSM and a ESM Two PSM slots labeled A and B allow installation of redundant high speed cell switches Utilizing one PSM provides a reliable high speed network connection Two PSMs provide automatic protection switching capability one PSM is online the other is in standby The PSM receives its feed from an optional BNC connector
271. otal shelves Common Slot A Primary Expansion Switch Module Installation Procedure 1 Unpack and inspect the primary slot A ESM Each ESM is shipped in its own cardboard shipping carton Open the carton carefully and avoid cutting deeply into the carton with sharp objects After removing the unit from the carton unwrap the bubble wrap and pull the unit from the antistatic plastic bag After unpacking the unit inspect it for damage If the equipment has been damaged file a claim with the carrier and then contact ADTRAN Customer Service For more information refer to Appendix B Warranty 2 Install the primary ESM a Pull the locking lever on the bottom of the ESM front panel down from its closed position b Connect the CAT 5e modular cable from the PSM or upstream ESM to the modular jack farthest from the Access Module s front panel The cable must be eight wire shielded with both ends earth grounded and cannot be shrouded due to the close tolerances on the access module c If additional shelves are installed connect a CAT 5e modular cable from the ESM jack closest to the front panel and route it to the downstream ESM d Dress the cable to exit through the relief hole at the top edge of the ESM front panel and secure it with the proper cable ties using the vertical slot in the center near the top of the card e Hold the unit by the front panel while supporting the bottom side Align the card edges to the guide groove
272. otocol a 7 176 5 Follow up Procedures 2 e eee eee eee 7 176 Setting System Security Settings in the PCU eee eee 7 177 1 Introductions tty AA aah EIU Ue d aei td ah dak die 7 177 2 Prerequisite Procedures eA 7 177 61181918L1 1B Total Access HDX System Manual Contents 3 Tools and Materials Required llle 7 177 Ar AA 7 178 Create New User Account 0 000 cee ses 7 178 Edit User Accounts ooo 7 184 Delete User Account ooo 7 190 Enable Disable User Account ooo 7 192 View Users Currently Logged On 0c ees 7 194 Terminate Logoff Current User Session 00 cee eee eee 7 195 Change Password for Currently Logged On Account 0000 0 ee eae 7 197 Adjust Security Options cette tees 7 199 5 Follow up Procedures 000000 cece eee ees 7 199 DLP 799 Provisioning an In band Management PVC Connection oo ooooooo 7 209 1 IntroductiOn Jc ate dats pee sad M eue NAN DONE AG en a teary 7 209 2 Prerequisite Procedures oooooooooooo eee 7 209 3 Procedute cubatas dba dh big Ba a mtd b E E Jo anan paddy BP aa 7 210 Provision the Traffic Descriptor 0c eee eee 7 210 Provision the Management PVC 2 2 es 7 210 Provision the Secondary Offline Cell Switch Module 0 00 aaa 7 211 4 Follow up Procedure iaa A pe dng Dads Bay he eta pw IE 7 211 DLP 800 Provisioning PVC Connections for a D
273. p the logon screen Upon entering the logon screen the cursor will blink at the Account Name field 2 At the Account Name field input the Account Name and press ENTER The cursor will blink at the Password field 3 At the Password field input the Password and press ENTER The Account Names and Passwords for the HDX System are shown in Table 7 5 Table 7 5 Account Names and Passwords Account Name Default Password Access Rights ADMIN PASSWORD Administrative CONFIG PASSWORD Administrative Limited READWRITE PASSWORD Read and write privileges TEST PASSWORD Read and test privileges READONLY PASSWORD Read privileges NOTE The Account Name and Password are to be entered in all capital letters by default This option may be changed if desired The HDX System has five levels of access that may be granted to a user The ADMIN level of access gives the user access to all available configuration and test settings The ADMIN level is reserved for network system administrators The CONFIG level of access contains the same privileges as the ADMIN access level with the exception of access to the System Administration screen which includes account creation deletion and administration System Configuration Archive SCA administration PCU software upgrade System Event Log viewing and Auto Upgrade configuration The CONFIG access privilege is not a default account name 7 100 61181918L1 1B Total Ac
274. packets will simply be sent through the default route interface onto the connected network NOTE When IP forwarding is disabled and the IP address of an incoming packet does not match a PCU interface IP address Ethernet or In band the packet will be discarded Terminal Server To support the widest range of existing system deployments the HDX System PCU provides a method of remotely accessing various equipment using an RS 232 connection through a Telnet connection to the PCU This feature can be used via the Ethernet or In band interface through proper network configura tion To use this feature provision the Network Management Port to Terminal Server mode and provi sion the proper baud rate and Telnet port Once properly configured and connected to the desired device s RS 232 port a connection to it may be established by a Telnet session connected to the PCU s IP address with the Terminal Server s port number e g 2003 The Terminal Server supports a wide range of baud rates between 1200 bps and 115200 bps NOTE Although this function is available via the PCU the RS 232 is occupied with the Total Access 3050 and therefore not available 2 16 61181918L1 1B Total Access HDX System Manual Engineering Guidelines Section 2 NOTE The Terminal Server and ADMIN port share the provisioning item in the PCU and must use the same setting 4 NETWORK TIMING The HDX System accommodates redundant DS1 c
275. per lip consists of two threaded studs that are placed 0 625 inches apart This spacing fits a standard ground lug not provided The 10 external tooth lock washers and 10 nuts to secure the ground lug are provided a Using an appropriate crimping tool and lugs fasten lugs to both ends of the ground wire b Locate a nearby grounding screw on the equipment rack c Secure the ground wire to frame ground using the lugged end of the grounding wire d Cut the ground wire length to reach from the grounding lug on the rack to the Total Access 3050 grounding terminal located above the backplane on the right side of the upper lip Leave enough slack to allow for tying to the rack if required e Connect standard ground lug to the Total Access 3050 threaded studs with supplied lock washers 5 Tighten the ground connection securely with a straight slot screwdriver Connect Fan Assembly to frame ground The Total Access Fan Assembly has a frame ground wire internal to the fan unit When the Fan Assembly is properly mounted to a correctly installed Heat Baffle the Fan Assembly is automatically connected to the frame ground 7 10 61181918L1 1B Total Access HDX System Manual Detailed Level Procedures Section 7 HDX System Installation DLP 520 6 Test the frame ground connection To ensure a good ground use a multimeter to check continuity between the frame grounding lug and the rack grounding strap at the top of the rack a Using
276. pers Side cutters 3 16 inch wrench 4 MATERIALS REQUIRED e 48 VDC up to 20 amp power source for the Total Access 3000 such as a rack mounted fuse and alarm panel or power board See Table 7 2 Table 7 2 Recommended Wire Gauge and Fuse Sizes Current Draw at 48 VDC Recommended Wire Gauge Recommended Fuse Size 2 6 to 5 8 Amps 14 AWG 10 Amps 5 8 to 10 Amps 12 AWG 15 Amps 10 to 15 Amps 10 AWG 20 Amp cabinet rack or the RT cabinet cabinet feed and return to the Total Access 3000 shelf 7 24 Insulated 6 gauge wire and lugs for frame ground Four 12 24 screws for mounting each Total Access 3000 chassis to the CO or MTU rack or the RT Four 12 24 screws for mounting each Total Access 3000 Heat Baffle and Fiber Tray to the CO or MTU Four 12 24 screws for mounting each Total Access 3050 chassis to the CO or MTU rack or the RT Shielded 2 wire twisted pair cross connect wire with drain such as AT amp T P7 wire Insulated 10 12 gauge wire and lugs for power connections in colors dictated by the CO for the battery 61181918L1 1B Total Access HDX System Manual Section 7 Detailed Level Procedures Flush mounting the Shelves Heat Baffles and Fans DLP 521 61181918L1 1B WARNING To prevent electrical shock do not install equipment in a wet location or during a lightning storm CAUTION Electronic modules can be damaged by static electrical discharge Before hand
277. perties Access Privileges TESTER DISABLED 1 Access Rights READ 2 Enable Disable User Account DISABLED Selection System Help Screen Figure 7 25 Account Properties Access Privileges Menu 61181918L1 1B 7 187 Section 7 Detailed Level Procedures DLP 797 Setting System Security Settings in the PCU Total Access HDX System Manual m Choose the access privileges for the account and press ENTER see Figure 7 26 7 188 NOTE User account access privileges include READ READ WRITE TEST CONFIG and ADMIN TID HDX Unacknowledged Alarms PCU System CRITICAL MAJOR INFO Access Rights READ TESTER 1 READ 25 READ WRITE 3 TEST 4 CONFIG 5 ADMIN Selection System Help Screen 08 02 04 13 58 Unit Number T Figure 7 26 Access Rights Menu 61181918L1 1B Total Access HDX System Manual Detailed Level Procedures Section 7 Setting System Security Settings in the PCU DLP 797 n Enable or disable the account by selecting Enable Disable User Account and pressing ENTER see Figure 7 27 TID HDX PCU System 08 02 04 13 59 Unacknowledged Alarms CRITICAL MAJOR INFO Unit Number 1 Account Properties Access Privileges TESTER DISABLED 1 Access Rights READ 2 Enable Disable User Account DISABLED Selection System Help Screen Figure 7 27 Account Properties Access Privileges Menu 61181918L1 1B 7 189 Section 7 Det
278. ps head screwdriver remove the long thin plastic guard if it is not already off from a previous procedure 7 16 61181918L1 1B Total Access HDX System Manual Detailed Level Procedures Section 7 HDX System Installation DLP 520 b Choose an alarm header set from the EXT INPUTS block P22 on the middle bottom of the Total Access 3000 backplane c Using standard Telco cross connect wire determine and cut the length required to reach from the alarmed piece of equipment to the header chosen in step b d Allow length for 1 to 1 1 2 inches of stripped wire for wire wrap and neat routing out from the Total Access 3000 chassis e Using wire strippers strip 1 to 1 1 2 inches from both ends of the wire NOTE Omit step f if the alarmed piece of equipment has its own source of 48 VDC and doesn t need the 48 VDC feed from the Total Access 3000 shelf The Total Access 3000 chassis expects to see 48 VDC on pin A of the alarm pair when an alarm condition exists f Using a wire wrap gun wire wrap one wire to the B pin of the Total Access 3000 AUX1 header P22 and the other end to the alarmed unit alarm terminal marked B g Wire wrap one end of the second wire to the A pin of the Total Access 3000 AUX1 header P22 and the other end to the appropriate equipment alarm terminal h Using a 1 phillips head screwdriver replace the long thin plastic guard using the two screws provided NOTE Check with the equipment m
279. py t Ocran 2 p ar Pacific Ocean A Henaluty El IN Gd EMS Figure 5 2 EMS Geographical Layout With Java at its core operational stability is greatly reinforced beyond legacy systems Java provides the additional benefits of cost effective maintenance and a greater degree of interoperability in environments that have been traditionally proprietary Total Access EMS represents the next generation of management systems that ensure value to services offered in the evolving network 2 ADDITIONAL INFORMATION For more detailed information regarding user applications reference the Total Access EMS User s Manual P N 64150TAEMSL 1 1 For a step by step guide to installing the Total Access EMS software reference the Total Access EMS Installation Guide P N 64150TAEMSL 1 19 For administrator related information refer to the Total Access EMS Administrative Guide P N 64150TAEMSL 1 30 61181918L1 1B 5 5 Section 5 Network Management Systems Total Access HDX System Manual NMS 501 Total Access EMS This page is intentionally blank 5 6 61181918L1 1B Section 6 Non Trouble Clearing Procedures This section provides guidelines for network designers who are incorporating the HDX System into their networks NTP 020 NTP 023 NTP 024 Table 6 1 Table 6 2 CONTENTS HDX System Installation RR IHR Inn 6 3 Te Introd ctlon ste oo A REI REA Ede gx Eee sve ER 6 3 2 Prerequ
280. r tighten the screws on both sides of the cable connector into the holes provided on the backplane connector 3 Repeat steps 1 2 for each connector on the backplane being used for the required application NOTE All data cables should exit the Total Access 3050 chassis to the left as viewed from the rear and be neatly tied to the frame as per Central Office Standard Operating Procedure All other wiring for example power loop test access clock external alarms should exit to the right and be tied off on the right side of the frame The ground wire should be routed to the nearest suitable grounding point 4 Neatly tie off the data cables to the left of the shelf 5 Route the cables through the cable trays to the terminal blocks on the horizontal side of the MDF 6 Connect the cables to the terminal blocks and tie them down neatly For detailed wiring refer to the Section 3 Application Guidelines 5 FOLLOW UP PROCEDURES Once this procedure is complete return to the procedure which referred to this DLP and continue with the tasks indicated 7 138 61181918L1 1B DLP 787 Setting NMA TIRKS Parameters in the PCU 1 INTRODUCTION Remote management systems require a specific address and description for every system they manage The Target ID TID must be registered with the management system before it can find and manage the Total Access 3000 system This procedure will enable the user to program the TID into the Prim
281. r 3 to ground Disconnect Tip of Pair 3 from ground Connect Ring of Pair 3 to frame ground Check for red Pair 3 LED Visually verify that the LED on the TAG module labeled Pair 3 is lit red Connect Tip of Pair 4 to ground Move the Test Jack from the Pair 3 position to the Pair 4 position for the same slot Connect Tip of Pair 4 to frame ground Check for green Pair 4 LED Visually verify that the LED on the TAG module labeled Pair 4 is lit green Connect Ring of Pair 4 to ground Disconnect Tip of Pair 4 from ground Connect Ring of Pair 4 to frame ground Check for red Pair 4 LED Visually verify that the LED on the TAG module labeled Pair 4 is lit red Connect Tip of Pair 5 to ground Move the test jack from the Pair 4 position to the Pair 5 position for the same slot Connect Tip of Pair 5 to frame ground Check for green Pair 5 LED Visually verify that the LED on the TAG module labeled Pair 5 is lit green Connect Ring of Pair 5 to ground Disconnect Tip of Pair 5 from ground Connect Ring of Pair 5 to frame ground Check for red Pair 5 LED Visually verify that the LED on the TAG module labeled Pair 5 is lit red 61181918L1 1B 7 153 Section 7 Detailed Level Procedures Total Access HDX System Manual DLP 791 Verify Total Access 3050 Splitter Shelf Wiring to the MDF 23 24 23 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 Connect Tip of Pair 6 to ground Move the test jack from
282. r Shelf Amphenol Connector Pinouts 7 152 PCU User Account Privileges eh 7 200 Security Options zs x epo ue b Li Ba Peele baw euam REA 7 208 HDX System Acceptance Checklist llis 7 224 61181918L1 1B Section 1 System Description This section is designed for use by network engineers planners and designers who are upgrading or expanding a communications network It contains general information and describes physical and operational concepts module functions network relationship provisioning testing alarm status and system monitoring This section should be used in conjunction with Section 2 Engineering Guidelines CONTENTS 1 System Overview ccs ru r9 rpm Pra ee eee eed teed NABAL KGG 1 3 General Overview s assa ee ded dn RR a UR qe dU RR d ARCADE RR cL 1 3 Features and Benefits 000 eh 1 4 2 System Connectivity selle Se eee bees Rer RR ee De Set UU ER RM REI EEG TEES 1 5 System and Power Ground lssselseeele eee 1 5 TIMING ud a GG KAGAT ba qe um aeu deis IR pat ead dicke duas eet oa nu es 1 5 Network Interfaces 1 7 Loop Interfaces mV sse Nama Kaka ge ghia PAE Meth bad Fels abe qe eA SA STER 1 7 Management Interfaces hh hr 1 7 NA A E ON ai A 1 8 3 System Components usos os A eee 1 9 Total Access 3000 Chassis lille n 1 11 Total Access 3050 Chassis en 1 12 Features iue d eA ap UR ER Red A Web Rod r
283. r tray reference the illustrations shown in Figure 7 12 and Figure 7 13 Direct the cable in accordance with the illustrations using the routing clips provided on the Heat Baffle and Fiber Tray ad Figure 7 12 Routing Cable Out the Back of the Fiber Tray 61181918L1 1B 7 147 Section 7 Detailed Level Procedures Total Access HDX System Manual DLP 790 Routing Cable Through the Heat Baffle Figure 7 13 Routing Cable Out the Side of the Fiber Tray 3 Connect the cable to the appropriate transceiver If the Modules that will be using cables are in place the connection may be made Refer to the Section 6 Non Trouble Clearing Procedures for instructions for connecting the cable to the required access module 4 Replace the front guard Put the front guard back on the Heat Baffle and Fiber Tray without pinching any routed cables Attach the guard using the screws at each end 5 FOLLOW UP PROCEDURES Once this procedure is complete return to the procedure which called out this DLP and continue with the tasks indicated there 7 148 61181918L1 1B DLP 791 Verify Total Access 3050 Splitter Shelf Wiring to the MDF 1 INTRODUCTION This procedure details the test steps which must be performed to verify that a Total Access 3050 Splitter Shelf has been properly wired to the Main Distribution Frame MDF This procedure should be performed by two p
284. ream downstream rates are configurable in 32 kbps increments The Octal ADSL provides comprehensive user friendly Operation Administration Maintenance and Provisioning OAM amp P circuit information for the ADSL circuit The unit also supports the Total Access EMS remote management system local management through the craft interface and menus through Telnet Software revision updates can be made conveniently through either Ymodem or Trivial File Transfer Protocol TFTP downloads The Octal ADSL incorporates these features Converts standard ATM cell signal to from ADSL signals Operates in a HDX System configuration e Provides comprehensive circuit maintenance information Supports multiple loopbacks for circuit diagnostics Supports Fast and Interleave modes Full Rate and G Lite support Fixed Rate or Best Effort training modes The front panel LED indicators are as follows Power Loop 1 Loop 2 Loop 3 Loop 4 Loop 5 Loop 6 Loop 7 Loop 8 1 22 61181918L1 1B Total Access HDX System Manual System Description Section 1 Total Access 3050 Metallic Test Controller P N 1183010L1 The Total Access Metallic Test Controller see Figure 1 10 controls metallic pair accesses on the test bus It provides support for the standard TL1 test commands initiated from a test head as specified in GR 834 Figure 1 10 Metallic Test Controller Features 3 1183010L1 PURO TET TD RRO
285. rform the following steps in order 4 PROCEDURE NOTE Each three pin alarm header is wired the same way for the specified alarm 1 Determine whether the external alarm reporting device uses a normally open or normally closed circuit for alarm relay 2 Using standard telco cross connect wire determine and cut the length required to reach from the alarm headers to the alarm reporting device 3 Using wire strippers strip 1 to 1 1 2 inches from both ends of the wire 4 Using a wire wrap gun wire wrap one strand to the center pin Common from the Total Access alarm relay header and the other strand to either the NO normally open or NC normally closed pin on the relay header See Figure 7 4 ar B a ler b EN i TOTAL ACCESS i CHASSIS n 1 n Figure 7 4 Total Access 3000 Chassis Alarm Contacts 5 Connect using wire wrap or lugs as appropriate the two wires to the appropriate terminals on the external alarm relay device being used 61181918L1 1B 7 85 Section 7 Detailed Level Procedures Total Access HDX System Manual DLP 710 Connecting the External Alarm Outputs 5 FOLLOW
286. rk menu select IP Network Provisioning and press ENTER From the IP Network Provisioning menu select IP Network Interfaces and press ENTER From the IP Network Interfaces menu select Ethernet Interfaces and press ENTER From the Ethernet Interface menu select IP Address and press ENTER Input the IP Address and press ENTER From the Ethernet Interface menu Subnet Mask and press ENTER 11 12 13 14 Input the Subnet Mask and press ENTER From the Ethernet Interface menu select Gateway and press ENTER Input the Gateway and press ENTER Press Esc once to return to the IP Network Interfaces menu NOTE Steps related to the Inband Interface steps 15 22 are only required if the Inband Management option is used From the IP Network Interfaces menu select Inband Interface and press ENTER 61181918L1 1B 7 143 Section 7 Detailed Level Procedures Total Access HDX System Manual DLP 789 Setting IP Parameters for an PCU 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 5 From the Inband Interface menu select IP Address and press ENTER Input the IP Address and press ENTER From the Inband Interface menu select Subnet Mask and press ENTER Input the Subnet Mask and press ENTER From the Inband Interface menu select Gateway and press ENTER Input the Gateway and press ENTER NOTE If IP addresses are assigned to both the Ethernet and Inband Interface they MUST be on different subnets S
287. rking on modules always place them on an approved antistatic mat that 1s electrically grounded 61181918L1 1B 7 41 Section 7 Detailed Level Procedures Total Access HDX System Manual DLP 524 DS3 Primary Switch Module Installation DLP 524 Perform the Steps Below in the Order Listed 4 PROCEDURE First time DS3 Primary Switch Module Installation Procedure The PSM is installed in the Common slots A and B in Total Access 3000 primary chassis in the HDX System The PSM is an ATM switch with the switching policing and shaping functions of a typical ATM switch plus the added functionality to expand these functions over up to five expansion shelves six shelves total The PSM is designed to interface with an Expansion Switch Module ESM on each expansion shelf Communication between the PSM and the ESMs takes place over CAT 5e modular cables that daisy chain the units together NOTE If performing a new installation proceed to Step 9 under Common Slot A Primary PSM Installation Procedure on page 7 43 PSM Replacement Procedure The PCU is capable of storing provisioning settings for both the PSM and access modules Auto provi sioning transfers provisioning data including Service State stored in the PCU to the respective slot upon the installation of a replacement module of the same kind Replacement modules of a different kind would have to be manually provisioned after which the provisioning settings would then be
288. rleave 2 Fast Select the appropriate line type and press ENTER 61181918L1 1B 7 121 Section 7 Detailed Level Procedures Total Access HDX System Manual DLP 761 Provisioning the Octal ADSL Access Module 6 From the Line x Provisioning menu select Link Down Alarm and press ENTER The following choices are available 1 Enabled 2 Disabled Select whether to enable or disable the link down alarm and press ENTER 7 From the Line x Provisioning menu select Test Access and press ENTER The following choices are available 1 Enabled 2 Disabled Enable or disable Test Access as needed 8 Press Esc one time to return to the Line 1 Provisioning menu NOTE The remainder of this sub menu is used to edit the line profile of both the central office end of the line and the remote end of the line Options avail able under this menu are described in the module s Installation and Main tenance Practice 9 From the Line x Provisioning menu select Line Service State and press ENTER The following choices are available 1 In Service 2 Out of Service Maintenance 3 Out of Service Unassigned Use the Out of Service Maintenance service state while provisioning the service for each individual line This will inhibit alarms specific to that port to be sent to the PCU 10 Once all provisioning is completed place the line In Service This will allow the port to report alarms to the PCU when the Card Service St
289. rms are cleared before placing the modules In Service This will prevent false alarm from being transmitted to the network Once the module is placed in service it will generate SNMP messages on change of state From the Working PSM menu select option 2 Provisioning and press ENTER From the Provisioning menu select option 1 Advanced Provisioning and press ENTER From the Advanced Provisioning menu select option 1 Service State and press ENTER From the Service State menu select option 1 In Service and press ENTER ON Uu A W N Return to the Total Access Main menu by pressing Esc 5 FOLLOW UP PROCEDURE Once this procedure is complete return to the procedure which referred to this DLP and continue with the tasks indicated 61181918L1 1B 7 45 Section 7 Detailed Level Procedures Total Access HDX System Manual DLP 524 DS3 Primary Switch Module Installation This page is intentionally blank 7 46 61181918L1 1B DLP 525 Expansion Switch Module ESM Installation 1 INTRODUCTION This procedure provides step by step instructions for the installation of the ESM P N 1181046L1 into a HDX System Installation procedures include the removal of the product from its packaging inspecting for damage and seating the unit in the Total Access 3000 chassis Acceptance testing is provided in DLP 854 Central Office Installation Acceptance Test Procedure 2 PREREQUISITE PROCEDURES The following procedures must
290. rn wiring is required for the Fan Assembly 18 AWG power wire should be run from the fuse panel to the Fan Assembly following the same color scheme that was used to wire the chassis If the chassis is wired for dual feed power then the Fan Assembly should also be dual feed powered from the same two supply sources Each chassis should be furnished with a separate 20 amp fuse on each power feed The Fan Assembly should be furnished with a separate 1 amp fuse on each power feed 4 4 61181918L1 1B Total Access HDX System Manual Section 4 Site Preparation Preparing for Chassis Installation PREP 405 Frame Ground Fach Total Access 3000 chassis or Total Access 3050 chassis requires a connection to frame ground using 6 AWG ground wire A separate grounding wire from the bay itself or from the bay s grounding bar should be provided for grounding each chassis Wire with green insulation is recommended for frame ground connections so that frame grounds can be easily distinguished from other power connections Each Fan Assembly also requires a connection to frame ground 16 or 18 AWG ground wire following the same color scheme as the chassis should be used The Fan Assembly should be connected to frame ground using the same method as each chassis 5 TIMING CONSIDERATIONS Different applications of the Total Access 3000 chassis may have differing timing requirements To determine which of the clock inputs are required refer to Section 3 Applicati
291. ry however some TFTP servers do not per mit clients to write or put data that would result in the creation of a new file This behavior is site specific and depends upon the operating system local configuration files or the particular TFTP server being used On the other hand some TFTP servers unconditionally allow new files to be cre ated and other TFTP servers must be reconfigured or recompiled to per mit the creation of new files Most Unix Linux TFTP servers do not allow clients to create new files but usually allow clients to overwrite or replace files that already exist in the local TFTP directory This allows the administrator to work around the issue by creating the desired files in the TFTP directory before attempting to write the file to the TFTP server from the network For example if the name of a fictitious shelf was Flintville the admin istrator would create the following files in the tftpboot directory Flintville sca Flintville 1 sca Flintville 2 sca Flintville 3 sca Flintville 4 sca Flintville 5 sca Flintville 6 sca Flintville 7 sca This action would allow the shelf to perform manual SCA saves to Flintville sca and a rotation schedule of 7 SCA AutoSaves to Flintville_1 sca through Flintville 7 sca 2 Configure the Global SCA Settings a b C 7 110 From the Total Access Main menu select System Controller and press ENTER From the System Controller menu sel
292. s 3 Unpack and inspect the protect slot B ESM Each ESM is shipped in its own cardboard shipping carton Open the carton carefully and avoid cutting deeply into the carton with sharp objects After removing the unit from the carton unwrap the antistatic bubble wrap and pull the unit from the protective plastic bag After unpacking the unit inspect it for damage If the equipment has been damaged file a claim with the carrier and then contact ADTRAN Customer Service 4 Install the protect slot B ESM a Pull the locking lever on the bottom of the ESM front panel down from its closed position b Connect the CAT 5e modular cable from the PSM or upstream ESM to the modular jack farthest from the Access Module s front panel The cable must be eight wire shielded with both ends earth grounded and cannot be shrouded due to the close tolerances on the access module c If additional shelves are installed connect a CAT 5e modular cable from the ESM jack closest to the front panel and route it to the downstream ESM d Dress the cable to exit through the relief hole at the top edge of the ESM front panel and secure it with the proper cable ties using the vertical slot in the center near the top of the card e Hold the unit by the front panel while supporting the bottom side Align the card edges to the guide grooves for the second common slot Slot A on the left side of the chassis f Gently but firmly push the ESM into the third
293. s 1181041L3 PSM 22 1 watts 1 22 1 watts 1181405L1 Octal ADSL 10 8 watts 28 302 4 watts 1183001L1 Total Access 3050 w 28 2 0 watts 1 2 0 watts splitters and MTC 1181006L1 Fan Module 9 6 watts 1 9 6 watts Total 339 4 watts Table 2 12 HDX Expansion Shelf Non Redundant Heat Dissipation Part Number Description Heat Dissipation Quantity Minion 1181919L1 ECU 0 2 watts 1 0 2 watts 1181046L1 ESM 12 5 watts 1 12 5 watts 1181405L1 Octal ADSL 10 8 watts 28 302 4 watts 1183001L1 Total Access 3050 w 28 2 0 watts 1 2 0 watts splitters and MTC 1181006L1 Fan Module 9 6 watts 1 9 6 watts Total 326 7 watts Table 2 13 HDX First Bay 3 Systems Heat Dissipation Description Heat Dissipation Quantity nen Primary Shelf 339 4 watts 1 339 4 watts Expansion Shelves 326 7 watts 2 653 4 watts Total Access 3050 Splitter Shelf 2 0 watts 3 6 0 watts Fan Assembly 9 6 watts 3 28 8 watts Total 1027 6 watts 61181918L1 1B 2 9 Section 2 Engineering Guidelines Total Access HDX System Manual Table 2 14 HDX Second Bay 3 Systems Heat Dissipation Description Heat Dissipation Quantity Hired Primary Shelf 339 4 watts 0 0 0 watts Expansion Shelves 326 7 watts 3 980 1 watts Total Access 3050 Splitter Shelf 2 0 watts 3 6 0 watts Fan Assembly 9 6 watts 3 28 8 watts Total 1014 9 watts For single system deployment use Table 2 15 to calculate
294. s will occur as scheduled If this option is disabled automatic saves will not occur manual saves may still be performed g Select Disable and continue to the next step h From the SCA AutoSave Provisioning menu select AutoSave Only If Prov Changes and press ENTER The following settings will be available Enable Disable This option if set to enable prohibits automatic saves unless a provisioning option changed after the previous save If this option is set to disable automatic saves will occur according to the normal schedule i Select the appropriate option according to the central office standard operating procedure or network administrator and continue to the next step j From the SCA AutoSave Provisioning menu select AutoSave Filename Prefix and press ENTER This option provides a field that will support up to 30 characters The contents of this field make up the first portion of the system configuration archive filename written to the TFTP server k Input the appropriate filename prefix and press ENTER l From the SCA AutoSave Provisioning menu select AutoSave Filename Suffix and press ENTER This option provides a field that will support up to 8 characters The contents of this field make up the last portion of the system configuration archive filename written to the TFTP server m Input the appropriate filename suffix and press ENTER n From the SCA AutoSave Provisioning menu select Max AutoSave File
295. s capacity to provide ADSL service is doubled The Total Access 3050 Splitter Shelf can accommodate 28 Splitter Modules with slots matching 1 1 to the 28 module slots in the Total Access 3000 Figure 1 12 shows the positioning of the Splitter Shelf in relation to the Total Access 3000 Total Access N ui 64 Pin Amphenols Front 3000 Chassis 64 Pin Amphenols j 50 Pin POTS Front Cover Splitter Shelf in and Filter POTS ADSL Figure 1 12 xDSL Splitter Module Connections If the xDSL Splitter module is removed the lifeline POTS service is not disrupted since the Total Access 3050 chassis backplane plugs are designed with make before break splitter module connectors 61181918L1 1B 1 25 Section 1 System Description Total Access HDX System Manual Miscellaneous Equipment The miscellaneous equipment supported by the HDX System are listed in Table 1 1 on page 9 Refer to individual Practices and Job Aids for detailed information on installation testing operation maintenance and troubleshooting Heat Baffle and Fiber Tray The Total Access Heat Baffle and Fiber Tray functions together as both a heat baffle and a cable routing tray As a heat baffle it channels heated air back and away from the equipment operating above the Heat Baffle and Fiber Tray As a cable routing tray see Figure 1 13 the Heat Baffle and Fiber Tray provides channels and guides to properly route cables delivered to mult
296. s for the second common slot Slot A on the left side of the chassis f Gently but firmly push the ESM module into the second slot slot A at the left end of the shelf Simultaneous thumb pressure at the top above the POWER LED and bottom near the latch of the unit will ensure that the edge connector seats firmly into the backplane Push the ejector tab up and closed against the ESM front panel g Allow the ESM module to perform a self test The POWER LED should turn green and the LINK A and LINK B LEDs will be off unless shelves are enabled h If more shelves are being equipped route the CAT Se cable to the next downstream ESM position on the HDX System and use the ESM installation procedure to connect and secure it The ESM to 7 48 61181918L1 1B Total Access HDX System Manual Detailed Level Procedures Section 7 Expansion Switch Module ESM Installation DLP 525 ESM connections must be made between units in the same common slot position PSM ESMs in common Slot A must connect to ESMs in Slot A and Slot B modules connect to Slot B If a single ESM configuration is being employed proceed to DLP 800 for the procedure to provision the ESM If a protection configuration is being employed proceed to DLP 800 after the Protect second ESM has been installed Common Slot B Protect ESM Installation Procedure This section of the procedure will be used to optionally install a second ESM for 1 1 protection switching application
297. s in antistatic packing mate rial when transporting or storing When working on modules always place them on an approved antistatic mat that is electrically grounded 61181918L1 1B Total Access HDX System Manual Detailed Level Procedures Section 7 Connecting the Craft Port to a Terminal or PC DLP 715 DLP 715 Perform the following steps in order 4 PROCEDURE Connecting to a VT100 Terminal 1 Set the parameters of the VT100 terminal to the following settings 9600 baud rate or as configured on PCU 8 data bits No parity stop bit No flow control Ifthe terminal has a parallel setting disable it and use serial setting If the rear Total Access 3000 ADMIN connector is being used a null modem cable with a male DB 25 connector on the Total Access 3000 end is required If the front craft port is being used a serial cable with a male DB 9 connector on the Total Access 3000 end is required Plug the male end of the data cable into the HDX System Make connection to the VT100 terminal as appropriate for the equipment Connecting to a Personal Computer Emulating a VT100 Terminal Most personal computers or laptops can run communications software that will emulate a VT terminal Windows programs such as Terminal or HyperTerminal are two such examples in the Windows format but there are many other adequate commercially available software packages virtually all of which will allow
298. s that are to be used 3 TOOLS REQUIRED A pen or pencil will be required to operate the recessed APS button on the front panel of the unit 4 MATERIALS REQUIRED Total Access 3000 PSM two modules for 1 to 1 protection switching applications 61181918L1 1B 7 213 Section 7 Detailed Level Procedures Total Access HDX System Manual DLP 800 Provisioning PVC Connections for a DS3 Primary Switch Module DLP 800 Perform the following steps in order 5 PROCEDURE NOTE This DLP provides the steps necessary to create a PVC or PVP in a PSM Refer to Appendix A to view the PM menu tree Provision a Traffic Descriptor 1 From the PSM Provisioning menu select Traffic Descriptor Provisioning and press ENTER 2 Press the C key to create a PVC 3 Define a Traffic Descriptor for the PVC Define a Traffic Descriptor TD for the PVC by using options from the visible menu Once the Traffic Descriptor is defined and named select Create and press ENTER NOTE This action will prompt a confirmation screen press the Y key and then press ENTER to confirm the creation of the Traffic Descriptor The completion of the above step will display the Traffic Descriptor screen which provides a list of the existing TDs 4 Press Esc to return to the PSM Provisioning menu NOTE A separate Traffic Descriptor may govern each direction of ATM traffic When a VC or VP is created a TD is assigned to the forward dir
299. s the PCU If the SNMP Management System is unable to query the PCU contact the network administrator for assistance NOTE The SNMP Community Name Strings are set on the Provisioning menu of the Network Management Interface The default value for the Read Com munity Name string is public and the Write Community Name string is private 7 170 61181918L1 1B Total Access HDX System Manual Detailed Level Procedures Section 7 Verifying PCU Communications Over an IP LAN DLP 795 5 FOLLOW UP PROCEDURES Once this procedure is complete return to the procedure which called out this DLP and continue with the tasks indicated there 61181918L1 1B 7 171 Section 7 Detailed Level Procedures Total Access HDX System Manual DLP 795 Verifying PCU Communications Over an IP LAN This page is intentionally blank 7 172 61181918L1 1B DLP 796 Upgrading the PCU Software 1 INTRODUCTION This procedure provides step by step instructions for the upgrading the application software in the Primary Controller Unit PCU This procedure offers instructions for using either TFTP or Y Modem protocols for transferring the new software to the PCU NOTE The Auto Upgrade system provides methods to manually or automatically upgrade the flash firmware for the HDX and or modules installed in the Total Access 3000 system For further information on the Auto Upgrade function see DLP 784 Upgrading the PCU Software 2 PRE
300. shelf measures 6 in high 21 4 in wide and 10 in deep and weighs 13 45 Ib Its operating temperature range is 40 C to 65 C for remote terminal applications A Total Access 3050 chassis which has been populated with the common modules and access cards is referred to as a Splitter Shelf Figure 1 4 Total Access 3050 Chassis 1 12 61181918L1 1B Total Access HDX System Manual System Description Section 1 The Total Access 3050 Splitter Shelf allows POTS to continue to operate normally with or without the splitter modules installed This allows splitter modules to be serviced without impacting the lifeline POTS service Cut through modules are available for accommodating the deployment of other service modules such as IMA DS1 Octal SHDSL IDSL DS1 FR Circuit Emulation Services CES and DSX 1 out of the corre sponding Total Access 3000 DSLAM An optional Metallic Test Controller MTC module may be installed in the left most position of the shelf NOTE Metallic Test Access MTA service modules must be installed in a Total Access 3050 to take advantage of the MTA capability At the rear of the shelf are twenty 50 pin male and eight 64 pin male amphenol connectors Also at the rear of the chassis are primary and secondary power connections 48 VDC Metallic Test Access bus connec tions and a DB 25 ADMIN port Refer to the Total Access 3050 Metallic Test Controller Installation and Maintenance Practice
301. sion and Total Access 3050 Splitter Shelf at 48 VDC Table 2 6 provides the current draw for the entire HDX System at 48 VDC Use Table 2 8 to determine wire gauge and fuse size Use Table 2 9 to calculate current draw for a single system deployment Table 2 2 Current Draw of Each Module At 48 VDC Part Number Equipment Maximum Current Draw at 48 VDC Total Access 3000 Common Modules 1181918L1 PCU 0 109 Amps 1181919L1 ECU 0 005 Amps 1181041L3 PSM 0 460 Amps 1181046L1 ESM 0 260 Amps Total Access 3050 1183001L1 Chassis with Splitters and MTC Test Active 0 146 Amps Total Access 3000 Access Modules 1181405L1 Octal ADSL 0 289 Amps Accessories 1181006L1 Fan Assembly 0 200 Amps The following is an example of a the HDX System arrangements and the tables used to calculate the power draw for the configuration Table 2 3 Primary Shelf Non Redundant Current Draw at 48 VDC Part Number Description Current Draw Quantity Total Draw 1181918L1 PCU 0 109 amps 1 0 109 amps 1181041L3 PSM 0 460 amps 1 0 460 amps 1181405L1 Octal ADSL 0 289 amps 28 8 092 amps Total 8 661 amps 2 4 61181918L1 1B Total Access HDX System Manual Engineering Guidelines Section 2 NOTE Current data is listed as per unit This data is multiplied by the total number of corresponding units and added together to get the noted totals Table 2 4 Expansion Shelf
302. sipation for the entire HDX System at 48 VDC Use Table 2 15 to calculate total heat dissipation for a single system deployment Table 2 10 Heat Dissipation at 48 VDC ADTRAN P N Description Heat Dissipation Total Access 3000 Common Modules 1181918L1 PCU 3 3 watts 1181919L1 ECU 0 2 watts 1181041L3 PSM 22 1 watts 1181046L1 ESM 12 5 watts Total Access 3050 1183001L1 Total Access 3050 w 28 splitters and MTC 2 0 watts Total Access 3000 Access Modules 1181405L1 Octal ADSL 10 8 watts Accessories 1181006L1 Fan Assembly 9 6 watts Use the worksheet in Table 2 15 to calculate total heat dissipation from HDX System modules Add the heat dissipation data from the individual units to get the total dissipation for a complete system The following are the primary expansion and Total Access 3050 Splitter Shelf arrangements and the tables used to calculate the heat dissipation for each configuration NOTE Heat data is listed as per unit and is based on normal operating mode with typical loop conditions This data is multiplied by the total number of corresponding units and then added to get the noted totals 2 8 61181918L1 1B Total Access HDX System Manual Engineering Guidelines Section 2 Table 2 11 HDX Primary Shelf Non Redundant Heat Dissipation Part Number Description Heat Dissipation Quantity a 1181918L1 PCU 3 3 watts 1 3 3 watt
303. sis a Gently but firmly push the replacement PCU into the now empty far left slot labeled PCU Simulta neous thumb pressure at the top above the PWR LED and bottom below the DB 9 craft port of the unit to ensure a good seat of the PCU pins into the backplane connector b Push the ejector tab close and against the PCU front panel c Verify that the PCU power on self test routine is successfully completed 61181918L1 1B Total Access HDX System Manual Detailed Level Procedures Section 7 Primary Controller Unit PCU Replacement DLP 523 6 Connect a terminal or PC to the craft port Connect either a VT100 terminal or a PC emulating a VT100 terminal to the craft interface on the PCU front panel For details refer to DLP 715 7 Provision the replacement PCU d The replacement PCU will automatically provision upon installation NOTE A PCU with A05 24 or later application code has the ability to store its network connection data onto a PSM This ability allows a PCU to be replaced by a technician without ever logging onto the PCU locally Since the Network Provisioning is stored on the PSM when the new PCU is inserted into the shelf it is automatically provisioned for network connec tivity The information stored by the PSM for the PCU includes Inband Interface P Address Subnet Mask Gateway nterface State Ethernet Interface P Address Subnet Mask Gateway nterface State Default Route
304. specified in the Auto Upgrade Config File will be marked as needing upgrade If the operating mode is set to Auto the module will be immediately upgraded or scheduled for future upgrade if another module upgrade is already in progress 2 PREREQUISITE PROCEDURES The following procedures must be completed prior to using the Auto Upgrade feature If necessary refer to the appropriate documentation before proceeding The prerequisite procedures include the following NTP 020 HDX System Installation Proper installation and connection of a TFTP server Validated AUC file from ADTRAN 3 PROCEDURE When more than one module requires firmware upgrade the Auto Upgrade system will follow the following sequence 1 Upgrade all non MUX modules of the same type in the shelf 2 Advance to the next module type 3 Go to step 1 until all non MUX modules requiring upgrade have been upgraded 4 Upgrade the ESMs if necessary 5 Upgrade the PSMs if necessary 6 Upgrade the PCU if necessary It should be noted that during the upgrade If the TFTP Cache feature is enabled the HDX system will first attempt to retrieve firmware files from the TFTP server prior to initiating the upgrade of each module This will eliminate any chance of service interruption due to missing firmware files or other problems with the customer IP management network or TFTP server Modules failing to properly upgrade will be retried a provisionable n
305. ss to the management and provisioning functions This procedure details the specific procedure for logging on to the system and accessing the various management and provisioning functions 2 PREREQUISITE PROCEDURES The following procedures must be completed prior to logging on to the system If necessary refer to the appropriate documentation before proceeding The prerequisite procedure is as follows DLP 713 Connecting a Shelf to an External Modem if using a modem to access the shelf e DLP 715 Connecting the Craft Port to a Terminal or PC If using the PCU craft port DLP 787 Setting NMA TIRKS Parameters in the PCU DLP 789 Setting IP Parameters for an PCU If using a Telnet session over a LAN e DLP 795 Verifying PCU Communications Over an IP LAN If using a Telnet session over a LAN 3 TOOLS AND MATERIALS REQUIRED VT100 or PC configured as a VT100 terminal Data cable to connect to VT100 terminal or PC configured as a VT100 terminal 61181918L1 1B 7 99 Section 7 Detailed Level Procedures Total Access HDX System Manual DLP 716 Logging on to the System DLP 716 Perform the following steps in order 4 PROCEDURE To log in to the HDX System menu perform the following steps 1 After completing the prerequisite procedures above a terminal session through the craft port a Telnet session over a LAN connection or a terminal session over a modem link should be started Pressing any key will bring u
306. stored in the PCU For example the provisioning settings of a PSM would be downloaded to a replacement PSM If MUX auto provisioning is enabled in the PCU and a PSM unit is subsequently removed and replaced with another PSM unit the PCU will automatically download the provisioning settings including Service State to the replacement PSM To check Autoprovisioning status perform the steps below Check Auto Provisioning Setting in PCU 1 Logon to the system For details refer to DLP 716 From the Total Access Main menu select option 1 System Controller and press ENTER From the System Controller menu select option 2 Provisioning and press ENTER From the Provisioning menu select option 2 MUX Module and press ENTER RR A W N From the MUX Module menu check the status of option 2 MUX Auto Provisioning If enabled proceed to the next section to install the PSM If disabled continue with Step 6 7 42 61181918L1 1B Total Access HDX System Manual Detailed Level Procedures Section 7 DS3 Primary Switch Module Installation DLP 524 6 From the MUX Module menu select option 2 MUX Auto Provisioning and press ENTER 7 From the MUX Auto Provisioning menu select option 2 Enable and press ENTER 8 Return to the Total Access Main menu by pressing Esc Common Slot A Primary PSM Installation Procedure 9 Unpack and inspect the primary slot A PSM Each PSM is shipped in its own cardboard shipping carton Open t
307. stribution Frame MDF Considerations 0000 eee 4 7 Wiring Connections to the MDF 2 2 2 2 eee 4 7 Horizontal side Terminal Blocks 000000 e eee eee eee eee 4 7 8 Follow up Procedures 00 000 c eee 4 7 Section 5 Network Management Systems 0 000 cece eee eee eens 5 1 NMS 501 Total Access EMS cece eee 5 3 Ti OVervIeW PNG P RE DAN Ree E Ged SU bi dn DA AA 5 3 Section 6 Non Trouble Clearing Procedures 00 0 e eee eee eee nnn 6 1 NTP 020 HDX System Installation eee eee 6 3 Te Introductions cesso a NG A NG MATANG Na NONG DANG D Ka tee ss 6 3 2 Prerequisite Procedures 0000 c eee tenes 6 3 3 Tools Required a et dig Na big oe hn Abe b a dit PG AMANG 6 4 4 Materials Required 0 002 tee 6 4 5 Proced le a dla lhe ery eg Ahab aks BADA ao anand OA 6 6 6 Follow up Procedures 00000 c eee ete eee 6 7 NTP 023 Primary Controller Unit PCU Replacement 000 eee eee eee eee 6 9 Mir Intfod ction 5 ses a ese e eS 6 9 2 Prerequisite Procedures es 6 9 3 Materials Required 2 perque E e Eur fete E Rede Dea et Gd 6 9 A RIR IRSE REMIS ULM a ERE Bh riri 6 10 5 Follow Up Procedure 0000 cece es 6 10 NTP 024 HDX System Modules Installation 0c cee eee eee 6 15 15 InttOd UG dete ee do AA AA 6 15 2 Prerequisite Procedures ees 6 15 3 Modules Required s ps aakala e taa Gma PEE Q
308. t rtVBR 5 Admin Weight nrtVBR 6 Admin Weight UBR 7 Service Classes 8 VP Connections Allowed 1 ILMI 2 VPI 3 VCI 4 Addr Reg 6 Device Type 7 UNI Type 8 Get Next Timer 9 Set Req Timer 10 Get Req Timer 11 Max SVPC VPI 12 Max SVCC VPI 13 Min SVCC VCI 1 CBR 2 rtVBR 3 nrtVBR 4 VBR N Next P Previous G Page C Create D Duplicate R Remove M Modif S Show 1 Search for Loop Parts 2 Search for DS3 Ports 3 Search for MGMT Ports 4 Search for TDs 1 No 2 Yes 1 No 2 Yes 1 DISABLE 2 ENABLE 1 DISABLE 2 ENABLE 1 User 2 Network 1 Public 2 Private 1 CBR 1 Name 2 rtVBR 3 nrtVBR 2 Service Category UBA 3 Type NOTE Options 4 9 below depend on Service Category and Type selected from above 10 CBR UBR 13 CBR rtVBR For CBR For RtVBR For NrtVBR 4 PCR 0 1 Value 0 105509 5 Frame Discard TENABLE 2 DISABLE 6 Create 1 Forward Traffic Descriptor 1 gt 2 2 Backward Traffic Descriptor 2 gt 1 3 Endpoint 1 Slot Port DS3 MGMT 4 VPI 5 VCI 6 Endpoint 2 Slot Port D53 MGMT 7 VPI 8 VCI P Set Path PVC PVP C Create PVC PVP For UBR Note 11 CBR nrtVBR 12 CBR nrtVBR UBR a fa jo N fo Jo o fa fo IN fa a e 14 CBR rtVBR UBR 15 CBR rtVBR nrtVBR 16 CBR rtVBR nrtVBR UBR atmN atmC atmC atmC atmNoCIpNoScrCdvt atmN atmC
309. taking the input ports for all of the Total Access Shelves out of the Out of Service or Test mode Verify that the Concentrator shows no alarm states for the Total Access Shelves 7 164 61181918L1 1B Total Access HDX System Manual Detailed Level Procedures Section 7 Verifying the Alarm Relay Output Connections to the PCU DLP 793 5 FOLLOW UP PROCEDURES Once this procedure is complete return to the procedure which called out this DLP and continue with the tasks indicated there 61181918L1 1B 7 165 Section 7 Detailed Level Procedures Total Access HDX System Manual DLP 793 Verifying the Alarm Relay Output Connections to the PCU This page is intentionally blank 7 166 61181918L1 1B DLP 795 Verifying PCU Communications Over an IP LAN 1 INTRODUCTION This procedure details the test steps which must be performed on the Primary Controller Unit PCU when the 10Base T port is connected to a local area network to ensure that the PCU is communicating properly over the network 2 PREREQUISITE PROCEDURES The following procedure must be completed prior to verifying PCU communications over an IP LAN If necessary refer to the appropriate documentation before proceeding The prerequisite procedures are as follows NTP 020 HDX System Installation DLP 789 Setting IP Parameters for an PCU 3 TOOLS AND MATERIALS REQUIRED Access to a PC or other computer connected to the local area network WARNING To prevent
310. tall the fuse or turn on the circuit breaker to either power feed of the Total Access 3000 chassis into the appropriate slot in the fuse and alarm panel b Verify that the PCU power on self test routine is successfully completed and that the PWR LED is green Other LEDs may or may not be illuminated depending on the current status of the system 29 Connect a terminal or PC to the craft port HDX System management and provisioning is facilitated by a series of intuitive menus that are acces sible on a computer screen Connecting either a VT100 terminal or a PC emulating a VT100 terminal to the craft interface on the PCU front panel allows access to the menus and management features of HDX System For details refer to DLP 715 61181918L1 1B 7 19 Section 7 Detailed Level Procedures Total Access HDX System Manual DLP 520 HDX System Installation 30 31 32 33 Logon to the system Once connected to the PCU via either a VT100 terminal or PC configured as a VT100 terminal it is necessary to logon to the system to gain access to the management and provisioning functions For details refer to DLP 716 Configure the Target ID TID and shelf number Some remote management systems require a specific address and description for every system they manage The Target ID TID and Shelf Number may need to be registered with the management system before it can manage Total Access 3000 For details refer to DLP 787 Provis
311. te SNMP community strings If this option is enabled the SNMP parameters will be overwritten by the SCA restore If this option is disabled no changes will be made to the SNMP parameters Restore PCU Security System Provisions This option dictates whether security system related parameters should be overwritten on the PCU by an SCA restore Security system provisions include such items as system and user account names and passwords as well as acceptance criteria of user passwords such as case sensitivity and the options of allowing NULL or empty passwords If this option is enabled the security system parameters will be overwritten by the SCA restore If this option is disabled no changes will be made to the security system parameters 10 Enable and or disable the appropriate options according to the needs of the specific situation 11 Return to the System Configuration Archive SCA menu by pressing Esc 12 From the System Configuration Archive SCA menu select SCA Module Restore Provisioning and press ENTER The SCA Module Restore Provisioning menu shown in Figure 7 9 will be displayed This screen will display all of the module slots 1 28 22 for access slots and A and B for cell switch module slots Each slot will have the name of the module that occupies that slot and an indication of whether the SCA restore is enabled or disabled for that particular slot Each slot may be individually provisioned as enabled and disabled 7 11
312. tem Configuration Archive cece eee eee eee 7 113 1 INTOdUCION ean Naa LA o DP Rd ahr aad o BND Ande BAD Dhan Waaa PNG 7 113 2 Prerequisite Procedures 00 cece nes 7 114 3 Procedure i2 sda ob ee mites toad degen DN ADD UA to DA and 7 115 Configure the TFTP Server Address cece eet 7 115 Configure the SCA Restore Options cee eee 7 115 Perform the System Archive Restoration lille eese 7 118 4 Follow up Procedures 0 cece e eet es 7 118 DLP 761 Provisioning the Octal ADSL Access Module 00 eee ee eee eee 7 119 1 Introductions ouo Saca cir erp ate ed Ae Roe PR RR ara Ha Means 7 119 2 Prerequisite Procedures es 7 119 3 Materials Required es 7 119 A BrocedUre AA de 7 120 Provisioning Menu Options 0 0 cee 7 120 Provisioning the Octal ADSL Access Module 000 cece eee eee 7 121 5 Follow up Procedure 2 000 e eee eee eee 7 123 DLP 784 Auto Upgrade for System Firmware Upgrade eee eee 7 125 To Introduction 3492 an ee AA ee Pa Ee NG 7 125 2 Prerequisite Procedures 000 eee eens 7 125 34 Broced re ias eom ice ART AA RSEN AN 7 125 TETP File Caclie Explre i 22am apan uk ke net Re Re x EROR EE Rer E Ra 7 126 Firmware TFTP server 2 les 7 127 Auto Upgrade Config Basepath 0 ees 7 127 Auto Upgrade Config Filename 2 2 eee 7 127
313. tem Firmware Upgrade DLP 784 TL1 Raw TCP Port Secondary Telnet Port NTWK Mgmt Terminal Server Telnet Port NTWK Mgmt Terminal Server Security ADMIN Terminal Server Telnet Port ADMIN Terminal Server Security Telnet Dead Client Detection Domain Name System DNS DNS Lookup System Primary DNS Server Secondary DNS Server Domain Search List Default Route Interface IP Forwarding Get Prov from Mux TLI Target ID CLLI Code Unit Number Client Shelf Management Mode SNMP SNMP Trap Host Information 1 4 SNMP iflndex Method Controller Unit Traps ENABLE DISABLE Read Community Write Community System Name System Location System Contact SNMP Enable Authentication Traps Auto Upgrade TFTP Cache Expire Auto Upgrade Mode Auto Upgrade Config Refresh Interval Auto Upgrade Retries Auto Upgrade Config Basepath Auto Upgrade Config Filename SCA SCA TFTP Server SCA Remote Filename 61181918L1 1B 7 131 Section 7 Detailed Level Procedures DLP 784 Auto Upgrade for System Firmware Upgrade Total Access HDX System Manual SCA Provisioning SCA Line Card Restore bitmap Other Firmware TFTP Server IP Firmware TFTP Upgrade Filename User Account Information 4 FOLLOW UP PROCEDURES Once this procedure is complete return to the procedure which called out this DLP and continue with the tasks i
314. ters Insert CRC Errors 1 PNNI Disabled 2 Lowest Level Node 1 Transfer Protocol 2 SCU to MUX Baud Rate 3 TFTP File Name 4 Start Transter 5 Restore Factory Defaults and Reset 6 Restart Card with Latest Code App Software Rev App Code Chksum Build Date Build Time Boot Software Rev Boot Code Chksum Download Status 1 No Loopback 2 Network Payload Loopback 3 Network Loopback 4 Local Payload Loopback 5 Dual Loopback 6 LIU Network Loopback 7 LIU Digital Local Loopback 8 LIU Analog Local Loopback 1 OAM Loopback 2 Insert Cells 1 Single Port Loopback 2 Daisy Chain 1 YMODEM 2 TFTP 1 115 2k 2 57 6k 3 38 4k 1 Remote OAM ID 2 Type of OAM Cell 3 Send From Endpoint 1 4 Send From Endpoint 2 5 Reset OAM Loopback STATS 1 End to End 2 Segment y xipueddy seal nuay seoipueddy enuey wa sAs XAH cvv al 1 181618119 penuguoo a81 nusy C1L70L8LLN d 3S 7 ejnpow YMS freund ESO P Y e1n614 DS3 PSM Main Menu 1 DS3 LIU Performance Monitoring 6 Performance Monitoring 2 ATM Performance Monitoring 7 Protection Configuration 1 Operational Status 2 APS Lockout Status 3 Perform APS Switch 1 Daily 2 Far End Dail 3 Total 24 Hour Period 4 Total 24 Hour Period Far End 6 Far End Qrtr Hourly 7 Reset Performance Registers 1 DS3 ATM Stats 2 MGMT ATM Stats 3 Port ATM Stats Slot Port 4 VC VP ATM Stats 5 ATM M
315. this procedure is complete return to the procedure which referred to this DLP and continue with the tasks indicated 7 40 61181918L1 1B DLP 524 DS3 Primary Switch Module Installation 1 INTRODUCTION This procedure provides step by step instructions for the installation of the DS3 Primary Switch Module PSM into a HDX System Installation procedures include the removal of the product from its packaging inspecting for damage and seating the unit in the Total Access 3000 chassis Acceptance testing is provided in DLP 854 Central Office Installation Acceptance Test Procedure 2 PREREQUISITE PROCEDURES The following procedures must be completed prior to installing the PSM If necessary refer to the appro priate documentation before proceeding PREP 405 Preparing for Chassis Installation in Section 4 Site Preparation NTP 020 HDX System Installation DLP 708 Installing the High Speed Connector Module 3 MATERIALS REQUIRED Total Access 3000 PSM P N 1181041L3 two modules are required for 1 1 protection switching appli cations WARNING To prevent electrical shock do not install equipment in a wet location or during a lightning storm CAUTION Electronic modules can be damaged by static electrical discharge Before handling modules wear an antistatic discharge wrist strap to prevent dam age to electronic components Place modules in antistatic packing mate rial when transporting or storing When wo
316. tial 1 Verify MDF Wiring Verify Timing Connections Verify Fan Operation Verify Alarm Relay Output Connections Verify Inter Shelf Communication Verify External Modem Connection I M nm AJ W N Verify IP LAN Connection NOTE Write N A by any step which is not applicable to the installed configura tion Comments Installation Engineer Sign off Name print Date Completed Signature Customer Sign off Name print Date Completed Signature 7 224 61181918L1 1B Appendix A Menu Trees 1 INTRODUCTION This appendix is designed for use by network engineers network operations control personnel and field technicians who are provisioning the equipment for use in the network NOTE This Section contains menu trees for generally available HDX System modules For a menu tree that is based on a specific system code release refer to the specific Installation and Maintenance Practice The menu trees are user friendly maps that may be used to locate provisioning options with ease Each menu tree will be labeled with the description and ADTRAN part number Some of the menu trees will span multiple pages signified by continued in the title of the illustration FIGURES Figure A 1 Total Access Main Menu Tree 2 n A 2 Figure A 2 Primary Controller Unit PCU P N 1181918L1 Menu Tree A 3 Figure A 3
317. ting Metallic Test Access Equipment to the Total Access 3050 7 121 DLP 786 Connecting MDF to the Total Access 3050 Splitter Shelf 7 123 61181918L1 1B 7 1 Section 7 Detailed Level Procedures Total Access HDX System Manual DLP 787 DLP 789 DLP 790 DLP 791 DLP 792 DLP 793 DLP 795 DLP 796 DLP 797 DLP 799 DLP 800 DLP 801 DLP 854 7 2 Setting NMA TIRKS Parameters in the PCU 2 c cece eee eee 7 127 Setting IP Parameters for an PCU eee 7 129 Routing Cable Through the Heat Baffle 0 eee 7 133 Verify Total Access 3050 Splitter Shelf Wiring to the MDF 7 137 Verifying the Fan Assembly Alarm Connection to the PCU 7 145 Verifying the Alarm Relay Output Connections to the PCU 7 149 Verifying PCU Communications Over an IP LAN 0 0 cece eee eee 7 155 Upgrading the PCU Software 00 cece eee RR n nnn 7 161 Setting System Security Settings in the PCU ee 7 165 Provisioning an In band Management PVC Connection eee eeeee 7 197 Provisioning PVC Connections for a DS3 Primary Switch Module 7 201 Connecting the Total Access 3000 and Total Access 3050 7 205 Central Office Installation Acceptance Test Procedure 7 209 61181918L1 1B Total Access HDX System Manual Detailed Level Procedures Section 7 FIGURES Figure 7
318. tion 10 Remove the fuses turn off circuit breakers from the A and B slots for the pair determined in the above step Cut four lengths of AWG 18 wire minimum to reach from the terminals on the fuse and alarm panel to the power terminals on the Total Access 3050 chassis Be sure to include enough length to allow for tying the wire neatly to the frame as specified by CO SOP Wire color should differentiate between 48 VDC supply and return according to CO SOP Using the crimping tool connect an appropriate lug for the fuse and alarm panel to one end of the wires Using a screwdriver appropriate for the fuse and alarm panel terminals and a small straight slot screwdriver for the Total Access 3050 modular connector connect the ends of one wire between the A CO 48 VDC supply and the terminal of the connector that corresponds to 48 VDC PRI on the Total Access 3050 backplane Connect three more power wires connecting the A CO 48 VDC return with the 48 VDC RET on the primary side B CO 48 VDC supply with 48 VDC SEC and B CO 48 VDC return with 48 VDC RET on the secondary side Connect power to the Fan Assembly The Total Access 3000 Fan Assembly is powered by dual independent 48 VDC 1 amp power supplies from the CO The Fan Assembly comes with a 1 amp fuse mounted on the fan frame and draws less than 200 milliamperes To connect power to a Fan Assembly perform
319. tions of documents and is also used for emphasis This font indicates screen messages and prompts This font indicates text to be typed exactly as shown This font indicates silk screen labels or other system label items This font indicates the first reference to a table or figure and is also used for strong emphasis NOTE Notes inform the user of additional but essential information or features CAUTION Cautions inform the user of potential damage malfunction or disruption to equipment software or environment WARNING Warnings inform the user of potential bodily pain injury or death 61181918L1 1B iii Total Access HDX System Manual Reference Documentation The following documents are referenced in this manual Document Total Access EMS User s Manual Total Access EMS Installation Guide Total Access EMS Administrative Guide Total Access 3000 3010 System TL1 Reference Guide Total Access 3000 23 Chassis Job Aid Total Access 3050 Splitter Shelf Job Aid Total Access 3000 23 Inch Chassis Installation and Maintenance Practice Total Access 3050 Splitter Shelf Installation and Maintenance Practice Primary Controller Unit Job Aid Expansion Controller Unit Job Aid DS3 Primary Switch Module Job Aid Expansion Switch Module Job Aid Total Access 3000 3010 Octal ADSL Central Office Unit Job Aid Total Access 3000 3010 Octal ADSL Central Office Unit Installation and Maintenance Practice Total
320. troller Unit Cable tie holders are built into the Fan Assembly to accept the cable ties provided For the install to be UL 1950 certified ADTRAN requires that the following installation guidelines be followed The Fan Assembly is intended for installation in Restricted Access Locations Only The Fan Assembly shall be installed in accordance with the requirements of NEC NFPA 70 5 Remove the protective cover from the terminal block by squeezing the black plastic clips on each end of the terminal block and pulling the cover off 6 Make the proper power return frame ground and alarm connections to the terminal block 7 Route the wires using the wire ties provided ensuring that the wires do not interfere with the operation of the fans 8 Replace the protective terminal block cover to avoid inadvertent electrical shock To be UL 1950 certified ADTRAN requires that the following connection guidelines be followed The Fan Assembly must be connected to a reliably grounded 48 VDC source which is electrically isolated from the AC source The frame ground stud located on the fan plate must be connected to a reliable frame ground source A readily accessible disconnect device that is suitably approved and rated must be incorporated into the fixed wiring e g Fuse and Alarm Panel The branch circuit overcurrent protection shall be a fuse or circuit breaker rated 48 VDC IA 6 FOLLOW UP PROCEDURES Once this procedure is complete
321. troller Unit PCU in conjunction with a TFTP server provides the ability to manually or automatically store the system configuration for use during disaster recovery In addition to its use for fast recovery of system provisioning in the case of flood or fire the SCA System Configuration Archive system may be used to clone baseline system configurations to new installations so that only a few system specific provisioning options need to be altered This can significantly reduce initial setup time The system administrator may access and control the SCA system using EMS terminal menus or SNMP The administrator can perform manual saves of SCA information to a TFTP server or can schedule automatic save operations for certain times of the day Scheduling save operations will help to reduce simultaneous SCA system generated network traffic The SCA system save operation saves backup information from all modules present in the shelf including the PCU cell switch modules and access modules The restore operation allows the administrator to specify which modules provisioning options are to be restored NOTE SCA menus and operations are available only to privileged administrator level accounts 61181918L1 1B 7 113 Section 7 Detailed Level Procedures Total Access HDX System Manual DLP 730 Restoring the System Configuration Archive 2 PREREQUISITE PROCEDURES The following procedures must be completed prior to configuring the S
322. ts own cardboard shipping carton unless it was ordered as a fully racked system 1 Unpack the components inspect them for damage NOTE When opening each carton be careful to avoid cutting deeply into the car ton with sharp objects If the equipment has been damaged in transit file a claim with the carrier and then contact ADTRAN Customer Service refer to Appendix B Warranty 7 8 61181918L1 1B Total Access HDX System Manual Detailed Level Procedures Section 7 HDX System Installation DLP 520 Mount Shelves Heat Baffles and Fans 2 Attach the mounting brackets and physically install each chassis the Heat Baffle and the Fan Assem blies in the manner shown in Figure 7 1 For details refer to For flush mount details refer to DLP 521 For details refer to For mid mount details refer to DLP 522 ap 3 Total Access 3050 a mes S a 9 9 ME o q 7 gt d Fe e e o 0 0L gj 0 0 is als Ao o al 0 0 o ol el e 0 LO o E e le o lo Paani WINI Total Access 3050 o lo lo lo lo 0 0 lo fe a 0 JE a A o 0 0 lof o e al o 0 e 9 lo l alm 0 lo o e lo lo 3 ABER SN Total Access 3050 o o lo lo o 0 0 lo fA 0 0 ur 9 0 0 e 0 pa E e al io 0 e e oli o ol 0 o ol e y 3 o
323. twork Provisions This option dictates whether general IP network related provi sioning parameters should be restored on the PCU General IP network related parameters include the various telnet DNS IP forwarding and firmware TFTP server settings This option does not control the restore of network interface settings such as IP address netmask or gateway 61181918L1 1B 7 115 Section 7 Detailed Level Procedures Total Access HDX System Manual DLP 730 Restoring the System Configuration Archive Restore PCU Network Interface Provisions This option dictates whether network interface related settings such as IP address netmask and gateway for the Ethernet Inband and Local PPP network interface are to be overwritten on the PCU If this option is enabled the network interface parameters will be overwritten by the SCA restore If this option is disabled no changes will be made to the network interface parameters NOTE If the network interface parameters are changed all TCP IP SNMP and Telnet communication will be halted until the devices trying to communi cate with the PCU are provisioned to correctly handle the change e Restore PCU SNMP Provisions This option dictates whether SNMP related parameters will be overwritten on the PCU by an SCA restore SNMP related parameters include such items as SNMP Indexing method trap host IP addresses System Name Location and Contact strings as well as the public and priva
324. ual customer loop connec tions for the Total Access 3000 See Figure 3 1 for a graphical representation of this application 61181918L1 1B 3 3 Section 3 Application Guidelines APP 320 High Density Expansion ADSL Total Access HDX System Manual Octal ADSL Access Module 28 Total Access 3000 Shelf Total Access 3000 N DD CAT 5e Cable s Tm mm connect the Total Access 3000 Shelf 2 cables for APS ae lle I ee Total Access 3050 Total Access 3000 and Total Access 3050 First Set of Expansion Shelves 224 Additional ADSL Splitter Total Access 3000 and Total Access 3050 Second Set of Expansion Shelves 224 Additional ADSL Splitter Total Access 3000 and Total Access 3050 Third Set of Expansion Shelves 224 Additional ADSL Splitter Total Access 3000 and Total Access 3050 Fouth Set of Expansion Shelves 224 Additional ADSL Splitter Total Access 3000 and Total Access 3050 Fifth Set of Expansion Shelves 6 total sets of shelves 224 Additional ADSL Splitter Figure 3 1 HDX ADSL 3 4 HDX System Primary Shelves 224 ADSL Splitter Total Access 3050 xDSL Splitter Module 28 Total Access 3050 Shelf 61181918L1 1B Total Access HDX System Manual Application Guidelines Section 3 High Density Expansion ADSL APP 320 2 COMPONENTS To implement the Total Access HDX ADSL architecture fed by an ATM DS3 the following equipment is needed
325. ud Redit 1 13 Shelf Controller Units 02 cee 1 14 Primary Controller Unit 20 00 I a 1 14 Features aa nG Be NG EM 1 15 Expansion Controller Unit oooooococooo 1 16 AA ETE ad a a 1 16 Primary Switch Modules PSMs 2222 eee 1 17 DS3 Primary Switch Module 2 22 22 eae 1 17 Expansion Switch Module 1 20 FECQ UTES e PCT 1 20 Access Modules sss ges RA Me Rea ety Fs Idee ULANG E ere DA ee TA 1 21 Total Access 3000 Octal ADSL P N 1181405L1 eee ee 1 21 Total Access 3050 Metallic Test Controller P N 1183010L1 0 04 1 23 la 1 23 Total Access 3050 xDSL Splitter Module w MTA P N 1183002L2 1 24 Miscellaneous Equipment ls 1 26 Heat Baffle and Fiber Tray e mh 1 26 Fan ASSOMDIY APP 1 28 Total Access 3050 to Total Access 3000 Cable Assembly 1 29 61181918L1 1B 1 1 Section 1 System Description Total Access HDX System Manual 8 Port Ethernet Hub ta a a mi s 1 30 BNC Adaptor Modules 000 cece cette eee 1 31 Total Access 3050 Streaker Test Access Module 2 1 32 4 Bay Configurations eee eee eee rh hh 1 33 FIGURES Figure 1 1 HDX Configurations xisco DAG SY hap Dha de SA Ae dea Had Mate bates 1 4 Figure 1 2 Total Access 3000 Backplane 0 cee eee 1 6 Figure 1 3 Front View of Total Access 3000 Shelf eee 1 11 Figure 1 4 Total Access 3050 Chassis 0 0 i
326. uirements of NEC NFPA 70 5 Remove the protective cover from the terminal block by squeezing the black plastic clips on each end of the terminal block and pulling the cover off 6 Make the proper power return frame ground and alarm connections to the terminal block 7 Route the wires using the wire ties provided ensuring that the wires do not interfere with the operation of the fans 8 Replace the protective terminal block cover to avoid inadvertent electrical shock To be UL 1950 certified ADTRAN requires that the following connection guidelines be followed The Fan Assembly must be connected to a reliably grounded 48 VDC source which is electrically isolated from the AC source The frame ground stud located on the fan plate must be connected to a reliable frame ground source A readily accessible disconnect device that is suitably approved and rated must be incorporated into the fixed wiring e g Fuse and Alarm Panel The branch circuit overcurrent protection shall be a fuse or circuit breaker rated 48 VDC IA 6 FOLLOW UP PROCEDURES Once this procedure is complete return to the procedure which referred to this DLP and continue with the tasks indicated 61181918L1 1B 7 27 Section 7 Detailed Level Procedures Total AccessHDX System Manual DLP 521 Flush mounting the Shelves Heat Baffles and Fans This page is intentionally blank 7 28 61181918L1 1B DLP 522 Mid mounting the Shelves Heat Baffles and Fans
327. uld be performed at installation on each Total Access 3000 chassis that has a Fan Assembly installed in the Heat Baffle and Fiber Tray 2 PREREQUISITE PROCEDURES The following procedure must be completed prior to verifying the Fan Assembly s alarm connection to the PCU If necessary refer to the appropriate documentation before proceeding The prerequisite procedure is as follows e NTP 020 HDX System Installation e DLP 711 Connecting a Fan Assembly Alarm 3 TOOLS AND MATERIALS REQUIRED Fuse Extractor if required by model of fan fuse in use WARNING To prevent electrical shock do not install equipment in a wet location or during a lightning storm 61181918L1 1B 7 157 Section 7 Detailed Level Procedures DLP 792 Verifying the Fan Assembly Alarm Connection to the PCU Total Access HDX System Manual 7 158 CAUTION Electronic modules can be damaged by static electrical discharge Before handling modules wear an antistatic discharge wrist strap to prevent dam age to electronic components Place modules in antistatic packing mate rial when transporting or storing When working on modules always place them on an approved antistatic mat that is electrically grounded 61181918L1 1B Total Access HDX System Manual Detailed Level Procedures Section 7 Verifying the Fan Assembly Alarm Connection to the PCU DLP 792 DLP 792 Perform the following steps in order 4 PROCEDURE 1 Connect to t
328. umber of times before the HDX module is marked as being in an Auto Upgrade error state 61181918L1 1B 7 125 Section 7 Detailed Level Procedures DLP 784 Auto Upgrade for System Firmware Upgrade Total Access HDX System Manual Ifa serious TFTP error is encountered the Auto Upgrade system will cancel the upgrade after a provi sionable number of retries Ifa flash firmware file is not present on the TFTP server all modules requiring the missing file will be skipped and marked as being in an Auto Upgrade error state The PCU and each upgraded module will be reset following the firmware upgrade to allow the unit to restart and run the new firmware Modules inserted during an active Auto Upgrade will be re evaluated at the time of insertion and may be upgraded during the current Auto Upgrade session Figure 7 10 displays the Auto Upgrade Status menu TID HDX SYSTEM 2 PCU System 09 07 04 10 51 Unacknowledged Alarms CRITICAL ALERT INFO Unit Number 1 Auto Upgrade Status 1 TFTP File Cache Expire 480 minutes 2 Firmware TFTP server s T2 2 2 ab A 3 Auto Upgrade Config Basepath autoupgrade 4 Auto Upgrade Config Filename new auc 5 Auto Upgrade Mode Manual 6 Config File Refresh Interval 48 hours 7 Auto Upgrade Retries 2 3 Upgrades 15 1090 Errors 1 76 Upgrades needed 18 Shelf 01 06 05 Busy upgrading slot 3 14 1181405118 Slot 3 14 00 03 42 Busy send file to module 51 4
329. umentation before proceeding The prerequisite procedures include the following NTP 020 HDX System Installation e NTP 024 HDX System Modules Installation PSMs are needed only if the TFTP upgrade will be facil itated by the in band management channel Proper installation and connection of a TFTP server DLP 797 Setting System Security Settings in the PCU 7 108 PRELIMINARY 61181918L1 1B Total Access HDX System Manual Detailed Level Procedures Section 7 Saving the System Configuration Archive DLP 729 DLP 729 Perform the following steps in order 3 PROCEDURE 1 Determine SCA Parameters The SCA system needs to be provisioned with certain parameters before being used These parameters consist of the filename prefix filename suffix maximum automatic save instances Automatic Save Time and the TFTP server s IP address or hostname The filename prefix filename suffix and maximum file instances are used together to form the SCA filename on the TFTP server The Filename Prefix is a 0 30 character string that will be used to construct the beginning of the SCA filename LI The Filename Suffix is a 0 8 character string that will be used to construct the end of the SCA filename The suffix by default consists of sca If a period is desired in the extension of the filename it must be included in the filename suffix field The Maximum File Instances field determines the maximum number of SCA filenames
330. via the Security Challenge Key DLP 717 3 Call ADTRAN Technical Support at 1 800 726 8663 Technical Support will ask for the challenge key and will offer a password 4 Upon entering the correct password the Total Access Main menu is presented on the screen see Figure 7 8 Shelf Total Access System 07 09 03 18 27 Unacknowledged Alarms Total Access System Controller Common A PSM Common B Dusan sad Access Modules System Alarms Auxiliary Shelf Access Logoff YN OP WD HG Selection Figure 7 8 Total Access Main menu WARNING The Challenge Key response provided by ADTRAN Technical Support is only valid for one session At this time security account maintenance must be completed with the appropriate accounts and passwords prior to logging out of the system A logon to the HDX System has now been performed successfully At this time the user has complete ADMIN privileges 5 FOLLOW UP PROCEDURES Once this procedure is complete return to the procedure which called out this DLP and continue with the tasks indicated there 61181918L1 1B 7 105 Section 7 Detailed Level Procedures Total Access HDX System Manual DLP 717 Logging on via the Security Challenge Key This page is intentionally blank 7 106 61181918L1 1B DLP 729 Saving the System Configuration Archive 1 INTRODUCTION The Primary Controller Unit PCU in conjunction with a TFTP server provides the ability to ma
331. vides information specific to the implementation of the DSLAM High Density Expansion HDX ADSL Application The HDX application pairs a Total Access 3000 DSLAM shelf with a Total Access 3050 Splitter Shelf to allow each of the 28 slots on the Total Access 3000 shelf to host a Total Access Octal ADSL Access Module The Octal ADSL Access Module provides 8 ports of industry standard ADSL for delivery to the customer The 3000 DSLAM shelfis cabled to the Total Access 3050 Splitter Shelf which hosts 28 Octal POTS splitter modules mapped 1 1 to the Total Access 3000 Octal ADSL slots This allows each Total Access 3000 and Total Access 3050 shelf pair 3000 3050 shelf pair to host 224 connections 28 slots by 8 ports to provide ADSL POTS service to a customer on a single pair In addition the HDX architecture is able to extend the ATM network connectivity and switch capabilities of the Primary Switch Module PSM in the primary or host shelf across up to five additional 3000 3050 shelf pairs Expansion shelves are connected to the PSM with a CAT 5e modular cable via the Expansion Switch Module ESM installed in the same common shelf slot A or B on the expansion shelf that it s host PSM occupies on the primary shelf Up to five expansion shelves can be daisy chained with the CAT 5e cables for a total of six 3000 3050 shelf pairs This allows the primary shelf and the five expansion shelves to provide a total of 1344 ADSL POTS splitters 224 X 6 for individ
332. vilege Menu 0 c eee et eae 7 175 Figure 7 22 Account Properties Access Privileges Menu 000 0020 e eee eee 7 175 Figure 7 23 Access Rights Menu 0 06000 eet ee eee tee tee hh 7 176 Figure 7 24 Account Properties Access Privileges Menu 000 eee eee eae 7 177 Figure 7 25 Edit User Accounts Selection Menu cee eres 7 178 Figure 7 26 Edit User Account Menu 02 ee eae 7 179 Figure 7 27 Edit User Accounts Selection Menu 0 2 2 7 180 Figure 7 28 Edit User Account Menu 2 hh 7 181 Figure 7 29 Users Currently Logged On Menu 2 022 rn 7 182 Figure 7 30 Users Currently Logged On Menu 2 022 ee eee 7 183 Figure 7 31 Confirmation of Termination Logoff of User Session 0 0A 7 184 Figure 7 32 PCU General Provisioning Menu 000 cee n 7 186 Figure 7 33 Confirm Password Menu 22 000 eee eee eae 7 186 Figure 7 34 Total Access 3050 to Total Access 3000 Connection aa 7 205 61181918L1 1B 7 3 Section 7 Detailed Level Procedures Total Access HDX System Manual Table 7 1 Table 7 2 Table 7 3 Table 7 4 Table 7 5 Table 7 6 Table 7 7 Table 8 Table 7 1 Table 7 2 7 4 TABLES Recommended Wire Gauge and Fuse Sizes 1 ee 7 6 Recommended Wire Gauge and Fuse Sizes eee 7 24 Recommended Wire Gauge and Fuse Sizes sees 7 30 ADMIN Connector Pinout J31 J18 2 0 eee 7
333. wing procedures must be completed prior to connecting MDF to a Total Access 3050 Splitter Shelf If necessary refer to the appropriate documentation before proceeding The following prerequisite procedure is recommended NTP 020 HDX System Installation 3 TOOLS REQUIRED Wire strippers Wirewrap tool Small straight slot screwdriver WARNING To prevent electrical shock do not install equipment in a wet location or during a lightning storm CAUTION Electronic modules can be damaged by static electrical discharge Before handling modules wear an anti static discharge wrist strap to prevent damageto electronic components Place modules in anti static packing material when transporting or storing When working on modules always place them on an approved anti static mat that is electrically grounded 61181918L1 1B 7 137 Section 7 Detailed Level Procedures Total Access HDX System Manual DLP 786 Connecting MDF to the Total Access 3050 Splitter Shelf DLP 786 Perform the following steps in order 4 PROCEDURE 1 Using Table 7 7 as reference and noting the orientation of the Total Access 3050 chassis backplane male connection receptacle push the straight in female cable connector onto the backplane connector NOTE Straight in 50 pin female connectors with shielded 25 pair cable should be used for connecting the Total Access 3050 chassis to the MDF 2 Using a small straight slot screwdrive
334. wire and lugs for power connections in colors dictated by the CO for the battery feed and return to the Total Access 3000 chassis Total Access 3050 and Fan Assembly Insulated 6 gauge wire and lugs for frame ground Data cables terminated at the Total Access 3050 side with 50 pin amphenol connectors and at the other end with either stubs or 64 pin 50 pin amphenol connectors depending on the mechanics of MDF These cables should be of sufficient length to reach from the Total Access 3050 location in the CO to the MDF for customer loops or the cross connect for the PSTN Coaxial cable appropriate for DS3 network input to the Total Access 3000 chassis WARNING To prevent electrical shock do not install equipment in a wet location or during a lightning storm CAUTION Electronic modules can be damaged by static electrical discharge Before handling modules wear an antistatic discharge wrist strap to prevent dam age to electronic components Place modules in antistatic packing mate rial when transporting or storing When working on modules always place them on an approved antistatic mat that is electrically grounded 61181918L1 1B 7 7 Section 7 Detailed Level Procedures Total Access HDX System Manual DLP 520 HDX System Installation DLP 520 Perform the following steps in order 5 PROCEDURE Unpack and Inspect the Shelves Heat Baffle and Fan Assembly Fach component of the HDX System is shipped in i
335. wn for clarity 3 Install the cables in the following order with each cable loop on the left side when facing the backplane 4 Locate Cable 5 and connect to Pair 5 on the Total Access 3000 and the Total Access 3050 Using the screws provided secure the amphenol connector to the Total Access 3050 chassis Using one screw and the wire tie wrap previously installed secure the amphenol connector to the Total Access 3000 chassis 5 Repeat this procedure for the remaining cables in the following order Cable 6 to Pair 6 Cable 7 to Pair 7 Cable 8 to Pair 8 Cable 4 to Pair 4 Cable 3 to Pair 3 Cable 2 to Pair 2 Cable 1 to Pair 1 6 Reinstall the rear plastic guard For details refer to DLP 701 6 FOLLOW UP PROCEDURE Once this procedure is complete return to the procedure that called out this DLP and continue with the tasks indicated there 61181918L1 1B 7 219 Section 7 Detailed Level Procedures Total Access HDX System Manual DLP 801 Connecting the Total Access 3000 and Total Access 3050 This page is intentionally blank 7 220 61181918L1 1B DLP 854 Central Office Installation Acceptance Test Procedure 1 INTRODUCTION This procedure details the test steps which must be performed to verify that one or more Total Access 3000 shelves have been properly installed in a Central Office CO An Acceptance Test Checklist is provided at the end of this procedure for sign off upon completion of this phase
336. work Management Port Mode Enter date MM DD YY Enter time HH MM SS 1 Auto Logoff 2 Auto Logoff Time 1 Enable 2 Disable 1 Users Currently Logged On 2 Edit User Accounts 3 Create New User Accounts 4 Security Options 5 Restore Back to Default Accounts 6 Access Tech Support Account Currently Logged in Account 1 Terminal Server amp Admin Port Baud Rate 2 Admin Port Communications 3 Use RTS CTS Hardware Handshaking 4 Terminate Session upon Carrier Loss 5 De assert Drop DTR on Logout 1 9600 2 19200 3 38400 4 57600 5 115200 1 Host 2 Client 1 X 25 2 Terminal Server 3 Accessory Option 1 Disable 2 Enable Enter Terminal Auto Logoff time 1 60 minutes 1 Change Password Access Privilege 2 Enable Disable User Account 3 Delete User 1 Enable Tech Support Account Yes 2 Enable SNMP Security Account Access No 3 Lock Out User on Login Failure No 4 Case Sensitive Password User ID Yes 5 Null Password Accepted No 6 Enable Lock Out Alarm Yes 7 Number of Login Failure Before Lock Out 2 5 5 8 Lock Out Duration in Seconds 3 60 60 9 Enable Advisory Warning Message No 10 Security Advisory Warning 11 Enable Multiple Login Accounts Yes 1 9600 2 19200 3 38400 4 57600 5 115200 1 Menus 2 TL1 3 TL1 Test Access 1 Disable 2 Enable y xipueddy seal nuay seoipueddy enuey wa sAs XAH
337. y grounded 61181918L1 1B 7 133 Section 7 Detailed Level Procedures Total Access HDX System Manual DLP 785 Connecting Metallic Test Access Equipment to the Total Access 3050 DLP 785 Perform the following steps in order 4 PROCEDURE The following steps outline the procedure used to connect MTC equipment to the Total Access 3050 1 Install wire from the equipment test head and facilities test access loops to the Total Access 3050 chassis 2 Using wire strippers strip 1 to 1 1 2 inches from the test lead wires 3 Using the wire wrap tool wrap the equipment test access loop Tip and Ring leads to the Total Access 3050 chassis backplane EQP T and EQP R pins respectively on P29 located in the lower right corner of the backplane see Figure 7 11 4 If using a shielded cable wire wrap the drain wire from the equipment test head loop to the first pin on left labeled SHIELD 5 Wire wrap the test head facility test bus Tip and Ring leads to the pins marked FAC T and FAC R respectively 6 If a shielded cable is used wire wrap the drain cable from the facility cable to the remaining pin marked SHIELD 7 Tie down the test wires or cables and replace any cables that were temporarily disconnected SPLITTER TEST ACCESS BUS mi a Cc E W ao a W ald L O OI N ul uy YN E n a ale p29 HI Figure 7 11 Total Access 3050 Chassis Test Bus 5 FOLLOW UP PROCEDURES Once this procedure is compl
338. zontal Spacers in a NEBS Lineup 2 4 4 Fitting the Chassis into MTU and RT Applications 4 4 4 Electrical Considerations llli 4 4 Power Wiring and Fusing 0 0 00 eee eee 4 4 Frame Ground edere nG ag Ka Nd ede esed edu onda e pa Ru Que 4 5 5 Timing Considerations 0 ccc ee eae 4 5 TECIOCK cv ETE 4 5 6 DSX Considerations elles 4 6 DSX SA et etae die teas aye ALE ath RU Sant aa Mare TOR 4 6 7 Main Distribution Frame MDF Considerations a 4 7 Wiring Connections to the MDF 0 2 cece I I uh 4 7 Horizontal side Terminal Blocks 0 0000 cece ee eee eee eae 4 7 8 Follow up Procedures 00 000 na reia nh 4 7 TABLES Table 4 1 TSI Amphenol Cable Model Number for DSX 1 Applications 4 6 61181918L1 1B 4 1 Section 4 Site Preparation Total Access HDX System Manual This page is intentionally blank 61181918L1 1B PREP 405 Preparing for Chassis Installation 1 INTRODUCTION This section provides details of how a Central Office CO MultiTenant Unit MTU or Remote Terminal RT should be prepared to accept the installation of one or more HDX Systems Systems that will be installed in the same bay or in adjacent bays should be engineered together so that they can share common feeds for power timing and management interfaces as appropriate for the application 2 PREREQUISITE PROCEDURES B

Total Access® High Density Expansion (HDX) System Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

Total Access&reg; High Density Expansion (HDX) System Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

Total Access® High Density Expansion (HDX) System Manual